# PaCkAgE DaTaStReAm tk 1 14156 # end of header 0707010003fc04000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56d4000000ec000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000000b00000000tk/pkginfoPKG=tk NAME=tk 8.5.8 i86pc Solaris 10 VERSION=8.5.8 PSTAMP=6th August 2010 VENDOR=The Tcl Project EMAIL=http://www.tcl.tk/software/tcltk/ DESC=Tk GUI ARCH=i386 CATEGORY=utility CLASSES=none BASEDIR=/ ISTATES=S s 1 2 3 RSTATES=S s 1 2 3 0707010003fc03000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56d40000b527000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000000a00000000tk/pkgmap: 1 14156 1 d none /usr ? ? ? 1 d none /usr/local ? ? ? 1 d none /usr/local/bin 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/bin/wish8.5 0755 root root 8936 48520 1281119924 1 d none /usr/local/include 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/include/tk.h 0644 root root 57479 52182 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/include/tkDecls.h 0644 root root 109265 56005 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/include/tkPlatDecls.h 0644 root root 7731 41319 1281119924 1 d none /usr/local/lib 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/libtk8.5.so 0555 root root 1768296 63683 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/libtkstub8.5.a 0644 root root 10700 52637 1281119924 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/bgerror.tcl 0644 root root 8054 10046 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/button.tcl 0644 root root 19904 1268 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/choosedir.tcl 0644 root root 9701 17635 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/clrpick.tcl 0644 root root 21293 41607 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/comdlg.tcl 0644 root root 7793 41038 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/console.tcl 0644 root root 29119 27895 1281119924 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/README 0644 root root 2141 58836 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/anilabel.tcl 0644 root root 6738 40709 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/aniwave.tcl 0644 root root 3562 47158 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/arrow.tcl 0644 root root 8049 61936 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/bind.tcl 0644 root root 3007 1843 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/bitmap.tcl 0644 root root 1477 58526 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/browse 0755 root root 1820 20825 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/button.tcl 0644 root root 1570 1777 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/check.tcl 0644 root root 2343 1397 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/clrpick.tcl 0644 root root 1498 61393 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/colors.tcl 0644 root root 5061 42637 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/combo.tcl 0644 root root 2048 45910 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/cscroll.tcl 0644 root root 3456 23401 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ctext.tcl 0644 root root 4939 24246 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/dialog1.tcl 0644 root root 731 62697 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/dialog2.tcl 0644 root root 680 57289 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/en.msg 0644 root root 3890 8985 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/entry1.tcl 0644 root root 1451 60413 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/entry2.tcl 0644 root root 2177 58082 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/entry3.tcl 0644 root root 6160 63870 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/filebox.tcl 0644 root root 2325 57798 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/floor.tcl 0644 root root 79163 59939 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/form.tcl 0644 root root 1110 26793 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/goldberg.tcl 0644 root root 56556 38917 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/hello 0755 root root 568 46656 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/hscale.tcl 0644 root root 1563 61608 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/icon.tcl 0644 root root 2127 57931 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/image1.tcl 0644 root root 1068 25983 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/image2.tcl 0644 root root 3429 27175 1281119925 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/earth.gif 0644 root root 51712 45825 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/earthris.gif 0644 root root 6343 14546 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/face.xbm 0644 root root 12720 3276 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/flagdown.xbm 0644 root root 1886 45912 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/flagup.xbm 0644 root root 1880 48731 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/gray25.xbm 0644 root root 275 17845 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/letters.xbm 0644 root root 1883 45587 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/noletter.xbm 0644 root root 1889 49923 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/pattern.xbm 0644 root root 272 18096 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/tcllogo.gif 0644 root root 2341 13514 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/teapot.ppm 0644 root root 196623 33672 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/items.tcl 0644 root root 9789 6165 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ixset 0755 root root 8159 59762 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/knightstour.tcl 0644 root root 8586 25243 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/label.tcl 0644 root root 1383 53705 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/labelframe.tcl 0644 root root 1917 25905 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/license.terms 0644 root root 2209 55092 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/mclist.tcl 0644 root root 3484 32310 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/menu.tcl 0644 root root 6800 60623 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/menubu.tcl 0644 root root 4545 63986 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/msgbox.tcl 0644 root root 2089 48065 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/nl.msg 0644 root root 6769 55873 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/paned1.tcl 0644 root root 1176 36965 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/paned2.tcl 0644 root root 2295 1052 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/pendulum.tcl 0644 root root 7710 55003 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/plot.tcl 0644 root root 2822 32225 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/puzzle.tcl 0644 root root 2663 20288 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/radio.tcl 0644 root root 2817 43941 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/rmt 0755 root root 5397 60715 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/rolodex 0755 root root 8363 48619 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ruler.tcl 0644 root root 5276 42965 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/sayings.tcl 0644 root root 2330 5682 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/search.tcl 0644 root root 4464 51974 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/spin.tcl 0644 root root 1884 30594 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/square 0644 root root 1375 45123 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/states.tcl 0644 root root 1733 18157 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/style.tcl 0644 root root 7003 27534 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/tclIndex 0644 root root 4354 10748 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/tcolor 0755 root root 11307 609 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/text.tcl 0644 root root 3485 48726 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/textpeer.tcl 0644 root root 2251 61228 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/timer 0755 root root 1175 33223 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/toolbar.tcl 0644 root root 3799 64580 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/tree.tcl 0644 root root 3431 28586 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ttkbut.tcl 0644 root root 3491 42588 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ttkmenu.tcl 0644 root root 2478 16925 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ttknote.tcl 0644 root root 2539 23294 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ttkpane.tcl 0644 root root 4114 25134 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ttkprogress.tcl 0644 root root 1627 9296 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/twind.tcl 0644 root root 10893 1717 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/unicodeout.tcl 0644 root root 3124 57959 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/vscale.tcl 0644 root root 1543 59807 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/widget 0755 root root 23224 13175 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/dialog.tcl 0644 root root 6633 25547 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/entry.tcl 0644 root root 17026 31944 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/focus.tcl 0644 root root 4923 10923 1281119924 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/README 0644 root root 388 32710 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/logo.eps 0644 root root 32900 31317 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/logo100.gif 0644 root root 2341 13514 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/logo64.gif 0644 root root 1670 61083 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/logoLarge.gif 0644 root root 11000 38754 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/logoMed.gif 0644 root root 3889 4936 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo.eps 0644 root root 27809 41490 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo100.gif 0644 root root 1615 38261 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo150.gif 0644 root root 2489 17507 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo175.gif 0644 root root 2981 10815 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo200.gif 0644 root root 3491 7374 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo75.gif 0644 root root 1171 58456 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/tai-ku.gif 0644 root root 5473 11946 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/listbox.tcl 0644 root root 14044 41000 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/menu.tcl 0644 root root 36663 30131 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/mkpsenc.tcl 0644 root root 27260 10069 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgbox.tcl 0644 root root 17011 2573 1281119924 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/cs.msg 0644 root root 4506 23632 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/da.msg 0644 root root 3866 38980 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/de.msg 0644 root root 3937 51585 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/el.msg 0644 root root 8609 32579 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/en.msg 0644 root root 2793 22312 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/en_gb.msg 0644 root root 63 5359 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/eo.msg 0644 root root 3845 44025 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/es.msg 0644 root root 3924 49269 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/fr.msg 0644 root root 3727 35326 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/hu.msg 0644 root root 4588 34168 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/it.msg 0644 root root 3557 20496 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/nl.msg 0644 root root 7095 53520 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/pl.msg 0644 root root 3948 50303 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/pt.msg 0644 root root 3973 59980 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/ru.msg 0644 root root 7105 56197 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/sv.msg 0644 root root 3762 33687 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/obsolete.tcl 0644 root root 5562 5783 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/optMenu.tcl 0644 root root 1653 8919 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/palette.tcl 0644 root root 7946 4770 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/panedwindow.tcl 0644 root root 5250 37963 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/pkgIndex.tcl 0644 root root 125 10611 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/safetk.tcl 0644 root root 7254 14429 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/scale.tcl 0644 root root 7685 33041 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/scrlbar.tcl 0644 root root 12080 14381 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/spinbox.tcl 0644 root root 15159 7260 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/tclIndex 0644 root root 22293 22880 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/tearoff.tcl 0644 root root 4851 2016 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/text.tcl 0644 root root 32384 54059 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/tk.tcl 0644 root root 18124 43866 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/tkAppInit.c 0644 root root 3905 36295 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/tkfbox.tcl 0644 root root 53996 20875 1281119924 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/altTheme.tcl 0644 root root 3344 19218 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/aquaTheme.tcl 0644 root root 2306 3441 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/button.tcl 0644 root root 2986 59193 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/clamTheme.tcl 0644 root root 4343 24939 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/classicTheme.tcl 0644 root root 3508 36443 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/combobox.tcl 0644 root root 12018 28903 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/cursors.tcl 0644 root root 4068 9948 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/defaults.tcl 0644 root root 3523 32446 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/entry.tcl 0644 root root 15996 25578 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/fonts.tcl 0644 root root 5627 8822 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/menubutton.tcl 0644 root root 4948 22178 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/notebook.tcl 0644 root root 5424 62453 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/panedwindow.tcl 0644 root root 2040 34510 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/progress.tcl 0644 root root 1149 31276 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/scale.tcl 0644 root root 2612 3332 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/scrollbar.tcl 0644 root root 3156 61029 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/sizegrip.tcl 0644 root root 1865 18289 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/treeview.tcl 0644 root root 9252 44871 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/ttk.tcl 0644 root root 4472 50277 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/utils.tcl 0644 root root 7406 23846 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/vistaTheme.tcl 0644 root root 9109 51770 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/winTheme.tcl 0644 root root 2654 32917 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/xpTheme.tcl 0644 root root 1747 18125 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/unsupported.tcl 0644 root root 11461 15276 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/xmfbox.tcl 0644 root root 25905 13986 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tkConfig.sh 0644 root root 4095 9507 1281119924 1 d none /usr/local/man 0755 root root 1 d none /usr/local/man/man1 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/man/man1/wish.1 0444 root root 15122 41445 1281119925 1 d none /usr/local/man/man3 0755 root root 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DBorderColor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DBorderGC.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DVerticalBevel.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AddOption.3 0444 root root 7540 16933 1281119926 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 0444 root root 19675 64494 1281119925 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfBitmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AllocColorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AllocCursorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AllocFontFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeFont.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AttachHWND.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetHWND.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Attributes.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_BindEvent.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBinding.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTkwin.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTkwin.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasGetCoord.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTkwin.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsBitmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsColor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsFont.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsPath.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 0444 root root 10664 40638 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsY.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTkwin.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTagsOption.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTkwin.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTextInfo.3 0444 root root 10213 64436 1281119926 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTkwin.3 0444 root root 12442 4044 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasWindowCoords.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTkwin.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Changes.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CharBbox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Class.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetClass.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ClearSelection.3 0444 root root 7119 43311 1281119926 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ClipboardAppend.3 0444 root root 8936 13657 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ClipboardClear.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ClipboardAppend.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CollapseMotionEvents.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_QueueWindowEvent.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Colormap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ComputeTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureInfo.3 0444 root root 34947 60048 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureValue.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureInfo.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureWidget.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureInfo.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CoordsToWindow.3 0444 root root 7600 22084 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateBinding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBinding.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateBindingTable.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBinding.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler.3 0444 root root 8507 39411 1281119926 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateErrorHandler.3 0444 root root 12168 47407 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateEventHandler.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteEventHandler.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateGenericHandler.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteGenericHandler.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateImageType.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImageMasterData.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateItemType.3 0444 root root 30138 21989 1281119926 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3 0444 root root 38706 36077 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat.3 0444 root root 17984 34663 1281119926 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateSelHandler.3 0444 root root 11125 15529 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DestroyWindow.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateWindowFromPath.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DestroyWindow.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DefineBitmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfBitmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DefineCursor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteAllBindings.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBinding.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBinding.3 0444 root root 12581 20144 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBindingTable.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBinding.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteErrorHandler.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateErrorHandler.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteEventHandler.3 0444 root root 8915 10112 1281119926 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteGenericHandler.3 0444 root root 9246 41215 1281119926 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteImage.3 0444 root root 6786 12055 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteOptionTable.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteSelHandler.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateSelHandler.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Depth.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DestroyWindow.3 0444 root root 12431 3751 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Display.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DistanceToTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Draw3DPolygon.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Draw3DRectangle.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawChars.3 0444 root root 11870 17321 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawFocusHighlight.3 0444 root root 7038 36260 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Fill3DPolygon.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Fill3DRectangle.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FindPhoto.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoSetSize.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FontId.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PostscriptFontName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Free3DBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeBitmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfBitmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfBitmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 0444 root root 13344 18016 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColormap.3 0444 root root 9017 21860 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeConfigOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 0444 root root 16172 17974 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeFont.3 0444 root root 10406 13053 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeFontFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeFont.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeGC.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetGC.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeImage.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImage.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureInfo.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreePixmap.3 0444 root root 7614 22378 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeSavedOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeXId.3 0444 root root 7786 38617 1281119926 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GeometryRequest.3 0444 root root 10055 52462 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Get3DBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAllBindings.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBinding.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAnchor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAnchorFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAnchorFromObj.3 0444 root root 8958 8340 1281119926 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAtomName.3 0444 root root 7852 44026 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBinding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBinding.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfBitmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmapFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfBitmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetCapStyle.3 0444 root root 7922 48570 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetColor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetColorByValue.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetColorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetColormap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColormap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetCursor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetCursorFromData.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetCursorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetDash.3 0444 root root 8441 24320 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFont.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeFont.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeFont.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontMetrics.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PostscriptFontName.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetGC.3 0444 root root 8700 54226 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetHINSTANCE.3 0444 root root 6460 49599 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetHWND.3 0444 root root 6789 12738 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImage.3 0444 root root 10947 57115 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImageMasterData.3 0444 root root 17571 1905 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetItemTypes.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateItemType.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetJoinStyle.3 0444 root root 7937 50925 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetJustify.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfJustify.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetJustifyFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfJustify.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetMMFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixelsFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetNumMainWindows.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MainWindow.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetOption.3 0444 root root 7340 62610 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetOptionInfo.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetOptionValue.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixels.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixelsFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixelsFromObj.3 0444 root root 9343 49959 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreePixmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetRelief.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfRelief.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetReliefFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfRelief.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetRootCoords.3 0444 root root 7265 57987 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetScreenMM.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixelsFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetScrollInfo.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetScrollInfoObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetScrollInfoObj.3 0444 root root 8716 55947 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetSelection.3 0444 root root 9007 18395 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetUid.3 0444 root root 7507 10820 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetUserInactiveTime.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetVRootGeometry.3 0444 root root 7712 31850 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetVisual.3 0444 root root 9469 58889 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Grab.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Ungrab.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_HWNDToWindow.3 0444 root root 6569 59897 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_HandleEvent.3 0444 root root 7537 16074 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Height.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IdToWindow.3 0444 root root 6763 10968 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ImageChanged.3 0444 root root 8335 20885 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Init.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SafeInit.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InitConsoleChannels.3 0444 root root 7445 8532 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InitImageArgs.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImageMasterData.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InitOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InitStubs.3 0444 root root 8767 63410 1281119928 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternAtom.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAtomName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderBottom.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderLeft.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderRight.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 0444 root root 12040 32986 1281119928 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Interp.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IntersectTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IsContainer.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IsEmbedded.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IsMapped.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IsTopLevel.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Main.3 0444 root root 8074 64755 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MainLoop.3 0444 root root 6859 20302 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MainWindow.3 0444 root root 7149 46615 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MaintainGeometry.3 0444 root root 10031 49768 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MakeWindowExist.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DestroyWindow.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ManageGeometry.3 0444 root root 9376 54457 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MapWindow.3 0444 root root 7553 17075 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MeasureChars.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawChars.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MinReqHeight.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MinReqWidth.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MoveResizeWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MoveToplevelWindow.3 0444 root root 8065 279 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MoveWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Name.3 0444 root root 9081 23155 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOf3DBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfAnchor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAnchorFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfBitmap.3 0444 root root 16138 446 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfCapStyle.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetCapStyle.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfColor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfCursor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfFont.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeFont.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfImage.3 0444 root root 6745 8577 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfJoinStyle.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetJoinStyle.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfJustify.3 0444 root root 9036 20520 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfRelief.3 0444 root root 8812 59367 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameToWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Name.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_OwnSelection.3 0444 root root 7720 33211 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Parent.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ParseArgv.3 0444 root root 20499 43201 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PathName.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Name.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoBlank.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoSetSize.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoExpand.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoSetSize.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoGetImage.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoSetSize.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoGetSize.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoSetSize.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutBlock.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoSetSize.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoSetSize.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoSetSize.3 0444 root root 16640 47525 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PointToChar.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PostscriptFontName.3 0444 root root 9422 54644 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PreserveColormap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColormap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_QueueWindowEvent.3 0444 root root 7775 38682 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_RedrawImage.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImage.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ReqHeight.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ReqWidth.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime.3 0444 root root 6991 34564 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_RestackWindow.3 0444 root root 7510 12838 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_RestoreSavedOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_RestrictEvents.3 0444 root root 9446 61064 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SafeInit.3 0444 root root 8485 35151 1281119928 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Screen.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ScreenNumber.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetAppName.3 0444 root root 8258 16031 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetCaretPos.3 0444 root root 6929 25712 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetClass.3 0444 root root 7940 50833 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetClassProcs.3 0444 root root 9166 33861 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetGrid.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnsetGrid.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetInternalBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GeometryRequest.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetInternalBorderEx.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GeometryRequest.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GeometryRequest.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBackground.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 0444 root root 12111 42808 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowColormap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowVisual.3 0444 root root 7709 31983 1281119928 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SizeOfBitmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfBitmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SizeOfImage.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImage.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_StrictMotif.3 0444 root root 7072 39666 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3 0444 root root 20123 57212 1281119928 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextWidth.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawChars.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Uid.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetUid.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UndefineCursor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnderlineChars.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawChars.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnderlineTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Ungrab.3 0444 root root 8266 17985 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnmaintainGeometry.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MaintainGeometry.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnmapWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MapWindow.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnsetGrid.3 0444 root root 8261 17838 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Visual.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Width.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_WindowId.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_X.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Y.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_AddPadding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_BoxContains.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_CreateTheme.3 0444 root root 6895 22506 1281119928 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetBorderFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetCurrentTheme.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_CreateTheme.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetDefaultTheme.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_CreateTheme.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetStickyFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetTheme.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_CreateTheme.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_MakeBox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_MakePadding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_PackBox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_PadBox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_PlaceBox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_RelievePadding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 0444 root root 13854 51207 1281119928 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_UniformPadding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 d none /usr/local/man/mann 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/bell.n 0444 root root 7047 35993 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/bind.n 0444 root root 37781 53551 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/bindtags.n 0444 root root 9898 29930 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/bitmap.n 0444 root root 10095 48801 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/button.n 0444 root root 14485 54559 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/canvas.n 0444 root root 85273 5636 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/checkbutton.n 0444 root root 18663 45182 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/clipboard.n 0444 root root 11419 28414 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/colors.n 0444 root root 27434 413 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/console.n 0444 root root 11642 60553 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/cursors.n 0444 root root 8161 13150 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/destroy.n 0444 root root 7168 46431 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/entry.n 0444 root root 29335 32429 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/event.n 0444 root root 23686 37491 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/focus.n 0444 root root 11418 39795 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/font.n 0444 root root 21656 43790 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/frame.n 0444 root root 11947 22696 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/grab.n 0444 root root 11637 62382 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/grid.n 0444 root root 25412 56716 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/image.n 0444 root root 9815 23919 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/keysyms.n 0444 root root 51214 24926 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/label.n 0444 root root 11095 5198 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/labelframe.n 0444 root root 13154 56785 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/listbox.n 0444 root root 29251 28475 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/loadTk.n 0444 root root 9065 21068 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/lower.n 0444 root root 7177 48655 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/menu.n 0444 root root 39314 25095 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/menubutton.n 0444 root root 14723 21859 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/message.n 0444 root root 12225 46365 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/option.n 0444 root root 9992 44759 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/options.n 0444 root root 24205 43770 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/pack-old.n 0444 root root 13767 58603 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/pack.n 0444 root root 17310 40835 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/panedwindow.n 0444 root root 18492 23047 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/photo.n 0444 root root 26127 54002 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/place.n 0444 root root 16874 9199 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/radiobutton.n 0444 root root 18006 57855 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/raise.n 0444 root root 7590 18456 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/scale.n 0444 root root 16558 45869 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/scrollbar.n 0444 root root 20989 57531 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/selection.n 0444 root root 13940 3605 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/send.n 0444 root root 10111 51727 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/spinbox.n 0444 root root 31995 16659 1281119929 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/text.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_textPaste.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk.n 0444 root root 11224 19651 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_bindForTraversal.n 0444 root root 7217 51483 1281119929 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_bisque.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_setPalette.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_chooseColor.n 0444 root root 7442 7269 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_chooseDirectory.n 0444 root root 7819 41906 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_dialog.n 0444 root root 8284 14744 1281119928 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_focusFollowsMouse.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_focusNext.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_focusNext.n 0444 root root 8351 28560 1281119928 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_focusPrev.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_focusNext.n 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_getOpenFile.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_getSaveFile.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_getSaveFile.n 0444 root root 13589 32944 1281119928 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_menuBar.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_bindForTraversal.n 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_menuSetFocus.n=/usr/local/man/mann/menu.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_messageBox.n 0444 root root 9145 26345 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_optionMenu.n 0444 root root 7450 8166 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_popup.n 0444 root root 7387 64834 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_setPalette.n 0444 root root 9073 28654 1281119929 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_textCopy.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_textPaste.n 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_textCut.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_textPaste.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_textPaste.n 0444 root root 110626 49824 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tkerror.n 0444 root root 7344 64973 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tkvars.n 0444 root root 9147 34476 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tkwait.n 0444 root root 7895 50341 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/toplevel.n 0444 root root 12803 35639 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_button.n 0444 root root 8522 34146 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_checkbutton.n 0444 root root 8421 27988 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_combobox.n 0444 root root 9631 7212 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_entry.n 0444 root root 24330 26498 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_frame.n 0444 root root 7594 18355 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_image.n 0444 root root 8584 40434 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_intro.n 0444 root root 12246 45938 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_label.n 0444 root root 8495 34809 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_labelframe.n 0444 root root 8869 40 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_menubutton.n 0444 root root 7428 3778 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_notebook.n 0444 root root 12885 32509 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_panedwindow.n 0444 root root 9845 28661 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_progressbar.n 0444 root root 9157 31501 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_radiobutton.n 0444 root root 8174 6563 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_scale.n 0444 root root 9648 7320 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_scrollbar.n 0444 root root 12437 63731 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_separator.n 0444 root root 6858 19099 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_sizegrip.n 0444 root root 7787 35288 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_style.n 0444 root root 10777 46235 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_treeview.n 0444 root root 21734 39072 1281119930 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_vsapi.n 0444 root root 9843 25887 1281119930 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_widget.n 0444 root root 14573 58219 1281119930 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/winfo.n 0444 root root 20183 60180 1281119930 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/wm.n 0444 root root 40738 33677 1281119930 1 i checkinstall 790 2504 1281119956 1 i pkginfo 236 17556 1281119956 07070100000000000000000000000000000000000000010000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000b00000000TRAILER!!!0707010003fc04000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56d4000000ec000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000000800000000pkginfoPKG=tk NAME=tk 8.5.8 i86pc Solaris 10 VERSION=8.5.8 PSTAMP=6th August 2010 VENDOR=The Tcl Project EMAIL=http://www.tcl.tk/software/tcltk/ DESC=Tk GUI ARCH=i386 CATEGORY=utility CLASSES=none BASEDIR=/ ISTATES=S s 1 2 3 RSTATES=S s 1 2 3 0707010003fc03000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56d40000b527000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000000700000000pkgmap: 1 14156 1 d none /usr ? ? ? 1 d none /usr/local ? ? ? 1 d none /usr/local/bin 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/bin/wish8.5 0755 root root 8936 48520 1281119924 1 d none /usr/local/include 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/include/tk.h 0644 root root 57479 52182 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/include/tkDecls.h 0644 root root 109265 56005 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/include/tkPlatDecls.h 0644 root root 7731 41319 1281119924 1 d none /usr/local/lib 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/libtk8.5.so 0555 root root 1768296 63683 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/libtkstub8.5.a 0644 root root 10700 52637 1281119924 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/bgerror.tcl 0644 root root 8054 10046 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/button.tcl 0644 root root 19904 1268 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/choosedir.tcl 0644 root root 9701 17635 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/clrpick.tcl 0644 root root 21293 41607 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/comdlg.tcl 0644 root root 7793 41038 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/console.tcl 0644 root root 29119 27895 1281119924 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/README 0644 root root 2141 58836 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/anilabel.tcl 0644 root root 6738 40709 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/aniwave.tcl 0644 root root 3562 47158 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/arrow.tcl 0644 root root 8049 61936 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/bind.tcl 0644 root root 3007 1843 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/bitmap.tcl 0644 root root 1477 58526 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/browse 0755 root root 1820 20825 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/button.tcl 0644 root root 1570 1777 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/check.tcl 0644 root root 2343 1397 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/clrpick.tcl 0644 root root 1498 61393 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/colors.tcl 0644 root root 5061 42637 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/combo.tcl 0644 root root 2048 45910 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/cscroll.tcl 0644 root root 3456 23401 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ctext.tcl 0644 root root 4939 24246 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/dialog1.tcl 0644 root root 731 62697 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/dialog2.tcl 0644 root root 680 57289 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/en.msg 0644 root root 3890 8985 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/entry1.tcl 0644 root root 1451 60413 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/entry2.tcl 0644 root root 2177 58082 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/entry3.tcl 0644 root root 6160 63870 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/filebox.tcl 0644 root root 2325 57798 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/floor.tcl 0644 root root 79163 59939 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/form.tcl 0644 root root 1110 26793 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/goldberg.tcl 0644 root root 56556 38917 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/hello 0755 root root 568 46656 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/hscale.tcl 0644 root root 1563 61608 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/icon.tcl 0644 root root 2127 57931 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/image1.tcl 0644 root root 1068 25983 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/image2.tcl 0644 root root 3429 27175 1281119925 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/earth.gif 0644 root root 51712 45825 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/earthris.gif 0644 root root 6343 14546 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/face.xbm 0644 root root 12720 3276 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/flagdown.xbm 0644 root root 1886 45912 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/flagup.xbm 0644 root root 1880 48731 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/gray25.xbm 0644 root root 275 17845 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/letters.xbm 0644 root root 1883 45587 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/noletter.xbm 0644 root root 1889 49923 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/pattern.xbm 0644 root root 272 18096 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/tcllogo.gif 0644 root root 2341 13514 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/images/teapot.ppm 0644 root root 196623 33672 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/items.tcl 0644 root root 9789 6165 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ixset 0755 root root 8159 59762 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/knightstour.tcl 0644 root root 8586 25243 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/label.tcl 0644 root root 1383 53705 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/labelframe.tcl 0644 root root 1917 25905 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/license.terms 0644 root root 2209 55092 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/mclist.tcl 0644 root root 3484 32310 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/menu.tcl 0644 root root 6800 60623 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/menubu.tcl 0644 root root 4545 63986 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/msgbox.tcl 0644 root root 2089 48065 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/nl.msg 0644 root root 6769 55873 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/paned1.tcl 0644 root root 1176 36965 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/paned2.tcl 0644 root root 2295 1052 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/pendulum.tcl 0644 root root 7710 55003 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/plot.tcl 0644 root root 2822 32225 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/puzzle.tcl 0644 root root 2663 20288 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/radio.tcl 0644 root root 2817 43941 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/rmt 0755 root root 5397 60715 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/rolodex 0755 root root 8363 48619 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ruler.tcl 0644 root root 5276 42965 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/sayings.tcl 0644 root root 2330 5682 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/search.tcl 0644 root root 4464 51974 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/spin.tcl 0644 root root 1884 30594 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/square 0644 root root 1375 45123 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/states.tcl 0644 root root 1733 18157 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/style.tcl 0644 root root 7003 27534 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/tclIndex 0644 root root 4354 10748 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/tcolor 0755 root root 11307 609 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/text.tcl 0644 root root 3485 48726 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/textpeer.tcl 0644 root root 2251 61228 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/timer 0755 root root 1175 33223 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/toolbar.tcl 0644 root root 3799 64580 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/tree.tcl 0644 root root 3431 28586 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ttkbut.tcl 0644 root root 3491 42588 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ttkmenu.tcl 0644 root root 2478 16925 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ttknote.tcl 0644 root root 2539 23294 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ttkpane.tcl 0644 root root 4114 25134 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/ttkprogress.tcl 0644 root root 1627 9296 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/twind.tcl 0644 root root 10893 1717 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/unicodeout.tcl 0644 root root 3124 57959 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/vscale.tcl 0644 root root 1543 59807 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/demos/widget 0755 root root 23224 13175 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/dialog.tcl 0644 root root 6633 25547 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/entry.tcl 0644 root root 17026 31944 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/focus.tcl 0644 root root 4923 10923 1281119924 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/README 0644 root root 388 32710 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/logo.eps 0644 root root 32900 31317 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/logo100.gif 0644 root root 2341 13514 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/logo64.gif 0644 root root 1670 61083 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/logoLarge.gif 0644 root root 11000 38754 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/logoMed.gif 0644 root root 3889 4936 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo.eps 0644 root root 27809 41490 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo100.gif 0644 root root 1615 38261 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo150.gif 0644 root root 2489 17507 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo175.gif 0644 root root 2981 10815 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo200.gif 0644 root root 3491 7374 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/pwrdLogo75.gif 0644 root root 1171 58456 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/images/tai-ku.gif 0644 root root 5473 11946 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/listbox.tcl 0644 root root 14044 41000 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/menu.tcl 0644 root root 36663 30131 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/mkpsenc.tcl 0644 root root 27260 10069 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgbox.tcl 0644 root root 17011 2573 1281119924 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/cs.msg 0644 root root 4506 23632 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/da.msg 0644 root root 3866 38980 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/de.msg 0644 root root 3937 51585 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/el.msg 0644 root root 8609 32579 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/en.msg 0644 root root 2793 22312 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/en_gb.msg 0644 root root 63 5359 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/eo.msg 0644 root root 3845 44025 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/es.msg 0644 root root 3924 49269 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/fr.msg 0644 root root 3727 35326 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/hu.msg 0644 root root 4588 34168 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/it.msg 0644 root root 3557 20496 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/nl.msg 0644 root root 7095 53520 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/pl.msg 0644 root root 3948 50303 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/pt.msg 0644 root root 3973 59980 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/ru.msg 0644 root root 7105 56197 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/msgs/sv.msg 0644 root root 3762 33687 1281119925 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/obsolete.tcl 0644 root root 5562 5783 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/optMenu.tcl 0644 root root 1653 8919 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/palette.tcl 0644 root root 7946 4770 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/panedwindow.tcl 0644 root root 5250 37963 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/pkgIndex.tcl 0644 root root 125 10611 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/safetk.tcl 0644 root root 7254 14429 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/scale.tcl 0644 root root 7685 33041 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/scrlbar.tcl 0644 root root 12080 14381 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/spinbox.tcl 0644 root root 15159 7260 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/tclIndex 0644 root root 22293 22880 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/tearoff.tcl 0644 root root 4851 2016 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/text.tcl 0644 root root 32384 54059 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/tk.tcl 0644 root root 18124 43866 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/tkAppInit.c 0644 root root 3905 36295 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/tkfbox.tcl 0644 root root 53996 20875 1281119924 1 d none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/altTheme.tcl 0644 root root 3344 19218 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/aquaTheme.tcl 0644 root root 2306 3441 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/button.tcl 0644 root root 2986 59193 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/clamTheme.tcl 0644 root root 4343 24939 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/classicTheme.tcl 0644 root root 3508 36443 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/combobox.tcl 0644 root root 12018 28903 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/cursors.tcl 0644 root root 4068 9948 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/defaults.tcl 0644 root root 3523 32446 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/entry.tcl 0644 root root 15996 25578 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/fonts.tcl 0644 root root 5627 8822 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/menubutton.tcl 0644 root root 4948 22178 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/notebook.tcl 0644 root root 5424 62453 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/panedwindow.tcl 0644 root root 2040 34510 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/progress.tcl 0644 root root 1149 31276 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/scale.tcl 0644 root root 2612 3332 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/scrollbar.tcl 0644 root root 3156 61029 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/sizegrip.tcl 0644 root root 1865 18289 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/treeview.tcl 0644 root root 9252 44871 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/ttk.tcl 0644 root root 4472 50277 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/utils.tcl 0644 root root 7406 23846 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/vistaTheme.tcl 0644 root root 9109 51770 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/winTheme.tcl 0644 root root 2654 32917 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/ttk/xpTheme.tcl 0644 root root 1747 18125 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/unsupported.tcl 0644 root root 11461 15276 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tk8.5/xmfbox.tcl 0644 root root 25905 13986 1281119924 1 f none /usr/local/lib/tkConfig.sh 0644 root root 4095 9507 1281119924 1 d none /usr/local/man 0755 root root 1 d none /usr/local/man/man1 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/man/man1/wish.1 0444 root root 15122 41445 1281119925 1 d none /usr/local/man/man3 0755 root root 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DBorderColor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DBorderGC.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_3DVerticalBevel.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AddOption.3 0444 root root 7540 16933 1281119926 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 0444 root root 19675 64494 1281119925 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfBitmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AllocColorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AllocCursorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AllocFontFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeFont.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AttachHWND.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetHWND.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Attributes.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_BindEvent.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBinding.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTkwin.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTkwin.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasGetCoord.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTkwin.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsBitmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsColor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsFont.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsPath.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 0444 root root 10664 40638 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsY.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTkwin.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTagsOption.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTkwin.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTextInfo.3 0444 root root 10213 64436 1281119926 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTkwin.3 0444 root root 12442 4044 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasWindowCoords.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTkwin.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Changes.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CharBbox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Class.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetClass.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ClearSelection.3 0444 root root 7119 43311 1281119926 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ClipboardAppend.3 0444 root root 8936 13657 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ClipboardClear.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ClipboardAppend.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CollapseMotionEvents.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_QueueWindowEvent.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Colormap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ComputeTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureInfo.3 0444 root root 34947 60048 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureValue.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureInfo.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureWidget.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureInfo.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CoordsToWindow.3 0444 root root 7600 22084 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateBinding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBinding.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateBindingTable.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBinding.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler.3 0444 root root 8507 39411 1281119926 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateErrorHandler.3 0444 root root 12168 47407 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateEventHandler.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteEventHandler.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateGenericHandler.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteGenericHandler.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateImageType.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImageMasterData.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateItemType.3 0444 root root 30138 21989 1281119926 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3 0444 root root 38706 36077 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat.3 0444 root root 17984 34663 1281119926 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateSelHandler.3 0444 root root 11125 15529 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DestroyWindow.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateWindowFromPath.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DestroyWindow.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DefineBitmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfBitmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DefineCursor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteAllBindings.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBinding.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBinding.3 0444 root root 12581 20144 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBindingTable.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBinding.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteErrorHandler.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateErrorHandler.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteEventHandler.3 0444 root root 8915 10112 1281119926 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteGenericHandler.3 0444 root root 9246 41215 1281119926 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteImage.3 0444 root root 6786 12055 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteOptionTable.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteSelHandler.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateSelHandler.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Depth.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DestroyWindow.3 0444 root root 12431 3751 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Display.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DisplayName.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DistanceToTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Draw3DPolygon.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Draw3DRectangle.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawChars.3 0444 root root 11870 17321 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawFocusHighlight.3 0444 root root 7038 36260 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Fill3DPolygon.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Fill3DRectangle.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FindPhoto.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoSetSize.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FontId.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PostscriptFontName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Free3DBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeBitmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfBitmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfBitmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 0444 root root 13344 18016 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColormap.3 0444 root root 9017 21860 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeConfigOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 0444 root root 16172 17974 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeFont.3 0444 root root 10406 13053 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeFontFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeFont.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeGC.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetGC.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeImage.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImage.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureInfo.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreePixmap.3 0444 root root 7614 22378 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeSavedOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeXId.3 0444 root root 7786 38617 1281119926 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GeometryRequest.3 0444 root root 10055 52462 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Get3DBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAllBindings.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBinding.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAnchor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAnchorFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAnchorFromObj.3 0444 root root 8958 8340 1281119926 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAtomName.3 0444 root root 7852 44026 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBinding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBinding.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfBitmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetBitmapFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfBitmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetCapStyle.3 0444 root root 7922 48570 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetColor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetColorByValue.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetColorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetColormap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColormap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetCursor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetCursorFromData.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetCursorFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetDash.3 0444 root root 8441 24320 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFont.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeFont.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeFont.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetFontMetrics.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PostscriptFontName.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetGC.3 0444 root root 8700 54226 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetHINSTANCE.3 0444 root root 6460 49599 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetHWND.3 0444 root root 6789 12738 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImage.3 0444 root root 10947 57115 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImageMasterData.3 0444 root root 17571 1905 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetItemTypes.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateItemType.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetJoinStyle.3 0444 root root 7937 50925 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetJustify.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfJustify.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetJustifyFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfJustify.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetMMFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixelsFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetNumMainWindows.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MainWindow.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetOption.3 0444 root root 7340 62610 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetOptionInfo.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetOptionValue.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixels.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixelsFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixelsFromObj.3 0444 root root 9343 49959 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreePixmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetRelief.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfRelief.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetReliefFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfRelief.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetRootCoords.3 0444 root root 7265 57987 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetScreenMM.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixelsFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetScrollInfo.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetScrollInfoObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetScrollInfoObj.3 0444 root root 8716 55947 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetSelection.3 0444 root root 9007 18395 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetUid.3 0444 root root 7507 10820 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetUserInactiveTime.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetVRootGeometry.3 0444 root root 7712 31850 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetVisual.3 0444 root root 9469 58889 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Grab.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Ungrab.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_HWNDToWindow.3 0444 root root 6569 59897 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_HandleEvent.3 0444 root root 7537 16074 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Height.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IdToWindow.3 0444 root root 6763 10968 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ImageChanged.3 0444 root root 8335 20885 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Init.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SafeInit.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InitConsoleChannels.3 0444 root root 7445 8532 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InitImageArgs.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImageMasterData.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InitOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InitStubs.3 0444 root root 8767 63410 1281119928 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternAtom.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAtomName.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderBottom.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderLeft.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderRight.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 0444 root root 12040 32986 1281119928 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Interp.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IntersectTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IsContainer.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IsEmbedded.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IsMapped.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IsTopLevel.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Main.3 0444 root root 8074 64755 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MainLoop.3 0444 root root 6859 20302 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MainWindow.3 0444 root root 7149 46615 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MaintainGeometry.3 0444 root root 10031 49768 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MakeWindowExist.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DestroyWindow.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ManageGeometry.3 0444 root root 9376 54457 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MapWindow.3 0444 root root 7553 17075 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MeasureChars.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawChars.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MinReqHeight.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MinReqWidth.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MoveResizeWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MoveToplevelWindow.3 0444 root root 8065 279 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MoveWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Name.3 0444 root root 9081 23155 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOf3DBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfAnchor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAnchorFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfBitmap.3 0444 root root 16138 446 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfCapStyle.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetCapStyle.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfColor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfCursor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfFont.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeFont.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfImage.3 0444 root root 6745 8577 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfJoinStyle.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetJoinStyle.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfJustify.3 0444 root root 9036 20520 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfRelief.3 0444 root root 8812 59367 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameToWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Name.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Offset.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_OwnSelection.3 0444 root root 7720 33211 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Parent.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ParseArgv.3 0444 root root 20499 43201 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PathName.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Name.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoBlank.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoSetSize.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoExpand.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoSetSize.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoGetImage.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoSetSize.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoGetSize.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoSetSize.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutBlock.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoSetSize.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoSetSize.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoSetSize.3 0444 root root 16640 47525 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PointToChar.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PostscriptFontName.3 0444 root root 9422 54644 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PreserveColormap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColormap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_QueueWindowEvent.3 0444 root root 7775 38682 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_RedrawImage.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImage.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ReqHeight.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ReqWidth.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime.3 0444 root root 6991 34564 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResizeWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_RestackWindow.3 0444 root root 7510 12838 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_RestoreSavedOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_RestrictEvents.3 0444 root root 9446 61064 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SafeInit.3 0444 root root 8485 35151 1281119928 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Screen.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ScreenNumber.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetAppName.3 0444 root root 8258 16031 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetCaretPos.3 0444 root root 6929 25712 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetClass.3 0444 root root 7940 50833 1281119927 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetClassProcs.3 0444 root root 9166 33861 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetGrid.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnsetGrid.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetInternalBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GeometryRequest.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetInternalBorderEx.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GeometryRequest.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GeometryRequest.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetOptions.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBackground.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorder.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 0444 root root 12111 42808 1281119926 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowColormap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowVisual.3 0444 root root 7709 31983 1281119928 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SizeOfBitmap.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfBitmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SizeOfImage.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImage.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_StrictMotif.3 0444 root root 7072 39666 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3 0444 root root 20123 57212 1281119928 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextWidth.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawChars.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Uid.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetUid.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UndefineCursor.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnderlineChars.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawChars.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnderlineTextLayout.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Ungrab.3 0444 root root 8266 17985 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnmaintainGeometry.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MaintainGeometry.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnmapWindow.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MapWindow.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnsetGrid.3 0444 root root 8261 17838 1281119927 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Visual.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Width.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_WindowId.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_X.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Y.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_AddPadding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_BoxContains.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_CreateTheme.3 0444 root root 6895 22506 1281119928 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_ExpandBox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetBorderFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetCurrentTheme.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_CreateTheme.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetDefaultTheme.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_CreateTheme.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetStickyFromObj.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_GetTheme.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_CreateTheme.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_MakeBox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_MakePadding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_PackBox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_PadBox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_PlaceBox.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_RelievePadding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 f none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 0444 root root 13854 51207 1281119928 1 l none /usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_UniformPadding.3=/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3 1 d none /usr/local/man/mann 0755 root root 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/bell.n 0444 root root 7047 35993 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/bind.n 0444 root root 37781 53551 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/bindtags.n 0444 root root 9898 29930 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/bitmap.n 0444 root root 10095 48801 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/button.n 0444 root root 14485 54559 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/canvas.n 0444 root root 85273 5636 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/checkbutton.n 0444 root root 18663 45182 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/clipboard.n 0444 root root 11419 28414 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/colors.n 0444 root root 27434 413 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/console.n 0444 root root 11642 60553 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/cursors.n 0444 root root 8161 13150 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/destroy.n 0444 root root 7168 46431 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/entry.n 0444 root root 29335 32429 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/event.n 0444 root root 23686 37491 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/focus.n 0444 root root 11418 39795 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/font.n 0444 root root 21656 43790 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/frame.n 0444 root root 11947 22696 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/grab.n 0444 root root 11637 62382 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/grid.n 0444 root root 25412 56716 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/image.n 0444 root root 9815 23919 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/keysyms.n 0444 root root 51214 24926 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/label.n 0444 root root 11095 5198 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/labelframe.n 0444 root root 13154 56785 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/listbox.n 0444 root root 29251 28475 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/loadTk.n 0444 root root 9065 21068 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/lower.n 0444 root root 7177 48655 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/menu.n 0444 root root 39314 25095 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/menubutton.n 0444 root root 14723 21859 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/message.n 0444 root root 12225 46365 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/option.n 0444 root root 9992 44759 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/options.n 0444 root root 24205 43770 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/pack-old.n 0444 root root 13767 58603 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/pack.n 0444 root root 17310 40835 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/panedwindow.n 0444 root root 18492 23047 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/photo.n 0444 root root 26127 54002 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/place.n 0444 root root 16874 9199 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/radiobutton.n 0444 root root 18006 57855 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/raise.n 0444 root root 7590 18456 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/scale.n 0444 root root 16558 45869 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/scrollbar.n 0444 root root 20989 57531 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/selection.n 0444 root root 13940 3605 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/send.n 0444 root root 10111 51727 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/spinbox.n 0444 root root 31995 16659 1281119929 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/text.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_textPaste.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk.n 0444 root root 11224 19651 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_bindForTraversal.n 0444 root root 7217 51483 1281119929 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_bisque.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_setPalette.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_chooseColor.n 0444 root root 7442 7269 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_chooseDirectory.n 0444 root root 7819 41906 1281119928 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_dialog.n 0444 root root 8284 14744 1281119928 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_focusFollowsMouse.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_focusNext.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_focusNext.n 0444 root root 8351 28560 1281119928 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_focusPrev.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_focusNext.n 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_getOpenFile.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_getSaveFile.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_getSaveFile.n 0444 root root 13589 32944 1281119928 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_menuBar.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_bindForTraversal.n 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_menuSetFocus.n=/usr/local/man/mann/menu.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_messageBox.n 0444 root root 9145 26345 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_optionMenu.n 0444 root root 7450 8166 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_popup.n 0444 root root 7387 64834 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_setPalette.n 0444 root root 9073 28654 1281119929 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_textCopy.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_textPaste.n 1 l none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_textCut.n=/usr/local/man/mann/tk_textPaste.n 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tk_textPaste.n 0444 root root 110626 49824 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tkerror.n 0444 root root 7344 64973 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tkvars.n 0444 root root 9147 34476 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/tkwait.n 0444 root root 7895 50341 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/toplevel.n 0444 root root 12803 35639 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_button.n 0444 root root 8522 34146 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_checkbutton.n 0444 root root 8421 27988 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_combobox.n 0444 root root 9631 7212 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_entry.n 0444 root root 24330 26498 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_frame.n 0444 root root 7594 18355 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_image.n 0444 root root 8584 40434 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_intro.n 0444 root root 12246 45938 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_label.n 0444 root root 8495 34809 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_labelframe.n 0444 root root 8869 40 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_menubutton.n 0444 root root 7428 3778 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_notebook.n 0444 root root 12885 32509 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_panedwindow.n 0444 root root 9845 28661 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_progressbar.n 0444 root root 9157 31501 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_radiobutton.n 0444 root root 8174 6563 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_scale.n 0444 root root 9648 7320 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_scrollbar.n 0444 root root 12437 63731 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_separator.n 0444 root root 6858 19099 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_sizegrip.n 0444 root root 7787 35288 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_style.n 0444 root root 10777 46235 1281119929 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_treeview.n 0444 root root 21734 39072 1281119930 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_vsapi.n 0444 root root 9843 25887 1281119930 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/ttk_widget.n 0444 root root 14573 58219 1281119930 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/winfo.n 0444 root root 20183 60180 1281119930 1 f none /usr/local/man/mann/wm.n 0444 root root 40738 33677 1281119930 1 i checkinstall 790 2504 1281119956 1 i pkginfo 236 17556 1281119956 0707010003fd6c000041ed0000000000000000000000024c5c56d400000000000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000000800000000install0707010003fd6d000081ed0000000000000000000000014c5c56d400000316000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000001500000000install/checkinstall#!/bin/sh # expected_bits="64" expected_release="5.10" expected_platform="i386" # release=`uname -r` platform=`uname -p` bits=`isainfo -b` # if [ ${platform} != ${expected_platform} ]; then echo "\n\n\n\tThis package must be installed on a ${expected_platform} architecture\n" echo "\tAborting installation.\n\n\n" exit 1 fi if [ ${release} != ${expected_release} ]; then echo "\n\n\n\tThis package must be installed on a ${expected_release} machine\n" echo "\tAborting installation.\n\n\n" exit 1 fi #if [ ${bits} != ${expected_bits} ]; then # echo "\n\n\n\tThis package must be installed on a ${expected_bits} bit machine\n" # echo "\tYour machine is running a ${bits} bit O.S. currently\n" # echo "\tAborting installation.\n\n\n" # exit 1 #fi exit 0 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.1'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: wish.1,v 1.10 2007/12/13 15:23:44 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH wish 1 8.0 Tk "Tk Applications" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME wish \- Simple windowing shell .SH SYNOPSIS \fBwish\fR ?\fB\-encoding \fIname\fR? ?\fIfileName arg arg ...\fR? .SH OPTIONS .IP "\fB\-encoding \fIname\fR" 20 .VS 8.5 Specifies the encoding of the text stored in \fIfileName\fR. This option is only recognized prior to the \fIfileName\fR argument. .VE 8.5 .IP "\fB\-colormap \fInew\fR" 20 Specifies that the window should have a new private colormap instead of using the default colormap for the screen. .IP "\fB\-display \fIdisplay\fR" 20 Display (and screen) on which to display window. .IP "\fB\-geometry \fIgeometry\fR" 20 Initial geometry to use for window. If this option is specified, its value is stored in the \fBgeometry\fR global variable of the application's Tcl interpreter. .IP "\fB\-name \fIname\fR" 20 Use \fIname\fR as the title to be displayed in the window, and as the name of the interpreter for \fBsend\fR commands. .IP "\fB\-sync\fR" 20 Execute all X server commands synchronously, so that errors are reported immediately. This will result in much slower execution, but it is useful for debugging. .IP "\fB\-use\fR \fIid\fR" 20 Specifies that the main window for the application is to be embedded in the window whose identifier is \fIid\fR, instead of being created as an independent toplevel window. \fIId\fR must be specified in the same way as the value for the \fB\-use\fR option for toplevel widgets (i.e. it has a form like that returned by the \fBwinfo id\fR command). .RS Note that on some platforms this will only work correctly if \fIid\fR refers to a Tk \fBframe\fR or \fBtoplevel\fR that has its \fB\-container\fR option enabled. .RE .IP "\fB\-visual \fIvisual\fR" 20 Specifies the visual to use for the window. \fIVisual\fR may have any of the forms supported by the \fBTk_GetVisual\fR procedure. .IP "\fB\-\|\-\fR" 20 Pass all remaining arguments through to the script's \fBargv\fR variable without interpreting them. This provides a mechanism for passing arguments such as \fB\-name\fR to a script instead of having \fBwish\fR interpret them. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBWish\fR is a simple program consisting of the Tcl command language, the Tk toolkit, and a main program that reads commands from standard input or from a file. It creates a main window and then processes Tcl commands. If \fBwish\fR is invoked with arguments, then the first few arguments, ?\fB\-encoding \fIname\fR? ?\fIfileName\fR? specify the name of a script file, and, optionally, the encoding of the text data stored in that script file. A value for \fIfileName\fR is recognized if the appropriate argument does not start with .QW \- . .PP If there are no arguments, or the arguments do not specify a \fIfileName\fR, then wish reads Tcl commands interactively from standard input. It will continue processing commands until all windows have been deleted or until end-of-file is reached on standard input. If there exists a file .QW \fB.wishrc\fR in the home directory of the user, \fBwish\fR evaluates the file as a Tcl script just before reading the first command from standard input. .PP If arguments to \fBwish\fR do specify a \fIfileName\fR, then \fIfileName\fR is treated as the name of a script file. \fBWish\fR will evaluate the script in \fIfileName\fR (which presumably creates a user interface), then it will respond to events until all windows have been deleted. Commands will not be read from standard input. There is no automatic evaluation of .QW \fB.wishrc\fR when the name of a script file is presented on the \fBwish\fR command line, but the script file can always \fBsource\fR it if desired. .PP Note that on Windows, the \fBwish\fIversion\fB.exe\fR program varies from the \fBtclsh\fIversion\fB.exe\fR program in an additional important way: it does not connect to a standard Windows console and is instead a windowed program. Because of this, it additionally provides access to its own \fBconsole\fR command. .SH "OPTION PROCESSING" .PP \fBWish\fR automatically processes all of the command-line options described in the \fBOPTIONS\fR summary above. Any other command-line arguments besides these are passed through to the application using the \fBargc\fR and \fBargv\fR variables described later. .SH "APPLICATION NAME AND CLASS" .PP The name of the application, which is used for purposes such as \fBsend\fR commands, is taken from the \fB\-name\fR option, if it is specified; otherwise it is taken from \fIfileName\fR, if it is specified, or from the command name by which \fBwish\fR was invoked. In the last two cases, if the name contains a .QW / character, then only the characters after the last slash are used as the application name. .PP The class of the application, which is used for purposes such as specifying options with a \fBRESOURCE_MANAGER\fR property or .Xdefaults file, is the same as its name except that the first letter is capitalized. .SH "VARIABLES" .PP \fBWish\fR sets the following Tcl variables: .TP 15 \fBargc\fR Contains a count of the number of \fIarg\fR arguments (0 if none), not including the options described above. .TP 15 \fBargv\fR Contains a Tcl list whose elements are the \fIarg\fR arguments that follow a \fB\-\|\-\fR option or do not match any of the options described in \fBOPTIONS\fR above, in order, or an empty string if there are no such arguments. .TP 15 \fBargv0\fR Contains \fIfileName\fR if it was specified. Otherwise, contains the name by which \fBwish\fR was invoked. .TP 15 \fBgeometry\fR If the \fB\-geometry\fR option is specified, \fBwish\fR copies its value into this variable. If the variable still exists after \fIfileName\fR has been evaluated, \fBwish\fR uses the value of the variable in a \fBwm geometry\fR command to set the main window's geometry. .TP 15 \fBtcl_interactive\fR Contains 1 if \fBwish\fR is reading commands interactively (\fIfileName\fR was not specified and standard input is a terminal-like device), 0 otherwise. .SH "SCRIPT FILES" .PP If you create a Tcl script in a file whose first line is .CS \fB#!/usr/local/bin/wish\fR .CE then you can invoke the script file directly from your shell if you mark it as executable. This assumes that \fBwish\fR has been installed in the default location in /usr/local/bin; if it is installed somewhere else then you will have to modify the above line to match. Many UNIX systems do not allow the \fB#!\fR line to exceed about 30 characters in length, so be sure that the \fBwish\fR executable can be accessed with a short file name. .PP An even better approach is to start your script files with the following three lines: .CS \fB#!/bin/sh # the next line restarts using wish \e exec wish "$0" "$@"\fR .CE This approach has three advantages over the approach in the previous paragraph. First, the location of the \fBwish\fR binary does not have to be hard-wired into the script: it can be anywhere in your shell search path. Second, it gets around the 30-character file name limit in the previous approach. Third, this approach will work even if \fBwish\fR is itself a shell script (this is done on some systems in order to handle multiple architectures or operating systems: the \fBwish\fR script selects one of several binaries to run). The three lines cause both \fBsh\fR and \fBwish\fR to process the script, but the \fBexec\fR is only executed by \fBsh\fR. \fBsh\fR processes the script first; it treats the second line as a comment and executes the third line. The \fBexec\fR statement cause the shell to stop processing and instead to start up \fBwish\fR to reprocess the entire script. When \fBwish\fR starts up, it treats all three lines as comments, since the backslash at the end of the second line causes the third line to be treated as part of the comment on the second line. .PP The end of a script file may be marked either by the physical end of the medium, or by the character, .QW \e032 .PQ \eu001a ", control-Z" . If this character is present in the file, the \fBwish\fR application will read text up to but not including the character. An application that requires this character in the file may encode it as .QW \e032 , .QW \ex1a , or .QW \eu001a ; or may generate it by use of commands such as \fBformat\fR or \fBbinary\fR. .SH PROMPTS .PP When \fBwish\fR is invoked interactively it normally prompts for each command with .QW "\fB% \fR" . You can change the prompt by setting the variables \fBtcl_prompt1\fR and \fBtcl_prompt2\fR. If variable \fBtcl_prompt1\fR exists then it must consist of a Tcl script to output a prompt; instead of outputting a prompt \fBwish\fR will evaluate the script in \fBtcl_prompt1\fR. The variable \fBtcl_prompt2\fR is used in a similar way when a newline is typed but the current command is not yet complete; if \fBtcl_prompt2\fR is not set then no prompt is output for incomplete commands. .SH KEYWORDS shell, toolkit 0707010003fcc0000041ed0000000000000000000000024c5c56d400000000000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000001800000000root/usr/local/man/man30707010003fcc9000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b600001db0000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002c00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CoordsToWindow.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: CoordToWin.3,v 1.2 1998/09/14 18:22:46 stanton Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_CoordsToWindow 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_CoordsToWindow \- Find window containing a point .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_CoordsToWindow\fR(\fIrootX, rootY, tkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window tkwin .AP int rootX in X-coordinate (in root window coordinates). .AP int rootY in Y-coordinate (in root window coordinates). .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window that identifies application. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_CoordsToWindow\fR locates the window that contains a given point. The point is specified in root coordinates with \fIrootX\fR and \fIrootY\fR (if a virtual-root window manager is in use then \fIrootX\fR and \fIrootY\fR are in the coordinate system of the virtual root window). The return value from the procedure is a token for the window that contains the given point. If the point is not in any window, or if the containing window is not in the same application as \fItkwin\fR, then NULL is returned. .PP The containing window is decided using the same rules that determine which window contains the mouse cursor: if a parent and a child both contain the point then the child gets preference, and if two siblings both contain the point then the highest one in the stacking order (i.e. the one that's visible on the screen) gets preference. .SH KEYWORDS containing, coordinates, root window 0707010003fccd000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700009732000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002f00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateOptionTable.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: SetOptions.3,v 1.17 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_SetOptions 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_CreateOptionTable, Tk_DeleteOptionTable, Tk_InitOptions, Tk_SetOptions, Tk_FreeSavedOptions, Tk_RestoreSavedOptions, Tk_GetOptionValue, Tk_GetOptionInfo, Tk_FreeConfigOptions, Tk_Offset \- process configuration options .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Tk_OptionTable \fBTk_CreateOptionTable(\fIinterp, templatePtr\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_DeleteOptionTable(\fIoptionTable\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_InitOptions(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, tkwin\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_SetOptions(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, objc, objv, tkwin, savePtr, maskPtr\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_FreeSavedOptions(\fIsavedPtr\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_RestoreSavedOptions(\fIsavedPtr\fB)\fR .sp Tcl_Obj * \fBTk_GetOptionValue(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin\fB)\fR .sp Tcl_Obj * \fBTk_GetOptionInfo(\fIinterp, recordPtr, optionTable, namePtr, tkwin\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_FreeConfigOptions(\fIrecordPtr, optionTable, tkwin\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_Offset(\fItype, field\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_SavedOptions "*const objv[]" in/out .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in A Tcl interpreter. Most procedures use this only for returning error messages; if it is NULL then no error messages are returned. For \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR the value cannot be NULL; it gives the interpreter in which the option table will be used. .AP "const Tk_OptionSpec" *templatePtr in Points to an array of static information that describes the configuration options that are supported. Used to build a Tk_OptionTable. The information pointed to by this argument must exist for the lifetime of the Tk_OptionTable. .AP Tk_OptionTable optionTable in Token for an option table. Must have been returned by a previous call to \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR. .AP char *recordPtr in/out Points to structure in which values of configuration options are stored; fields of this record are modified by procedures such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR and read by procedures such as \fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in For options such as \fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR, this argument indicates the window in which the option will be used. If \fIoptionTable\fR uses no window-dependent options, then a NULL value may be supplied for this argument. .AP int objc in Number of values in \fIobjv\fR. .AP Tcl_Obj "*const objv[]" in Command-line arguments for setting configuring options. .AP Tk_SavedOptions *savePtr out If not NULL, the structure pointed to by this argument is filled in with the old values of any options that were modified and old values are restored automatically if an error occurs in \fBTk_SetOptions\fR. .AP int *maskPtr out If not NULL, the word pointed to by \fImaskPtr\fR is filled in with the bit-wise OR of the \fItypeMask\fR fields for the options that were modified. .AP Tk_SavedOptions *savedPtr in/out Points to a structure previously filled in by \fBTk_SetOptions\fR with old values of modified options. .AP Tcl_Obj *namePtr in The value of this object is the name of a particular option. If NULL is passed to \fBTk_GetOptionInfo\fR then information is returned for all options. Must not be NULL when \fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR is called. .AP "type name" type in The name of the type of a record. .AP "field name" field in The name of a field in records of type \fItype\fR. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These procedures handle most of the details of parsing configuration options such as those for Tk widgets. Given a description of what options are supported, these procedures handle all the details of parsing options and storing their values into a C structure associated with the widget or object. The procedures were designed primarily for widgets in Tk, but they can also be used for other kinds of objects that have configuration options. In the rest of this manual page .QW widget will be used to refer to the object whose options are being managed; in practice the object may not actually be a widget. The term .QW "widget record" is used to refer to the C-level structure in which information about a particular widget or object is stored. .PP Note: the easiest way to learn how to use these procedures is to look at a working example. In Tk, the simplest example is the code that implements the button family of widgets, which is in \fBtkButton.c\fR. Other examples are in \fBtkSquare.c\fR and \fBtkMenu.c\fR. .PP In order to use these procedures, the code that implements the widget must contain a static array of Tk_OptionSpec structures. This is a template that describes the various options supported by that class of widget; there is a separate template for each kind of widget. The template contains information such as the name of each option, its type, its default value, and where the value of the option is stored in the widget record. See TEMPLATES below for more detail. .PP In order to process configuration options efficiently, the static template must be augmented with additional information that is available only at runtime. The procedure \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR creates this dynamic information from the template and returns a Tk_OptionTable token that describes both the static and dynamic information. All of the other procedures, such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, take a Tk_OptionTable token as argument. Typically, \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR is called the first time that a widget of a particular class is created and the resulting Tk_OptionTable is used in the future for all widgets of that class. A Tk_OptionTable may be used only in a single interpreter, given by the \fIinterp\fR argument to \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR. When an option table is no longer needed \fBTk_DeleteOptionTable\fR should be called to free all of its resources. All of the option tables for a Tcl interpreter are freed automatically if the interpreter is deleted. .PP \fBTk_InitOptions\fR is invoked when a new widget is created to set the default values for all of the widget's configuration options. \fBTk_InitOptions\fR is passed a token for an option table (\fIoptionTable\fR) and a pointer to a widget record (\fIrecordPtr\fR), which is the C structure that holds information about this widget. \fBTk_InitOptions\fR uses the information in the option table to choose an appropriate default for each option, then it stores the default value directly into the widget record, overwriting any information that was already present in the widget record. \fBTk_InitOptions\fR normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR. If an error occurred while setting the default values (e.g., because a default value was erroneous) then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL. .PP \fBTk_SetOptions\fR is invoked to modify configuration options based on information specified in a Tcl command. The command might be one that creates a new widget, or a command that modifies options on an existing widget. The \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR arguments describe the values of the arguments from the Tcl command. \fIObjv\fR must contain an even number of objects: the first object of each pair gives the name of an option and the second object gives the new value for that option. \fBTk_SetOptions\fR looks up each name in \fIoptionTable\fR, checks that the new value of the option conforms to the type in \fIoptionTable\fR, and stores the value of the option into the widget record given by \fIrecordPtr\fR. \fBTk_SetOptions\fR normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR. If an error occurred (such as an unknown option name or an illegal option value) then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL. .PP \fBTk_SetOptions\fR has two additional features. First, if the \fImaskPtr\fR argument is not NULL then it points to an integer value that is filled in with information about the options that were modified. For each option in the template passed to \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR there is a \fItypeMask\fR field. The bits of this field are defined by the code that implements the widget; for example, each bit might correspond to a particular configuration option. Alternatively, bits might be used functionally. For example, one bit might be used for redisplay: all options that affect the widget's display, such that changing the option requires the widget to be redisplayed, might have that bit set. Another bit might indicate that the geometry of the widget must be recomputed, and so on. \fBTk_SetOptions\fR OR's together the \fItypeMask\fR fields from all the options that were modified and returns this value at *\fImaskPtr\fR; the caller can then use this information to optimize itself so that, for example, it does not redisplay the widget if the modified options do not affect the widget's appearance. .PP The second additional feature of \fBTk_SetOptions\fR has to do with error recovery. If an error occurs while processing configuration options, this feature makes it possible to restore all the configuration options to their previous values. Errors can occur either while processing options in \fBTk_SetOptions\fR or later in the caller. In many cases the caller does additional processing after \fBTk_SetOptions\fR returns; for example, it might use an option value to set a trace on a variable and may detect an error if the variable is an array instead of a scalar. Error recovery is enabled by passing in a non-NULL value for the \fIsavePtr\fR argument to \fBTk_SetOptions\fR; this should be a pointer to an uninitialized Tk_SavedOptions structure on the caller's stack. \fBTk_SetOptions\fR overwrites the structure pointed to by \fIsavePtr\fR with information about the old values of any options modified by the procedure. If \fBTk_SetOptions\fR returns successfully, the caller uses the structure in one of two ways. If the caller completes its processing of the new options without any errors, then it must pass the structure to \fBTk_FreeSavedOptions\fR so that the old values can be freed. If the caller detects an error in its processing of the new options, then it should pass the structure to \fBTk_RestoreSavedOptions\fR, which will copy the old values back into the widget record and free the new values. If \fBTk_SetOptions\fR detects an error then it automatically restores any options that had already been modified and leaves *\fIsavePtr\fR in an empty state: the caller need not call either \fBTk_FreeSavedOptions\fR or \fBTk_RestoreSavedOptions\fR. If the \fIsavePtr\fR argument to \fBTk_SetOptions\fR is NULL then \fBTk_SetOptions\fR frees each old option value immediately when it sets a new value for the option. In this case, if an error occurs in the third option, the old values for the first two options cannot be restored. .PP \fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR returns the current value of a configuration option for a particular widget. The \fInamePtr\fR argument contains the name of an option; \fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR uses \fIoptionTable\fR to lookup the option and extract its value from the widget record pointed to by \fIrecordPtr\fR, then it returns an object containing that value. If an error occurs (e.g., because \fInamePtr\fR contains an unknown option name) then NULL is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result unless \fIinterp\fR is NULL. .PP \fBTk_GetOptionInfo\fR returns information about configuration options in a form suitable for \fBconfigure\fR widget commands. If the \fInamePtr\fR argument is not NULL, it points to an object that gives the name of a configuration option; \fBTk_GetOptionInfo\fR returns an object containing a list with five elements, which are the name of the option, the name and class used for the option in the option database, the default value for the option, and the current value for the option. If the \fInamePtr\fR argument is NULL, then \fBTk_GetOptionInfo\fR returns information about all options in the form of a list of lists; each sublist describes one option. Synonym options are handled differently depending on whether \fInamePtr\fR is NULL: if \fInamePtr\fR is NULL then the sublist for each synonym option has only two elements, which are the name of the option and the name of the other option that it refers to; if \fInamePtr\fR is non-NULL and names a synonym option then the object returned is the five-element list for the other option that the synonym refers to. If an error occurs (e.g., because \fInamePtr\fR contains an unknown option name) then NULL is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result unless \fIinterp\fR is NULL. .PP \fBTk_FreeConfigOptions\fR must be invoked when a widget is deleted. It frees all of the resources associated with any of the configuration options defined in \fIrecordPtr\fR by \fIoptionTable\fR. .PP The \fBTk_Offset\fR macro is provided as a safe way of generating the \fIobjOffset\fR and \fIinternalOffset\fR values for entries in Tk_OptionSpec structures. It takes two arguments: the name of a type of record, and the name of a field in that record. It returns the byte offset of the named field in records of the given type. .SH "TEMPLATES" .PP The array of Tk_OptionSpec structures passed to \fBTk_CreateOptionTable\fR via its \fItemplatePtr\fR argument describes the configuration options supported by a particular class of widgets. Each structure specifies one configuration option and has the following fields: .CS typedef struct { Tk_OptionType \fItype\fR; const char *\fIoptionName\fR; const char *\fIdbName\fR; const char *\fIdbClass\fR; const char *\fIdefValue\fR; int \fIobjOffset\fR; int \fIinternalOffset\fR; int \fIflags\fR; ClientData \fIclientData\fR; int \fItypeMask\fR; } Tk_OptionSpec; .CE The \fItype\fR field indicates what kind of configuration option this is (e.g. \fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR for a color value, or \fBTK_OPTION_INT\fR for an integer value). \fIType\fR determines how the value of the option is parsed (more on this below). The \fIoptionName\fR field is a string such as \fB\-font\fR or \fB\-bg\fR; it is the name used for the option in Tcl commands and passed to procedures via the \fIobjc\fR or \fInamePtr\fR arguments. The \fIdbName\fR and \fIdbClass\fR fields are used by \fBTk_InitOptions\fR to look up a default value for this option in the option database; if \fIdbName\fR is NULL then the option database is not used by \fBTk_InitOptions\fR for this option. The \fIdefValue\fR field specifies a default value for this configuration option if no value is specified in the option database. The \fIobjOffset\fR and \fIinternalOffset\fR fields indicate where to store the value of this option in widget records (more on this below); values for the \fIobjOffset\fR and \fIinternalOffset\fR fields should always be generated with the \fBTk_Offset\fR macro. The \fIflags\fR field contains additional information to control the processing of this configuration option (see below for details). \fIClientData\fR provides additional type-specific data needed by certain types. For instance, for \fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR types, \fIclientData\fR is a string giving the default value to use on monochrome displays. See the descriptions of the different types below for details. The last field, \fItypeMask\fR, is used by \fBTk_SetOptions\fR to return information about which options were modified; see the description of \fBTk_SetOptions\fR above for details. .PP When \fBTk_InitOptions\fR and \fBTk_SetOptions\fR store the value of an option into the widget record, they can do it in either of two ways. If the \fIobjOffset\fR field of the Tk_OptionSpec is greater than or equal to zero, then the value of the option is stored as a (Tcl_Obj *) at the location in the widget record given by \fIobjOffset\fR. If the \fIinternalOffset\fR field of the Tk_OptionSpec is greater than or equal to zero, then the value of the option is stored in a type-specific internal form at the location in the widget record given by \fIinternalOffset\fR. For example, if the option's type is \fBTK_OPTION_INT\fR then the internal form is an integer. If the \fIobjOffset\fR or \fIinternalOffset\fR field is negative then the value is not stored in that form. At least one of the offsets must be greater than or equal to zero. .PP The \fIflags\fR field consists of one or more bits ORed together. At present only a single flag is supported: \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR. If this bit is set for an option then an empty string will be accepted as the value for the option and the resulting internal form will be a NULL pointer, a zero value, or \fBNone\fR, depending on the type of the option. If the flag is not set then empty strings will result in errors. \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR is typically used to allow a feature to be turned off entirely, e.g. set a cursor value to \fBNone\fR so that a window simply inherits its parent's cursor. Not all option types support the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag; for those that do, there is an explicit indication of that fact in the descriptions below. .PP The \fItype\fR field of each Tk_OptionSpec structure determines how to parse the value of that configuration option. The legal value for \fItype\fR, and the corresponding actions, are described below. If the type requires a \fItkwin\fR value to be passed into procedures like \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, or if it uses the \fIclientData\fR field of the Tk_OptionSpec, then it is indicated explicitly; if not mentioned, the type requires neither \fItkwin\fR nor \fIclientData\fR. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_ANCHOR\fR The value must be a standard anchor position such as \fBne\fR or \fBcenter\fR. The internal form is a Tk_Anchor value like the ones returned by \fBTk_GetAnchorFromObj\fR. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_BITMAP\fR The value must be a standard Tk bitmap name. The internal form is a Pixmap token like the ones returned by \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR. This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_BOOLEAN\fR The value must be a standard boolean value such as \fBtrue\fR or \fBno\fR. The internal form is an integer with value 0 or 1. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_BORDER\fR The value must be a standard color name such as \fBred\fR or \fB#ff8080\fR. The internal form is a Tk_3DBorder token like the ones returned by \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR. This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_COLOR\fR The value must be a standard color name such as \fBred\fR or \fB#ff8080\fR. The internal form is an (XColor *) token like the ones returned by \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR. This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_CURSOR\fR The value must be a standard cursor name such as \fBcross\fR or \fB@foo\fR. The internal form is a Tk_Cursor token like the ones returned by \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR. This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and when the option is set the cursor for the window is changed by calling \fBXDefineCursor\fR. This option type also supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_CUSTOM\fR This option allows applications to define new option types. The clientData field of the entry points to a structure defining the new option type. See the section \fBCUSTOM OPTION TYPES\fR below for details. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_DOUBLE\fR The string value must be a floating-point number in the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR. The internal form is a C \fBdouble\fR value. This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag; if a NULL value is set, the internal representation is set to zero. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_END\fR Marks the end of the template. There must be a Tk_OptionSpec structure with \fItype\fR \fBTK_OPTION_END\fR at the end of each template. If the \fIclientData\fR field of this structure is not NULL, then it points to an additional array of Tk_OptionSpec's, which is itself terminated by another \fBTK_OPTION_END\fR entry. Templates may be chained arbitrarily deeply. This feature allows common options to be shared by several widget classes. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_FONT\fR The value must be a standard font name such as \fBTimes 16\fR. The internal form is a Tk_Font handle like the ones returned by \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR. This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_INT\fR The string value must be an integer in the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR (e.g. \fB0\fR and \fB0x\fR prefixes may be used to specify octal or hexadecimal numbers, respectively). The internal form is a C \fBint\fR value. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_JUSTIFY\fR The value must be a standard justification value such as \fBleft\fR. The internal form is a Tk_Justify like the values returned by \fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj\fR. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_PIXELS\fR The value must specify a screen distance such as \fB2i\fR or \fB6.4\fR. The internal form is an integer value giving a distance in pixels, like the values returned by \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR. Note: if the \fIobjOffset\fR field is not used then information about the original value of this option will be lost. See \fBOBJOFFSET VS. INTERNALOFFSET\fR below for details. This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag; if a NULL value is set, the internal representation is set to zero. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_RELIEF\fR The value must be standard relief such as \fBraised\fR. The internal form is an integer relief value such as \fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR. This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag; if the empty string is specified as the value for the option, the integer relief value is set to \fBTK_RELIEF_NULL\fR. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_STRING\fR The value may be any string. The internal form is a (char *) pointer that points to a dynamically allocated copy of the value. This option type supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_STRING_TABLE\fR For this type, \fIclientData\fR is a pointer to an array of strings suitable for passing to \fBTcl_GetIndexFromObj\fR. The value must be one of the strings in the table, or a unique abbreviation of one of the strings. The internal form is an integer giving the index into the table of the matching string, like the return value from \fBTcl_GetStringFromObj\fR. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_SYNONYM\fR This type is used to provide alternative names for an option (for example, \fB\-bg\fR is often used as a synonym for \fB\-background\fR). The \fBclientData\fR field is a (char *) pointer that gives the name of another option in the same table. Whenever the synonym option is used, the information from the other option will be used instead. .TP \fBTK_OPTION_WINDOW\fR The value must be a window path name. The internal form is a \fBTk_Window\fR token for the window. This option type requires \fItkwin\fR to be supplied to procedures such as \fBTk_SetOptions\fR (in order to identify the application), and it supports the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag. .SH "STORAGE MANAGEMENT ISSUES" .PP If a field of a widget record has its offset stored in the \fIobjOffset\fR or \fIinternalOffset\fR field of a Tk_OptionSpec structure then the procedures described here will handle all of the storage allocation and resource management issues associated with the field. When the value of an option is changed, \fBTk_SetOptions\fR (or \fBTk_FreeSavedOptions\fR) will automatically free any resources associated with the old value, such as Tk_Fonts for \fBTK_OPTION_FONT\fR options or dynamically allocated memory for \fBTK_OPTION_STRING\fR options. For an option stored as an object using the \fIobjOffset\fR field of a Tk_OptionSpec, the widget record shares the object pointed to by the \fIobjv\fR value from the call to \fBTk_SetOptions\fR. The reference count for this object is incremented when a pointer to it is stored in the widget record and decremented when the option is modified. When the widget is deleted \fBTk_FreeConfigOptions\fR should be invoked; it will free the resources associated with all options and decrement reference counts for any objects. .PP However, the widget code is responsible for storing NULL or \fBNone\fR in all pointer and token fields before invoking \fBTk_InitOptions\fR. This is needed to allow proper cleanup in the rare case where an error occurs in \fBTk_InitOptions\fR. .SH "OBJOFFSET VS. INTERNALOFFSET" .PP In most cases it is simplest to use the \fIinternalOffset\fR field of a Tk_OptionSpec structure and not the \fIobjOffset\fR field. This makes the internal form of the value immediately available to the widget code so the value does not have to be extracted from an object each time it is used. However, there are two cases where the \fIobjOffset\fR field is useful. The first case is for \fBTK_OPTION_PIXELS\fR options. In this case, the internal form is an integer pixel value that is valid only for a particular screen. If the value of the option is retrieved, it will be returned as a simple number. For example, after the command \fB.b configure \-borderwidth 2m\fR, the command \fB.b configure \-borderwidth\fR might return 7, which is the integer pixel value corresponding to \fB2m\fR. Unfortunately, this loses the original screen-independent value. Thus for \fBTK_OPTION_PIXELS\fR options it is better to use the \fIobjOffset\fR field. In this case the original value of the option is retained in the object and can be returned when the option is retrieved. In most cases it is convenient to use the \fIinternalOffset\fR field as well, so that the integer value is immediately available for use in the widget code (alternatively, \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR can be used to extract the integer value from the object whenever it is needed). Note: the problem of losing information on retrievals exists only for \fBTK_OPTION_PIXELS\fR options. .PP The second reason to use the \fIobjOffset\fR field is in order to implement new types of options not supported by these procedures. To implement a new type of option, you can use \fBTK_OPTION_STRING\fR as the type in the Tk_OptionSpec structure and set the \fIobjOffset\fR field but not the \fIinternalOffset\fR field. Then, after calling \fBTk_SetOptions\fR, convert the object to internal form yourself. .SH "CUSTOM OPTION TYPES" .PP Applications can extend the built-in configuration types with additional configuration types by writing procedures to parse, print, free, and restore saved copies of the type and creating a structure pointing to those procedures: .CS typedef struct Tk_ObjCustomOption { char *name; Tk_CustomOptionSetProc *\fIsetProc\fR; Tk_CustomOptionGetProc *\fIgetProc\fR; Tk_CustomOptionRestoreProc *\fIrestoreProc\fR; Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc *\fIfreeProc\fR; ClientData \fIclientData\fR; } Tk_ObjCustomOption; typedef int Tk_CustomOptionSetProc( ClientData \fIclientData\fR, Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR, Tcl_Obj **\fIvaluePtr\fR, char *\fIrecordPtr\fR, int \fIinternalOffset\fR, char *\fIsaveInternalPtr\fR, int \fIflags\fR); typedef Tcl_Obj *Tk_CustomOptionGetProc( ClientData \fIclientData\fR, Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR, char *\fIrecordPtr\fR, int \fIinternalOffset\fR); typedef void Tk_CustomOptionRestoreProc( ClientData \fIclientData\fR, Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR, char *\fIinternalPtr\fR, char *\fIsaveInternalPtr\fR); typedef void Tk_CustomOptionFreeProc( ClientData \fIclientData\fR, Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR, char *\fIinternalPtr\fR); .CE .PP The Tk_ObjCustomOption structure contains six fields: a name for the custom option type; pointers to the four procedures; and a \fIclientData\fR value to be passed to those procedures when they are invoked. The \fIclientData\fR value typically points to a structure containing information that is needed by the procedures when they are parsing and printing options. \fIRestoreProc\fR and \fIfreeProc\fR may be NULL, indicating that no function should be called for those operations. .PP The \fIsetProc\fR procedure is invoked by \fBTk_SetOptions\fR to convert a Tcl_Obj into an internal representation and store the resulting value in the widget record. The arguments are: .RS .TP \fIclientData\fR A copy of the \fIclientData\fR field in the Tk_ObjCustomOption structure. .TP \fIinterp\fR A pointer to a Tcl interpreter, used for error reporting. .TP \fITkwin\fR A copy of the \fItkwin\fR argument to \fBTk_SetOptions\fR .TP \fIvaluePtr\fR A pointer to a reference to a Tcl_Obj describing the new value for the option; it could have been specified explicitly in the call to \fBTk_SetOptions\fR or it could come from the option database or a default. If the objOffset for the option is non-negative (the option value is stored as a (Tcl_Obj *) in the widget record), the Tcl_Obj pointer referenced by \fIvaluePtr\fR is the pointer that will be stored at the objOffset for the option. \fISetProc\fR may modify the value if necessary; for example, \fIsetProc\fR may change the value to NULL to support the \fBTK_OPTION_NULL_OK\fR flag. .TP \fIrecordPtr\fR A pointer to the start of the widget record to modify. .TP \fIinternalOffset\fR Offset in bytes from the start of the widget record to the location where the internal representation of the option value is to be placed. .TP \fIsaveInternalPtr\fR A pointer to storage allocated in a Tk_SavedOptions structure for the internal representation of the original option value. Before setting the option to its new value, \fIsetProc\fR should set the value referenced by \fIsaveInternalPtr\fR to the original value of the option in order to support \fBTk_RestoreSavedOptions\fR. .TP \fIflags\fR A copy of the \fIflags\fR field in the Tk_OptionSpec structure for the option .RE .PP \fISetProc\fR returns a standard Tcl result: \fBTCL_OK\fR to indicate successful processing, or \fBTCL_ERROR\fR to indicate a failure of any kind. An error message may be left in the Tcl interpreter given by \fIinterp\fR in the case of an error. .PP The \fIgetProc\fR procedure is invoked by \fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR and \fBTk_GetOptionInfo\fR to retrieve a Tcl_Obj representation of the internal representation of an option. The \fIclientData\fR argument is a copy of the \fIclientData\fR field in the Tk_ObjCustomOption structure. \fITkwin\fR is a copy of the \fItkwin\fR argument to \fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR or \fBTk_GetOptionInfo\fR. \fIRecordPtr\fR is a pointer to the beginning of the widget record to query. \fIInternalOffset\fR is the offset in bytes from the beginning of the widget record to the location where the internal representation of the option value is stored. \fIGetProc\fR must return a pointer to a Tcl_Obj representing the value of the option. .PP The \fIrestoreProc\fR procedure is invoked by \fBTk_RestoreSavedOptions\fR to restore a previously saved internal representation of a custom option value. The \fIclientData\fR argument is a copy of the \fIclientData\fR field in the Tk_ObjCustomOption structure. \fITkwin\fR is a copy of the \fItkwin\fR argument to \fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR or \fBTk_GetOptionInfo\fR. \fIInternalPtr\fR is a pointer to the location where internal representation of the option value is stored. \fISaveInternalPtr\fR is a pointer to the saved value. \fIRestoreProc\fR must copy the value from \fIsaveInternalPtr\fR to \fIinternalPtr\fR to restore the value. \fIRestoreProc\fR need not free any memory associated with either \fIinternalPtr\fR or \fIsaveInternalPtr\fR; \fIfreeProc\fR will be invoked to free that memory if necessary. \fIRestoreProc\fR has no return value. .PP The \fIfreeProc\fR procedure is invoked by \fBTk_SetOptions\fR and \fBTk_FreeSavedOptions\fR to free any storage allocated for the internal representation of a custom option. The \fIclientData\fR argument is a copy of the \fIclientData\fR field in the Tk_ObjCustomOption structure. \fITkwin\fR is a copy of the \fItkwin\fR argument to \fBTk_GetOptionValue\fR or \fBTk_GetOptionInfo\fR. \fIInternalPtr\fR is a pointer to the location where the internal representation of the option value is stored. The \fIfreeProc\fR must free any storage associated with the option. \fIFreeProc\fR has no return value. .SH KEYWORDS anchor, bitmap, boolean, border, color, configuration option, cursor, double, font, integer, justify, pixels, relief, screen distance, synonym 0707010003fcfe000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700002379000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002200000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Name.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: Name.3,v 1.9 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_Name 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_Name, Tk_PathName, Tk_NameToWindow \- convert between names and window tokens .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Tk_Uid \fBTk_Name\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp char * \fBTk_PathName\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_NameToWindow\fR(\fIinterp, pathName, tkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tcl_Interp *pathName .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .AP Tcl_Interp *interp out Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP "const char" *pathName in Character string containing path name of window. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP Each window managed by Tk has two names, a short name that identifies a window among children of the same parent, and a path name that identifies the window uniquely among all the windows belonging to the same main window. The path name is used more often in Tk than the short name; many commands, like \fBbind\fR, expect path names as arguments. .PP The \fBTk_Name\fR macro returns a window's short name, which is the same as the \fIname\fR argument passed to \fBTk_CreateWindow\fR when the window was created. The value is returned as a Tk_Uid, which may be used just like a string pointer but also has the properties of a unique identifier (see the manual entry for \fBTk_GetUid\fR for details). .PP The \fBTk_PathName\fR macro returns a hierarchical name for \fItkwin\fR. Path names have a structure similar to file names in Unix but with dots between elements instead of slashes: the main window for an application has the path name .QW . ; its children have names like .QW .a and .QW .b ; their children have names like .QW .a.aa and .QW .b.bb ; and so on. A window is considered to be a child of another window for naming purposes if the second window was named as the first window's \fIparent\fR when the first window was created. This is not always the same as the X window hierarchy. For example, a pop-up is created as a child of the root window, but its logical parent will usually be a window within the application. .PP The procedure \fBTk_NameToWindow\fR returns the token for a window given its path name (the \fIpathName\fR argument) and another window belonging to the same main window (\fItkwin\fR). It normally returns a token for the named window, but if no such window exists \fBTk_NameToWindow\fR leaves an error message in \fIinterp->result\fR and returns NULL. The \fItkwin\fR argument to \fBTk_NameToWindow\fR is needed because path names are only unique within a single application hierarchy. If, for example, a single process has opened two main windows, each will have a separate naming hierarchy and the same path name might appear in each of the hierarchies. Normally \fItkwin\fR is the main window of the desired hierarchy, but this need not be the case: any window in the desired hierarchy may be used. .SH KEYWORDS name, path name, token, window 0707010003fce0000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b600001ef2000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002900000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetCapStyle.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetCapStyl.3,v 1.8 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_GetCapStyle 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetCapStyle, Tk_NameOfCapStyle \- translate between strings and cap styles .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp int \fBTk_GetCapStyle(\fIinterp, string, capPtr\fB)\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfCapStyle(\fIcap\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tcl_Interp" *capPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP "const char" *string in String containing name of cap style: one of .QW butt , .QW projecting , or .QW round . .AP int *capPtr out Pointer to location in which to store X cap style corresponding to \fIstring\fR. .AP int cap in Cap style: one of \fBCapButt\fR, \fBCapProjecting\fR, or \fBCapRound\fR. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR places in \fI*capPtr\fR the X cap style corresponding to \fIstring\fR. This will be one of the values \fBCapButt\fR, \fBCapProjecting\fR, or \fBCapRound\fR. Cap styles are typically used in X graphics contexts to indicate how the end-points of lines should be capped. See the X documentation for information on what each style implies. .PP Under normal circumstances the return value is \fBTCL_OK\fR and \fIinterp\fR is unused. If \fIstring\fR does not contain a valid cap style or an abbreviation of one of these names, then an error message is stored in \fIinterp->result\fR, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned, and \fI*capPtr\fR is unmodified. .PP \fBTk_NameOfCapStyle\fR is the logical inverse of \fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR. Given a cap style such as \fBCapButt\fR it returns a statically-allocated string corresponding to \fIcap\fR. If \fIcap\fR is not a legal cap style, then .QW "unknown cap style" is returned. .SH KEYWORDS butt, cap style, projecting, round 0707010003fcf5000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b80000223f000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002700000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InitStubs.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1999 Scriptics Corporation '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: TkInitStubs.3,v 1.8 2008/03/26 09:59:56 dkf Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_InitStubs 3 8.4 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_InitStubs \- initialize the Tk stubs mechanism .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp const char * \fBTk_InitStubs\fR(\fIinterp, version, exact\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tcl_Interp *interp in .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Tcl interpreter handle. .AP char *version in A version string consisting of one or more decimal numbers separated by dots. .AP int exact in Non-zero means that only the particular Tk version specified by \fIversion\fR is acceptable. Zero means that versions newer than \fIversion\fR are also acceptable as long as they have the same major version number as \fIversion\fR. .BE .SH INTRODUCTION .PP The Tcl stubs mechanism defines a way to dynamically bind extensions to a particular Tcl implementation at run time. the stubs mechanism requires no changes to applications incoporating Tcl/Tk interpreters. Only developers creating C-based Tcl/Tk extensions need to take steps to use the stubs mechanism with their extensions. See the \fBTcl_InitStubs\fR page for more information. .PP Enabling the stubs mechanism for a Tcl/Tk extension requires the following steps: .IP 1) 5 Call \fBTcl_InitStubs\fR in the extension before calling any other Tcl functions. .IP 2) 5 Call \fBTk_InitStubs\fR if the extension before calling any other Tk functions. .IP 2) 5 Define the \fBUSE_TCL_STUBS\fR symbol. Typically, you would include the \fB\-DUSE_TCL_STUBS\fR flag when compiling the extension. .IP 3) 5 Link the extension with the Tcl and Tk stubs libraries instead of the standard Tcl and Tk libraries. On Unix platforms, the library names are \fIlibtclstub8.4.a\fR and \fIlibtkstub8.4.a\fR; on Windows platforms, the library names are \fItclstub84.lib\fR and \fItkstub84.lib\fR (adjust names with appropriate version number). .SH DESCRIPTION \fBTk_InitStubs\fR attempts to initialize the Tk stub table pointers and ensure that the correct version of Tk is loaded. In addition to an interpreter handle, it accepts as arguments a version number and a Boolean flag indicating whether the extension requires an exact version match or not. If \fIexact\fR is 0, then the extension is indicating that newer versions of Tk are acceptable as long as they have the same major version number as \fIversion\fR; non-zero means that only the specified \fIversion\fR is acceptable. \fBTcl_InitStubs\fR returns a string containing the actual version of Tk satisfying the request, or NULL if the Tk version is not acceptable, does not support the stubs mechanism, or any other error condition occurred. .SH "SEE ALSO" \fBTcl_InitStubs\fR .SH KEYWORDS stubs 0707010003fcf2000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700001a6b000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002800000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_IdToWindow.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: IdToWindow.3,v 1.2 1998/09/14 18:22:52 stanton Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_IdToWindow 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_IdToWindow \- Find Tk's window information for an X window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_IdToWindow\fR(\fIdisplay, window\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window display .AP Display *display in X display containing the window. .AP Window window in X id for window. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP Given an X window identifier and the X display it corresponds to, this procedure returns the corresponding Tk_Window handle. If there is no Tk_Window corresponding to \fIwindow\fR then NULL is returned. .SH KEYWORDS X window id 0707010003fcf6000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b800002f08000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002f00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InternalBorderTop.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: WindowId.3,v 1.13 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_WindowId 3 "8.4" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_WindowId, Tk_Parent, Tk_Display, Tk_DisplayName, Tk_ScreenNumber, Tk_Screen, Tk_X, Tk_Y, Tk_Width, Tk_Height, Tk_Changes, Tk_Attributes, Tk_IsContainer, Tk_IsEmbedded, Tk_IsMapped, Tk_IsTopLevel, Tk_ReqWidth, Tk_ReqHeight, Tk_MinReqWidth, Tk_MinReqHeight, Tk_InternalBorderLeft, Tk_InternalBorderRight, Tk_InternalBorderTop, Tk_InternalBorderBottom, Tk_Visual, Tk_Depth, Tk_Colormap, Tk_Interp \- retrieve information from Tk's local data structure .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Window \fBTk_WindowId\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_Parent\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Display * \fBTk_Display\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp const char * \fBTk_DisplayName\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_ScreenNumber\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Screen * \fBTk_Screen\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_X\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_Y\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_Width\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_Height\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp XWindowChanges * \fBTk_Changes\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp XSetWindowAttributes * \fBTk_Attributes\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_IsContainer\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_IsEmbedded\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_IsMapped\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_IsTopLevel\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_ReqWidth\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_ReqHeight\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_MinReqWidth\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_MinReqHeight\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_InternalBorderLeft\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_InternalBorderRight\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_InternalBorderTop\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_InternalBorderBottom\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Visual * \fBTk_Visual\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_Depth\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Colormap \fBTk_Colormap\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp Tcl_Interp * \fBTk_Interp\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window tkwin .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_WindowId\fR and the other names listed above are all macros that return fields from Tk's local data structure for \fItkwin\fR. None of these macros requires any interaction with the server; it is safe to assume that all are fast. .PP \fBTk_WindowId\fR returns the X identifier for \fItkwin\fR, or \fBNULL\fR if no X window has been created for \fItkwin\fR yet. .PP \fBTk_Parent\fR returns Tk's token for the logical parent of \fItkwin\fR. The parent is the token that was specified when \fItkwin\fR was created, or NULL for main windows. .PP \fBTk_Interp\fR returns the Tcl interpreter associated with a \fItkwin\fR or NULL if there is an error. .PP \fBTk_Display\fR returns a pointer to the Xlib display structure corresponding to \fItkwin\fR. \fBTk_DisplayName\fR returns an ASCII string identifying \fItkwin\fR's display. \fBTk_ScreenNumber\fR returns the index of \fItkwin\fR's screen among all the screens of \fItkwin\fR's display. \fBTk_Screen\fR returns a pointer to the Xlib structure corresponding to \fItkwin\fR's screen. .PP \fBTk_X\fR, \fBTk_Y\fR, \fBTk_Width\fR, and \fBTk_Height\fR return information about \fItkwin's\fR location within its parent and its size. The location information refers to the upper-left pixel in the window, or its border if there is one. The width and height information refers to the interior size of the window, not including any border. \fBTk_Changes\fR returns a pointer to a structure containing all of the above information plus a few other fields. \fBTk_Attributes\fR returns a pointer to an XSetWindowAttributes structure describing all of the attributes of the \fItkwin\fR's window, such as background pixmap, event mask, and so on (Tk keeps track of all this information as it is changed by the application). Note: it is essential that applications use Tk procedures like \fBTk_ResizeWindow\fR instead of X procedures like \fBXResizeWindow\fR, so that Tk can keep its data structures up-to-date. .PP \fBTk_IsContainer\fR returns a non-zero value if \fItkwin\fR is a container, and that some other application may be embedding itself inside \fItkwin\fR. .PP \fBTk_IsEmbedded\fR returns a non-zero value if \fItkwin\fR is not a free-standing window, but rather is embedded in some other application. .PP \fBTk_IsMapped\fR returns a non-zero value if \fItkwin\fR is mapped and zero if \fItkwin\fR is not mapped. .PP \fBTk_IsTopLevel\fR returns a non-zero value if \fItkwin\fR is a top-level window (its X parent is the root window of the screen) and zero if \fItkwin\fR is not a top-level window. .PP \fBTk_ReqWidth\fR and \fBTk_ReqHeight\fR return information about the window's requested size. These values correspond to the last call to \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR for \fItkwin\fR. .PP \fBTk_MinReqWidth\fR and \fBTk_MinReqHeight\fR return information about the window's minimum requested size. These values correspond to the last call to \fBTk_SetMinimumRequestSize\fR for \fItkwin\fR. .PP \fBTk_InternalBorderLeft\fR, \fBTk_InternalBorderRight\fR, \fBTk_InternalBorderTop\fR and \fBTk_InternalBorderBottom\fR return the width of one side of the internal border that has been requested for \fItkwin\fR, or 0 if no internal border was requested. The return value is simply the last value passed to \fBTk_SetInternalBorder\fR or \fBTk_SetInternalBorderEx\fR for \fItkwin\fR. .PP \fBTk_Visual\fR, \fBTk_Depth\fR, and \fBTk_Colormap\fR return information about the visual characteristics of a window. \fBTk_Visual\fR returns the visual type for the window, \fBTk_Depth\fR returns the number of bits per pixel, and \fBTk_Colormap\fR returns the current colormap for the window. The visual characteristics are normally set from the defaults for the window's screen, but they may be overridden by calling \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR. .SH KEYWORDS attributes, colormap, depth, display, height, geometry manager, identifier, mapped, requested size, screen, top-level, visual, width, window, x, y 0707010003fd09000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700001d56000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002b00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_RestackWindow.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: Restack.3,v 1.2 1998/09/14 18:22:53 stanton Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_RestackWindow 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_RestackWindow \- Change a window's position in the stacking order .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp int \fBTk_RestackWindow\fR(\fItkwin, aboveBelow, other\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window aboveBelow .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window to restack. .AP int aboveBelow in Indicates new position of \fItkwin\fR relative to \fIother\fR; must be \fBAbove\fR or \fBBelow\fR. .AP Tk_Window other in \fITkwin\fR will be repositioned just above or below this window. Must be a sibling of \fItkwin\fR or a descendant of a sibling. If NULL then \fItkwin\fR is restacked above or below all siblings. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_RestackWindow\fR changes the stacking order of \fIwindow\fR relative to its siblings. If \fIother\fR is specified as NULL then \fIwindow\fR is repositioned at the top or bottom of its stacking order, depending on whether \fIaboveBelow\fR is \fBAbove\fR or \fBBelow\fR. If \fIother\fR has a non-NULL value then \fIwindow\fR is repositioned just above or below \fIother\fR. .PP The \fIaboveBelow\fR argument must have one of the symbolic values \fBAbove\fR or \fBBelow\fR. Both of these values are defined by the include file . .SH KEYWORDS above, below, obscure, stacking order 0707010003fcc3000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b6000029a8000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002d00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: CanvPsY.3,v 1.6 2004/09/19 16:05:36 dkf Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_CanvasPs 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_CanvasPsY, Tk_CanvasPsBitmap, Tk_CanvasPsColor, Tk_CanvasPsFont, Tk_CanvasPsPath, Tk_CanvasPsStipple \- utility procedures for generating Postscript for canvases .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp double \fBTk_CanvasPsY\fR(\fIcanvas, canvasY\fR) .sp int \fBTk_CanvasPsBitmap\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, bitmap, x, y, width, height\fR) .sp int \fBTk_CanvasPsColor\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, colorPtr\fR) .sp int \fBTk_CanvasPsFont\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, tkFont\fR) .sp \fBTk_CanvasPsPath\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, coordPtr, numPoints\fR) .sp int \fBTk_CanvasPsStipple\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, bitmap\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "unsigned int" "numPoints" .AP Tk_Canvas canvas in A token that identifies a canvas widget for which Postscript is being generated. .AP double canvasY in Y-coordinate in the space of the canvas. .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in/out A Tcl interpreter; Postscript is appended to its result, or the result may be replaced with an error message. .AP Pixmap bitmap in Bitmap to use for generating Postscript. .AP int x in X-coordinate within \fIbitmap\fR of left edge of region to output. .AP int y in Y-coordinate within \fIbitmap\fR of top edge of region to output. .AP "int" width in Width of region of bitmap to output, in pixels. .AP "int" height in Height of region of bitmap to output, in pixels. .AP XColor *colorPtr in Information about color value to set in Postscript. .AP Tk_Font tkFont in Font for which Postscript is to be generated. .AP double *coordPtr in Pointer to an array of coordinates for one or more points specified in canvas coordinates. The order of values in \fIcoordPtr\fR is x1, y1, x2, y2, x3, y3, and so on. .AP int numPoints in Number of points at \fIcoordPtr\fR. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These procedures are called by canvas type managers to carry out common functions related to generating Postscript. Most of the procedures take a \fIcanvas\fR argument, which refers to a canvas widget for which Postscript is being generated. .PP \fBTk_CanvasPsY\fR takes as argument a y-coordinate in the space of a canvas and returns the value that should be used for that point in the Postscript currently being generated for \fIcanvas\fR. Y coordinates require transformation because Postscript uses an origin at the lower-left corner whereas X uses an origin at the upper-left corner. Canvas x coordinates can be used directly in Postscript without transformation. .PP \fBTk_CanvasPsBitmap\fR generates Postscript to describe a region of a bitmap. The Postscript is generated in proper image data format for Postscript, i.e., as data between angle brackets, one bit per pixel. The Postscript is appended to \fIinterp->result\fR and \fBTCL_OK\fR is returned unless an error occurs, in which case \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and \fIinterp->result\fR is overwritten with an error message. .PP \fBTk_CanvasPsColor\fR generates Postscript to set the current color to correspond to its \fIcolorPtr\fR argument, taking into account any color map specified in the \fBpostscript\fR command. It appends the Postscript to \fIinterp->result\fR and returns \fBTCL_OK\fR unless an error occurs, in which case \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and \fIinterp->result\fR is overwritten with an error message. .PP \fBTk_CanvasPsFont\fR generates Postscript that sets the current font to match \fItkFont\fR as closely as possible. \fBTk_CanvasPsFont\fR takes into account any font map specified in the \fBpostscript\fR command, and it does the best it can at mapping X fonts to Postscript fonts. It appends the Postscript to \fIinterp->result\fR and returns \fBTCL_OK\fR unless an error occurs, in which case \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and \fIinterp->result\fR is overwritten with an error message. .PP \fBTk_CanvasPsPath\fR generates Postscript to set the current path to the set of points given by \fIcoordPtr\fR and \fInumPoints\fR. It appends the resulting Postscript to \fIinterp->result\fR. .PP \fBTk_CanvasPsStipple\fR generates Postscript that will fill the current path in stippled fashion. It uses \fIbitmap\fR as the stipple pattern and the current Postscript color; ones in the stipple bitmap are drawn in the current color, and zeroes are not drawn at all. The Postscript is appended to \fIinterp->result\fR and \fBTCL_OK\fR is returned, unless an error occurs, in which case \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and \fIinterp->result\fR is overwritten with an error message. .SH KEYWORDS bitmap, canvas, color, font, path, Postscript, stipple 0707010003fcc6000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b600001bcf000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002c00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ClearSelection.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: ClrSelect.3,v 1.2 1998/09/14 18:22:46 stanton Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_ClearSelection 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_ClearSelection \- Deselect a selection .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_ClearSelection\fR(\fItkwin, selection\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window tkwin .AP Tk_Window tkwin in The selection will be cleared from the display containing this window. .AP Atom selection in The name of selection to be cleared. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_ClearSelection\fR cancels the selection specified by the atom \fIselection\fR for the display containing \fItkwin\fR. The selection need not be in \fItkwin\fR itself or even in \fItkwin\fR's application. If there is a window anywhere on \fItkwin\fR's display that owns \fIselection\fR, the window will be notified and the selection will be cleared. If there is no owner for \fIselection\fR on the display, then the procedure has no effect. .SH KEYWORDS clear, selection 0707010003fccb000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b600002f88000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000003000000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateErrorHandler.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: CrtErrHdlr.3,v 1.7 2007/12/13 15:23:42 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_CreateErrorHandler 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_CreateErrorHandler, Tk_DeleteErrorHandler \- handle X protocol errors .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Tk_ErrorHandler \fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR(\fIdisplay, error, request, minor, proc, clientData\fR) .sp \fBTk_DeleteErrorHandler\fR(\fIhandler\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tk_ErrorHandler" clientData .AP Display *display in Display whose errors are to be handled. .AP int error in Match only error events with this value in the \fIerror_code\fR field. If \-1, then match any \fIerror_code\fR value. .AP int request in Match only error events with this value in the \fIrequest_code\fR field. If \-1, then match any \fIrequest_code\fR value. .AP int minor in Match only error events with this value in the \fIminor_code\fR field. If \-1, then match any \fIminor_code\fR value. .AP Tk_ErrorProc *proc in Procedure to invoke whenever an error event is received for \fIdisplay\fR and matches \fIerror\fR, \fIrequest\fR, and \fIminor\fR. NULL means ignore any matching errors. .AP ClientData clientData in Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIproc\fR. .AP Tk_ErrorHandler handler in Token for error handler to delete (return value from a previous call to \fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR). .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR arranges for a particular procedure (\fIproc\fR) to be called whenever certain protocol errors occur on a particular display (\fIdisplay\fR). Protocol errors occur when the X protocol is used incorrectly, such as attempting to map a window that does not exist. See the Xlib documentation for \fBXSetErrorHandler\fR for more information on the kinds of errors that can occur. For \fIproc\fR to be invoked to handle a particular error, five things must occur: .IP [1] The error must pertain to \fIdisplay\fR. .IP [2] Either the \fIerror\fR argument to \fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR must have been \-1, or the \fIerror\fR argument must match the \fIerror_code\fR field from the error event. .IP [3] Either the \fIrequest\fR argument to \fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR must have been \-1, or the \fIrequest\fR argument must match the \fIrequest_code\fR field from the error event. .IP [4] Either the \fIminor\fR argument to \fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR must have been \-1, or the \fIminor\fR argument must match the \fIminor_code\fR field from the error event. .IP [5] The protocol request to which the error pertains must have been made when the handler was active (see below for more information). .PP \fIProc\fR should have arguments and result that match the following type: .CS typedef int Tk_ErrorProc( ClientData \fIclientData\fR, XErrorEvent *\fIerrEventPtr\fR); .CE The \fIclientData\fR parameter to \fIproc\fR is a copy of the \fIclientData\fR argument given to \fBTcl_CreateErrorHandler\fR when the callback was created. Typically, \fIclientData\fR points to a data structure containing application-specific information that is needed to deal with the error. \fIErrEventPtr\fR is a pointer to the X error event. The procedure \fIproc\fR should return an integer value. If it returns 0 it means that \fIproc\fR handled the error completely and there is no need to take any other action for the error. If it returns non-zero it means \fIproc\fR was unable to handle the error. .PP If a value of NULL is specified for \fIproc\fR, all matching errors will be ignored: this will produce the same result as if a procedure had been specified that always returns 0. .PP If more than more than one handler matches a particular error, then they are invoked in turn. The handlers will be invoked in reverse order of creation: most recently declared handler first. If any handler returns 0, then subsequent (older) handlers will not be invoked. If no handler returns 0, then Tk invokes X's default error handler, which prints an error message and aborts the program. If you wish to have a default handler that deals with errors that no other handler can deal with, then declare it first. .PP The X documentation states that .QW "the error handler should not call any functions (directly or indirectly) on the display that will generate protocol requests or that will look for input events." This restriction applies to handlers declared by \fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR; disobey it at your own risk. .PP \fBTk_DeleteErrorHandler\fR may be called to delete a previously-created error handler. The \fIhandler\fR argument identifies the error handler, and should be a value returned by a previous call to \fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR. .PP A particular error handler applies to errors resulting from protocol requests generated between the call to \fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR and the call to \fBTk_DeleteErrorHandler\fR. However, the actual callback to \fIproc\fR may not occur until after the \fBTk_DeleteErrorHandler\fR call, due to buffering in the client and server. If an error event pertains to a protocol request made just before calling \fBTk_DeleteErrorHandler\fR, then the error event may not have been processed before the \fBTk_DeleteErrorHandler\fR call. When this situation arises, Tk will save information about the handler and invoke the handler's \fIproc\fR later when the error event finally arrives. If an application wishes to delete an error handler and know for certain that all relevant errors have been processed, it should first call \fBTk_DeleteErrorHandler\fR and then call \fBXSync\fR; this will flush out any buffered requests and errors, but will result in a performance penalty because it requires communication to and from the X server. After the \fBXSync\fR call Tk is guaranteed not to call any error handlers deleted before the \fBXSync\fR call. .PP For the Tk error handling mechanism to work properly, it is essential that application code never calls \fBXSetErrorHandler\fR directly; applications should use only \fBTk_CreateErrorHandler\fR. .SH KEYWORDS callback, error, event, handler 0707010003fd04000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700005013000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002700000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ParseArgv.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: ParseArgv.3,v 1.10 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_ParseArgv 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_ParseArgv \- process command-line options .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp int \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, argcPtr, argv, argTable, flags\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for returning error messages. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window to use when arguments specify Tk options. If NULL, then no Tk options will be processed. .AP int argcPtr in/out Pointer to number of arguments in argv; gets modified to hold number of unprocessed arguments that remain after the call. .AP "const char" **argv in/out Command line arguments passed to main program. Modified to hold unprocessed arguments that remain after the call. .AP Tk_ArgvInfo *argTable in Array of argument descriptors, terminated by element with type \fBTK_ARGV_END\fR. .AP int flags in If non-zero, then it specifies one or more flags that control the parsing of arguments. Different flags may be OR'ed together. The flags currently defined are \fBTK_ARGV_DONT_SKIP_FIRST_ARG\fR, \fBTK_ARGV_NO_ABBREV\fR, \fBTK_ARGV_NO_LEFTOVERS\fR, and \fBTK_ARGV_NO_DEFAULTS\fR. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR processes an array of command-line arguments according to a table describing the kinds of arguments that are expected. Each of the arguments in \fIargv\fR is processed in turn: if it matches one of the entries in \fIargTable\fR, the argument is processed according to that entry and discarded. The arguments that do not match anything in \fIargTable\fR are copied down to the beginning of \fIargv\fR (retaining their original order) and returned to the caller. At the end of the call \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR sets \fI*argcPtr\fR to hold the number of arguments that are left in \fIargv\fR, and \fIargv[*argcPtr]\fR will hold the value NULL. Normally, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR assumes that \fIargv[0]\fR is a command name, so it is treated like an argument that does not match \fIargTable\fR and returned to the caller; however, if the \fBTK_ARGV_DONT_SKIP_FIRST_ARG\fR bit is set in \fIflags\fR then \fIargv[0]\fR will be processed just like the other elements of \fIargv\fR. .PP \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR normally returns the value \fBTCL_OK\fR. If an error occurs while parsing the arguments, then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR will leave an error message in \fIinterp->result\fR in the standard Tcl fashion. In the event of an error return, \fI*argvPtr\fR will not have been modified, but \fIargv\fR could have been partially modified. The possible causes of errors are explained below. .PP The \fIargTable\fR array specifies the kinds of arguments that are expected; each of its entries has the following structure: .CS typedef struct { char *\fIkey\fR; int \fItype\fR; char *\fIsrc\fR; char *\fIdst\fR; char *\fIhelp\fR; } Tk_ArgvInfo; .CE The \fIkey\fR field is a string such as .QW \-display or .QW \-bg that is compared with the values in \fIargv\fR. \fIType\fR indicates how to process an argument that matches \fIkey\fR (more on this below). \fISrc\fR and \fIdst\fR are additional values used in processing the argument. Their exact usage depends on \fItype\fR, but typically \fIsrc\fR indicates a value and \fIdst\fR indicates where to store the value. The \fBchar *\fR declarations for \fIsrc\fR and \fIdst\fR are placeholders: the actual types may be different. Lastly, \fIhelp\fR is a string giving a brief description of this option; this string is printed when users ask for help about command-line options. .PP When processing an argument in \fIargv\fR, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR compares the argument to each of the \fIkey\fR's in \fIargTable\fR. \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR selects the first specifier whose \fIkey\fR matches the argument exactly, if such a specifier exists. Otherwise \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR selects a specifier for which the argument is a unique abbreviation. If the argument is a unique abbreviation for more than one specifier, then an error is returned. If there is no matching entry in \fIargTable\fR, then the argument is skipped and returned to the caller. .PP Once a matching argument specifier is found, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR processes the argument according to the \fItype\fR field of the specifier. The argument that matched \fIkey\fR is called .QW "the matching argument" in the descriptions below. As part of the processing, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR may also use the next argument in \fIargv\fR after the matching argument, which is called .QW "the following argument" . The legal values for \fItype\fR, and the processing that they cause, are as follows: .TP \fBTK_ARGV_END\fR Marks the end of the table. The last entry in \fIargTable\fR must have this type; all of its other fields are ignored and it will never match any arguments. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_CONSTANT\fR \fISrc\fR is treated as an integer and \fIdst\fR is treated as a pointer to an integer. \fISrc\fR is stored at \fI*dst\fR. The matching argument is discarded. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_INT\fR The following argument must contain an integer string in the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR (e.g. .QW 0 and .QW 0x prefixes may be used to specify octal or hexadecimal numbers, respectively). \fIDst\fR is treated as a pointer to an integer; the following argument is converted to an integer value and stored at \fI*dst\fR. \fISrc\fR is ignored. The matching and following arguments are discarded from \fIargv\fR. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_FLOAT\fR The following argument must contain a floating-point number in the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR. \fIDst\fR is treated as the address of a double-precision floating point value; the following argument is converted to a double-precision value and stored at \fI*dst\fR. The matching and following arguments are discarded from \fIargv\fR. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_STRING\fR In this form, \fIdst\fR is treated as a pointer to a (char *); \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR stores at \fI*dst\fR a pointer to the following argument, and discards the matching and following arguments from \fIargv\fR. \fISrc\fR is ignored. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_UID\fR This form is similar to \fBTK_ARGV_STRING\fR, except that the argument is turned into a Tk_Uid by calling \fBTk_GetUid\fR. \fIDst\fR is treated as a pointer to a Tk_Uid; \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR stores at \fI*dst\fR the Tk_Uid corresponding to the following argument, and discards the matching and following arguments from \fIargv\fR. \fISrc\fR is ignored. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_CONST_OPTION\fR This form causes a Tk option to be set (as if the \fBoption\fR command had been invoked). The \fIsrc\fR field is treated as a pointer to a string giving the value of an option, and \fIdst\fR is treated as a pointer to the name of the option. The matching argument is discarded. If \fItkwin\fR is NULL, then argument specifiers of this type are ignored (as if they did not exist). .TP \fBTK_ARGV_OPTION_VALUE\fR This form is similar to \fBTK_ARGV_CONST_OPTION\fR, except that the value of the option is taken from the following argument instead of from \fIsrc\fR. \fIDst\fR is used as the name of the option. \fISrc\fR is ignored. The matching and following arguments are discarded. If \fItkwin\fR is NULL, then argument specifiers of this type are ignored (as if they did not exist). .TP \fBTK_ARGV_OPTION_NAME_VALUE\fR In this case the following argument is taken as the name of a Tk option and the argument after that is taken as the value for that option. Both \fIsrc\fR and \fIdst\fR are ignored. All three arguments are discarded from \fIargv\fR. If \fItkwin\fR is NULL, then argument specifiers of this type are ignored (as if they did not exist). .TP \fBTK_ARGV_HELP\fR When this kind of option is encountered, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR uses the \fIhelp\fR fields of \fIargTable\fR to format a message describing all the valid arguments. The message is placed in \fIinterp->result\fR and \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR. When this happens, the caller normally prints the help message and aborts. If the \fIkey\fR field of a \fBTK_ARGV_HELP\fR specifier is NULL, then the specifier will never match any arguments; in this case the specifier simply provides extra documentation, which will be included when some other \fBTK_ARGV_HELP\fR entry causes help information to be returned. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR This option is used by programs or commands that allow the last several of their options to be the name and/or options for some other program. If a \fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR argument is found, then \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR does not process any of the remaining arguments; it returns them all at the beginning of \fIargv\fR (along with any other unprocessed arguments). In addition, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR treats \fIdst\fR as the address of an integer value, and stores at \fI*dst\fR the index of the first of the \fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR options in the returned \fIargv\fR. This allows the program to distinguish the \fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR options from other unprocessed options that preceded the \fBTK_ARGV_REST\fR. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_FUNC\fR For this kind of argument, \fIsrc\fR is treated as the address of a procedure, which is invoked to process the following argument. The procedure should have the following structure: .RS .CS int \fIfunc\fR(\fIdst\fR, \fIkey\fR, \fInextArg\fR) char *\fIdst\fR; char *\fIkey\fR; char *\fInextArg\fR; { } .CE The \fIdst\fR and \fIkey\fR parameters will contain the corresponding fields from the \fIargTable\fR entry, and \fInextArg\fR will point to the following argument from \fIargv\fR (or NULL if there are not any more arguments left in \fIargv\fR). If \fIfunc\fR uses \fInextArg\fR (so that \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR should discard it), then it should return 1. Otherwise it should return 0 and \fBTkParseArgv\fR will process the following argument in the normal fashion. In either event the matching argument is discarded. .RE .TP \fBTK_ARGV_GENFUNC\fR This form provides a more general procedural escape. It treats \fIsrc\fR as the address of a procedure, and passes that procedure all of the remaining arguments. The procedure should have the following form: .RS .CS int \fIgenfunc\fR(dst, interp, key, argc, argv) char *\fIdst\fR; Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR; char *\fIkey\fR; int \fIargc\fR; char **\fIargv\fR; { } .CE The \fIdst\fR and \fIkey\fR parameters will contain the corresponding fields from the \fIargTable\fR entry. \fIInterp\fR will be the same as the \fIinterp\fR argument to \fBTcl_ParseArgv\fR. \fIArgc\fR and \fIargv\fR refer to all of the options after the matching one. \fIGenfunc\fR should behave in a fashion similar to \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR: parse as many of the remaining arguments as it can, then return any that are left by compacting them to the beginning of \fIargv\fR (starting at \fIargv\fR[0]). \fIGenfunc\fR should return a count of how many arguments are left in \fIargv\fR; \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR will process them. If \fIgenfunc\fR encounters an error then it should leave an error message in \fIinterp->result\fR, in the usual Tcl fashion, and return \-1; when this happens \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR will abort its processing and return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR. .RE .SH "FLAGS" .TP \fBTK_ARGV_DONT_SKIP_FIRST_ARG\fR \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR normally treats \fIargv[0]\fR as a program or command name, and returns it to the caller just as if it had not matched \fIargTable\fR. If this flag is given, then \fIargv[0]\fR is not given special treatment. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_NO_ABBREV\fR Normally, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR accepts unique abbreviations for \fIkey\fR values in \fIargTable\fR. If this flag is given then only exact matches will be acceptable. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_NO_LEFTOVERS\fR Normally, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR returns unrecognized arguments to the caller. If this bit is set in \fIflags\fR then \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR will return an error if it encounters any argument that does not match \fIargTable\fR. The only exception to this rule is \fIargv[0]\fR, which will be returned to the caller with no errors as long as \fBTK_ARGV_DONT_SKIP_FIRST_ARG\fR is not specified. .TP \fBTK_ARGV_NO_DEFAULTS\fR Normally, \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR searches an internal table of standard argument specifiers in addition to \fIargTable\fR. If this bit is set in \fIflags\fR, then \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR will use only \fIargTable\fR and not its default table. .SH EXAMPLE .PP Here is an example definition of an \fIargTable\fR and some sample command lines that use the options. Note the effect on \fIargc\fR and \fIargv\fR; arguments processed by \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR are eliminated from \fIargv\fR, and \fIargc\fR is updated to reflect reduced number of arguments. .CS /* * Define and set default values for globals. */ int debugFlag = 0; int numReps = 100; char defaultFileName[] = "out"; char *fileName = defaultFileName; Boolean exec = FALSE; /* * Define option descriptions. */ Tk_ArgvInfo argTable[] = { {"\-X", TK_ARGV_CONSTANT, (char *) 1, (char *) &debugFlag, "Turn on debugging printfs"}, {"\-N", TK_ARGV_INT, (char *) NULL, (char *) &numReps, "Number of repetitions"}, {"\-of", TK_ARGV_STRING, (char *) NULL, (char *) &fileName, "Name of file for output"}, {"x", TK_ARGV_REST, (char *) NULL, (char *) &exec, "File to exec, followed by any arguments (must be last argument)."}, {(char *) NULL, TK_ARGV_END, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL} }; main(argc, argv) int argc; char *argv[]; { \&... if (Tk_ParseArgv(interp, tkwin, &argc, argv, argTable, 0) != TCL_OK) { fprintf(stderr, "%s\en", interp->result); exit(1); } /* * Remainder of the program. */ } .CE .PP Note that default values can be assigned to variables named in \fIargTable\fR: the variables will only be overwritten if the particular arguments are present in \fIargv\fR. Here are some example command lines and their effects. .CS prog \-N 200 infile # just sets the numReps variable to 200 prog \-of out200 infile # sets fileName to reference "out200" prog \-XN 10 infile # sets the debug flag, also sets numReps .CE In all of the above examples, \fIargc\fR will be set by \fBTk_ParseArgv\fR to 2, \fIargv\fR[0] will be .QW prog , \fIargv\fR[1] will be .QW infile , and \fIargv\fR[2] will be NULL. .SH KEYWORDS arguments, command line, options 0707010003fcd9000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b600003f2c000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002800000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeCursor.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetCursor.3,v 1.13 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_AllocCursorFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_AllocCursorFromObj, Tk_GetCursor, Tk_GetCursorFromObj, Tk_GetCursorFromData, Tk_NameOfCursor, Tk_FreeCursorFromObj, Tk_FreeCursor \- maintain database of cursors .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Tk_Cursor \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp Tk_Cursor \fBTk_GetCursor(\fIinterp, tkwin, name\fB)\fR .sp Tk_Cursor \fBTk_GetCursorFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp Tk_Cursor \fBTk_GetCursorFromData(\fIinterp, tkwin, source, mask, width, height, xHot, yHot, fg, bg\fB)\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfCursor(\fIdisplay, cursor\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_FreeCursorFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_FreeCursor(\fIdisplay, cursor\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "unsigned long" *pixelPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window in which the cursor will be used. .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out Description of cursor; see below for possible values. Internal rep will be modified to cache pointer to corresponding Tk_Cursor. .AP char *name in Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except description of cursor is passed as a string and resulting Tk_Cursor is not cached. .AP "const char" *source in Data for cursor cursor, in standard cursor format. .AP "const char" *mask in Data for mask cursor, in standard cursor format. .AP "int" width in Width of \fIsource\fR and \fImask\fR. .AP "int" height in Height of \fIsource\fR and \fImask\fR. .AP "int" xHot in X-location of cursor hot-spot. .AP "int" yHot in Y-location of cursor hot-spot. .AP Tk_Uid fg in Textual description of foreground color for cursor. .AP Tk_Uid bg in Textual description of background color for cursor. .AP Display *display in Display for which \fIcursor\fR was allocated. .AP Tk_Cursor cursor in Opaque Tk identifier for cursor. If passed to \fBTk_FreeCursor\fR, must have been returned by some previous call to \fBTk_GetCursor\fR or \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These procedures manage a collection of cursors being used by an application. The procedures allow cursors to be re-used efficiently, thereby avoiding server overhead, and also allow cursors to be named with character strings. .PP \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR takes as argument an object describing a cursor, and returns an opaque Tk identifier for a cursor corresponding to the description. It re-uses an existing cursor if possible and creates a new one otherwise. \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR caches information about the return value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to procedures such as \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetCursorFromObj\fR. If an error occurs in creating the cursor, such as when \fIobjPtr\fR refers to a non-existent file, then \fBNone\fR is returned and an error message will be stored in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL. \fIObjPtr\fR must contain a standard Tcl list with one of the following forms: .TP \fIname\fR\0[\fIfgColor\fR\0[\fIbgColor\fR]] \fIName\fR is the name of a cursor in the standard X cursor cursor, i.e., any of the names defined in \fBcursorcursor.h\fR, without the \fBXC_\fR. Some example values are \fBX_cursor\fR, \fBhand2\fR, or \fBleft_ptr\fR. Appendix B of .QW "The X Window System" by Scheifler & Gettys has illustrations showing what each of these cursors looks like. If \fIfgColor\fR and \fIbgColor\fR are both specified, they give the foreground and background colors to use for the cursor (any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetColor\fR may be used). If only \fIfgColor\fR is specified, then there will be no background color: the background will be transparent. If no colors are specified, then the cursor will use black for its foreground color and white for its background color. .RS .PP The Macintosh version of Tk supports all of the X cursors and will also accept any of the standard Mac cursors including \fBibeam\fR, \fBcrosshair\fR, \fBwatch\fR, \fBplus\fR, and \fBarrow\fR. In addition, Tk will load Macintosh cursor resources of the types \fBcrsr\fR (color) and \fBCURS\fR (black and white) by the name of the resource. The application and all its open dynamic library's resource files will be searched for the named cursor. If there are conflicts color cursors will always be loaded in preference to black and white cursors. .RE .TP \fB@\fIsourceName\0maskName\0fgColor\0bgColor\fR In this form, \fIsourceName\fR and \fImaskName\fR are the names of files describing cursors for the cursor's source bits and mask. Each file must be in standard X11 or X10 cursor format. \fIFgColor\fR and \fIbgColor\fR indicate the colors to use for the cursor, in any of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetColor\fR. This form of the command will not work on Macintosh or Windows computers. .TP \fB@\fIsourceName\0fgColor\fR This form is similar to the one above, except that the source is used as mask also. This means that the cursor's background is transparent. This form of the command will not work on Macintosh or Windows computers. .TP \fB@\fIsourceName\fR This form only works on Windows, and will load a Windows system cursor (\fB.ani\fR or \fB.cur\fR) from the file specified in \fIsourceName\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetCursor\fR is identical to \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR except that the description of the cursor is specified with a string instead of an object. This prevents \fBTk_GetCursor\fR from caching the return value, so \fBTk_GetCursor\fR is less efficient than \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetCursorFromObj\fR returns the token for an existing cursor, given the window and description used to create the cursor. \fBTk_GetCursorFromObj\fR does not actually create the cursor; the cursor must already have been created with a previous call to \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR or \fBTk_GetCursor\fR. The return value is cached in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to \fBTk_GetCursorFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR and \fItkwin\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR allows cursors to be created from in-memory descriptions of their source and mask cursors. \fISource\fR points to standard cursor data for the cursor's source bits, and \fImask\fR points to standard cursor data describing which pixels of \fIsource\fR are to be drawn and which are to be considered transparent. \fIWidth\fR and \fIheight\fR give the dimensions of the cursor, \fIxHot\fR and \fIyHot\fR indicate the location of the cursor's hot-spot (the point that is reported when an event occurs), and \fIfg\fR and \fIbg\fR describe the cursor's foreground and background colors textually (any of the forms suitable for \fBTk_GetColor\fR may be used). Typically, the arguments to \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR are created by including a cursor file directly into the source code for a program, as in the following example: .CS Tk_Cursor cursor; #include "source.cursor" #include "mask.cursor" cursor = Tk_GetCursorFromData(interp, tkwin, source_bits, mask_bits, source_width, source_height, source_x_hot, source_y_hot, Tk_GetUid("red"), Tk_GetUid("blue")); .CE .PP Under normal conditions \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR will return an identifier for the requested cursor. If an error occurs in creating the cursor then \fBNone\fR is returned and an error message will be stored in \fIinterp\fR's result. .PP \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR, \fBTk_GetCursor\fR, and \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR maintain a database of all the cursors they have created. Whenever possible, a call to \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR, \fBTk_GetCursor\fR, or \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR will return an existing cursor rather than creating a new one. This approach can substantially reduce server overhead, so the Tk procedures should generally be used in preference to Xlib procedures like \fBXCreateFontCursor\fR or \fBXCreatePixmapCursor\fR, which create a new cursor on each call. The Tk procedures are also more portable than the lower-level X procedures. .PP The procedure \fBTk_NameOfCursor\fR is roughly the inverse of \fBTk_GetCursor\fR. If its \fIcursor\fR argument was created by \fBTk_GetCursor\fR, then the return value is the \fIname\fR argument that was passed to \fBTk_GetCursor\fR to create the cursor. If \fIcursor\fR was created by a call to \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR, or by any other mechanism, then the return value is a hexadecimal string giving the X identifier for the cursor. Note: the string returned by \fBTk_NameOfCursor\fR is only guaranteed to persist until the next call to \fBTk_NameOfCursor\fR. Also, this call is not portable except for cursors returned by \fBTk_GetCursor\fR. .PP When a cursor returned by \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR, \fBTk_GetCursor\fR, or \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR is no longer needed, \fBTk_FreeCursorFromObj\fR or \fBTk_FreeCursor\fR should be called to release it. For \fBTk_FreeCursorFromObj\fR the cursor to release is specified with the same information used to create it; for \fBTk_FreeCursor\fR the cursor to release is specified with its Tk_Cursor token. There should be exactly one call to \fBTk_FreeCursor\fR for each call to \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR, \fBTk_GetCursor\fR, or \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR. .SH BUGS In determining whether an existing cursor can be used to satisfy a new request, \fBTk_AllocCursorFromObj\fR, \fBTk_GetCursor\fR, and \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR consider only the immediate values of their arguments. For example, when a file name is passed to \fBTk_GetCursor\fR, \fBTk_GetCursor\fR will assume it is safe to re-use an existing cursor created from the same file name: it will not check to see whether the file itself has changed, or whether the current directory has changed, thereby causing the name to refer to a different file. Similarly, \fBTk_GetCursorFromData\fR assumes that if the same \fIsource\fR pointer is used in two different calls, then the pointers refer to the same data; it does not check to see if the actual data values have changed. .SH KEYWORDS cursor 0707010003fcea000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700001c61000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002b00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetRootCoords.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetRootCrd.3,v 1.4 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_GetRootCoords 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetRootCoords \- Compute root-window coordinates of window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_GetRootCoords\fR(\fItkwin, xPtr, yPtr\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window tkwin .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .AP int *xPtr out Pointer to location in which to store root-window x-coordinate corresponding to left edge of \fItkwin\fR's border. .AP int *yPtr out Pointer to location in which to store root-window y-coordinate corresponding to top edge of \fItkwin\fR's border. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This procedure scans through the structural information maintained by Tk to compute the root-window coordinates corresponding to the upper-left corner of \fItkwin\fR's border. If \fItkwin\fR has no border, then \fBTk_GetRootCoords\fR returns the root-window coordinates corresponding to location (0,0) in \fItkwin\fR. \fBTk_GetRootCoords\fR is relatively efficient, since it does not have to communicate with the X server. .SH KEYWORDS coordinates, root window 0707010003fcef000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b7000024fd000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002700000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetVisual.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetVisual.3,v 1.8 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_GetVisual 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetVisual \- translate from string to visual .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Visual * \fBTk_GetVisual(\fIinterp, tkwin, string, depthPtr, colormapPtr\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tcl_Interp" *colormapPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window in which the visual will be used. .AP "const char" *string in String that identifies the desired visual. See below for valid formats. .AP int *depthPtr out Depth of returned visual gets stored here. .AP Colormap *colormapPtr out If non-NULL then a suitable colormap for visual is found and its identifier is stored here. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_GetVisual\fR takes a string description of a visual and finds a suitable X Visual for use in \fItkwin\fR, if there is one. It returns a pointer to the X Visual structure for the visual and stores the number of bits per pixel for it at \fI*depthPtr\fR. If \fIstring\fR is unrecognizable or if no suitable visual could be found, then NULL is returned and \fBTk_GetVisual\fR leaves an error message in \fIinterp->result\fR. If \fIcolormap\fR is non-NULL then \fBTk_GetVisual\fR also locates an appropriate colormap for use with the result visual and stores its X identifier at \fI*colormapPtr\fR. .PP The \fIstring\fR argument specifies the desired visual in one of the following ways: .TP 15 \fIclass depth\fR The string consists of a class name followed by an integer depth, with any amount of white space (including none) in between. \fIclass\fR selects what sort of visual is desired and must be one of \fBdirectcolor\fR, \fBgrayscale\fR, \fBgreyscale\fR, \fBpseudocolor\fR, \fBstaticcolor\fR, \fBstaticgray\fR, \fBstaticgrey\fR, or \fBtruecolor\fR, or a unique abbreviation. \fIdepth\fR specifies how many bits per pixel are needed for the visual. If possible, \fBTk_GetVisual\fR will return a visual with this depth; if there is no visual of the desired depth then \fBTk_GetVisual\fR looks first for a visual with greater depth, then one with less depth. .TP 15 \fBdefault\fR Use the default visual for \fItkwin\fR's screen. .TP 15 \fIpathName\fR Use the visual for the window given by \fIpathName\fR. \fIpathName\fR must be the name of a window on the same screen as \fItkwin\fR. .TP 15 \fInumber\fR Use the visual whose X identifier is \fInumber\fR. .TP 15 \fBbest\fR ?\fIdepth\fR? Choose the .QW "best possible" visual, using the following rules, in decreasing order of priority: .RS .IP (a) a visual that has exactly the desired depth is best, followed by a visual with greater depth than requested (but as little extra as possible), followed by a visual with less depth than requested (but as great a depth as possible); .IP (b) if no \fIdepth\fR is specified, then the deepest available visual is chosen; .IP (c) \fBpseudocolor\fR is better than \fBtruecolor\fR or \fBdirectcolor\fR, which are better than \fBstaticcolor\fR, which is better than \fBstaticgray\fR or \fBgrayscale\fR; .IP (d) the default visual for the screen is better than any other visual. .RE .SH CREDITS .PP The idea for \fBTk_GetVisual\fR, and the first implementation, came from Paul Mackerras. .SH KEYWORDS colormap, screen, visual 0707010003fcd2000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b60000241e000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000003200000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteGenericHandler.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1992-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: CrtGenHdlr.3,v 1.3 2004/09/19 16:05:36 dkf Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_CreateGenericHandler 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_CreateGenericHandler, Tk_DeleteGenericHandler \- associate procedure callback with all X events .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_CreateGenericHandler\fR(\fIproc, clientData\fR) .sp \fBTk_DeleteGenericHandler\fR(\fIproc, clientData\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tk_GenericProc" clientData .AP Tk_GenericProc *proc in Procedure to invoke whenever any X event occurs on any display. .AP ClientData clientData in Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIproc\fR. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_CreateGenericHandler\fR arranges for \fIproc\fR to be invoked in the future whenever any X event occurs. This mechanism is \fInot\fR intended for dispatching X events on windows managed by Tk (you should use \fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR for this purpose). \fBTk_CreateGenericHandler\fR is intended for other purposes, such as tracing X events, monitoring events on windows not owned by Tk, accessing X-related libraries that were not originally designed for use with Tk, and so on. .PP The callback to \fIproc\fR will be made by \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR; this mechanism only works in programs that dispatch events through \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR (or through other Tk procedures that call \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR, such as \fBTk_DoOneEvent\fR or \fBTk_MainLoop\fR). .PP \fIProc\fR should have arguments and result that match the type \fBTk_GenericProc\fR: .CS typedef int Tk_GenericProc( ClientData \fIclientData\fR, XEvent *\fIeventPtr\fR); .CE The \fIclientData\fR parameter to \fIproc\fR is a copy of the \fIclientData\fR argument given to \fBTk_CreateGenericHandler\fR when the callback was created. Typically, \fIclientData\fR points to a data structure containing application-specific information about how to handle events. \fIEventPtr\fR is a pointer to the X event. .PP Whenever an X event is processed by \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR, \fIproc\fR is called. The return value from \fIproc\fR is normally 0. A non-zero return value indicates that the event is not to be handled further; that is, \fIproc\fR has done all processing that is to be allowed for the event. .PP If there are multiple generic event handlers, each one is called for each event, in the order in which they were established. .PP \fBTk_DeleteGenericHandler\fR may be called to delete a previously-created generic event handler: it deletes each handler it finds that matches the \fIproc\fR and \fIclientData\fR arguments. If no such handler exists, then \fBTk_DeleteGenericHandler\fR returns without doing anything. Although Tk supports it, it's probably a bad idea to have more than one callback with the same \fIproc\fR and \fIclientData\fR arguments. .PP Establishing a generic event handler does nothing to ensure that the process will actually receive the X events that the handler wants to process. For example, it is the caller's responsibility to invoke \fBXSelectInput\fR to select the desired events, if that is necessary. .SH KEYWORDS bind, callback, event, handler 0707010003fd14000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b70000204a000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002400000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Ungrab.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation. '\" All rights reserved. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: Grab.3,v 1.2 2004/09/19 16:05:36 dkf Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_Grab 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_Grab, Tk_Ungrab \- manipulate grab state in an application .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp int \fBTk_Grab\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, grabGlobal\fR) .sp void \fBTk_Ungrab\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window on whose behalf the pointer is to be grabbed or released .AP int grabGlobal in Boolean indicating whether the grab is global or application local .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These functions are used to set or release a global or application local grab. When a grab is set on a particular window in a Tk application, mouse and keyboard events can only be received by that window and its descendants. Mouse and keyboard events for windows outside the tree rooted at \fItkwin\fR will be redirected to \fItkwin\fR. If the grab is global, then all mouse and keyboard events for windows outside the tree rooted at \fItkwin\fR (even those intended for windows in other applications) will be redirected to \fItkwin\fR. If the grab is application local, only mouse and keyboard events intended for a windows within the same application (but outside the tree rooted at \fItkwin\fR) will be redirected. .PP \fBTk_Grab\fR sets a grab on a particular window. \fITkwin\fR specifies the window on whose behalf the pointer is to be grabbed. \fIGrabGlobal\fR indicates whether the grab should be global or application local; if it is non-zero, it means the grab should be global. Normally, \fBTk_Grab\fR returns \fBTCL_OK\fR; if an error occurs and the grab cannot be set, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left if \fIinterp\fR's result. Once this call completes successfully, no window outside the tree rooted at \fItkwin\fR will receive pointer- or keyboard-related events until the next call to Tk_Ungrab. If a previous grab was in effect within the application, then it is replaced with a new one. .PP \fBTcl_Ungrab\fR releases a grab on the mouse pointer and keyboard, if there is one set on the window given by \fItkwin\fR. Once a grab is released, pointer and keyboard events will start being delivered to other windows again. .SH KEYWORDS grab, window 0707010003fcec000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b70000232f000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002a00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetSelection.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetSelect.3,v 1.5 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_GetSelection 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetSelection \- retrieve the contents of a selection .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp int \fBTk_GetSelection\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_GetSelProc clientData .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for reporting errors. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window on whose behalf to retrieve the selection (determines display from which to retrieve). .AP Atom selection in The name of the selection to be retrieved. .AP Atom target in Form in which to retrieve selection. .AP Tk_GetSelProc *proc in Procedure to invoke to process pieces of the selection as they are retrieved. .AP ClientData clientData in Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIproc\fR. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_GetSelection\fR retrieves the selection specified by the atom \fIselection\fR in the format specified by \fItarget\fR. The selection may actually be retrieved in several pieces; as each piece is retrieved, \fIproc\fR is called to process the piece. \fIProc\fR should have arguments and result that match the type \fBTk_GetSelProc\fR: .CS typedef int Tk_GetSelProc( ClientData \fIclientData\fR, Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, char *\fIportion\fR); .CE The \fIclientData\fR and \fIinterp\fR parameters to \fIproc\fR will be copies of the corresponding arguments to \fBTk_GetSelection\fR. \fIPortion\fR will be a pointer to a string containing part or all of the selection. For large selections, \fIproc\fR will be called several times with successive portions of the selection. The X Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual allows a selection to be returned in formats other than strings, e.g. as an array of atoms or integers. If this happens, Tk converts the selection back into a string before calling \fIproc\fR. If a selection is returned as an array of atoms, Tk converts it to a string containing the atom names separated by white space. For any other format besides string, Tk converts a selection to a string containing hexadecimal values separated by white space. .PP \fBTk_GetSelection\fR returns to its caller when the selection has been completely retrieved and processed by \fIproc\fR, or when a fatal error has occurred (e.g. the selection owner did not respond promptly). \fBTk_GetSelection\fR normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR; if an error occurs, it returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR and leaves an error message in \fIinterp->result\fR. \fIProc\fR should also return either \fBTCL_OK\fR or \fBTCL_ERROR\fR. If \fIproc\fR encounters an error in dealing with the selection, it should leave an error message in \fIinterp->result\fR and return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR; this will abort the selection retrieval. .SH KEYWORDS format, get, selection retrieval 0707010003fccf000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b600002b75000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002e00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateSelHandler.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: CrtSelHdlr.3,v 1.5 2007/12/13 15:23:42 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_CreateSelHandler 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_CreateSelHandler, Tk_DeleteSelHandler \- arrange to handle requests for a selection .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_CreateSelHandler\fR(\fItkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData, format\fR) .sp \fBTk_DeleteSelHandler\fR(\fItkwin, selection, target\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_SelectionProc clientData .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window for which \fIproc\fR will provide selection information. .AP Atom selection in The name of the selection for which \fIproc\fR will provide selection information. .AP Atom target in Form in which \fIproc\fR can provide the selection (e.g. STRING or FILE_NAME). Corresponds to \fItype\fR arguments in \fBselection\fR commands. .AP Tk_SelectionProc *proc in Procedure to invoke whenever the selection is owned by \fItkwin\fR and the selection contents are requested in the format given by \fItarget\fR. .AP ClientData clientData in Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIproc\fR. .AP Atom format in If the selection requestor is not in this process, \fIformat\fR determines the representation used to transmit the selection to its requestor. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_CreateSelHandler\fR arranges for a particular procedure (\fIproc\fR) to be called whenever \fIselection\fR is owned by \fItkwin\fR and the selection contents are requested in the form given by \fItarget\fR. \fITarget\fR should be one of the entries defined in the left column of Table 2 of the X Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual (ICCCM) or any other form in which an application is willing to present the selection. The most common form is STRING. .PP \fIProc\fR should have arguments and result that match the type \fBTk_SelectionProc\fR: .CS typedef int Tk_SelectionProc( ClientData \fIclientData\fR, int \fIoffset\fR, char *\fIbuffer\fR, int \fImaxBytes\fR); .CE The \fIclientData\fR parameter to \fIproc\fR is a copy of the \fIclientData\fR argument given to \fBTk_CreateSelHandler\fR. Typically, \fIclientData\fR points to a data structure containing application-specific information that is needed to retrieve the selection. \fIOffset\fR specifies an offset position into the selection, \fIbuffer\fR specifies a location at which to copy information about the selection, and \fImaxBytes\fR specifies the amount of space available at \fIbuffer\fR. \fIProc\fR should place a NULL-terminated string at \fIbuffer\fR containing \fImaxBytes\fR or fewer characters (not including the terminating NULL), and it should return a count of the number of non-NULL characters stored at \fIbuffer\fR. If the selection no longer exists (e.g. it once existed but the user deleted the range of characters containing it), then \fIproc\fR should return \-1. .PP When transferring large selections, Tk will break them up into smaller pieces (typically a few thousand bytes each) for more efficient transmission. It will do this by calling \fIproc\fR one or more times, using successively higher values of \fIoffset\fR to retrieve successive portions of the selection. If \fIproc\fR returns a count less than \fImaxBytes\fR it means that the entire remainder of the selection has been returned. If \fIproc\fR's return value is \fImaxBytes\fR it means there may be additional information in the selection, so Tk must make another call to \fIproc\fR to retrieve the next portion. .PP \fIProc\fR always returns selection information in the form of a character string. However, the ICCCM allows for information to be transmitted from the selection owner to the selection requestor in any of several formats, such as a string, an array of atoms, an array of integers, etc. The \fIformat\fR argument to \fBTk_CreateSelHandler\fR indicates what format should be used to transmit the selection to its requestor (see the middle column of Table 2 of the ICCCM for examples). If \fIformat\fR is not STRING, then Tk will take the value returned by \fIproc\fR and divided it into fields separated by white space. If \fIformat\fR is ATOM, then Tk will return the selection as an array of atoms, with each field in \fIproc\fR's result treated as the name of one atom. For any other value of \fIformat\fR, Tk will return the selection as an array of 32-bit values where each field of \fIproc\fR's result is treated as a number and translated to a 32-bit value. In any event, the \fIformat\fR atom is returned to the selection requestor along with the contents of the selection. .PP If \fBTk_CreateSelHandler\fR is called when there already exists a handler for \fIselection\fR and \fItarget\fR on \fItkwin\fR, then the existing handler is replaced with a new one. .PP \fBTk_DeleteSelHandler\fR removes the handler given by \fItkwin\fR, \fIselection\fR, and \fItarget\fR, if such a handler exists. If there is no such handler then it has no effect. .SH KEYWORDS format, handler, selection, target 0707010003fce4000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700001a85000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002500000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetHWND.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation. '\" All rights reserved. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetHWND.3,v 1.4 2004/08/22 15:43:20 dkf Exp $ '\" '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH HWND 3 8.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetHWND, Tk_AttachHWND \- manage interactions between the Windows handle and an X window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp HWND \fBTk_GetHWND\fR(\fIwindow\fR) .sp Window \fBTk_AttachHWND\fR(\fItkwin, hwnd\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AP Window window in X token for window. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Tk window for window. .AP HWND hwnd in Windows HWND for window. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_GetHWND\fR returns the Windows HWND identifier for X Windows window given by \fIwindow\fR. .PP \fBTk_AttachHWND\fR binds the Windows HWND identifier to the specified Tk_Window given by \fItkwin\fR. It returns an X Windows window that encapsulates the HWND. .SH KEYWORDS identifier, window 0707010003fcdc000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b600001e6a000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002500000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeXId.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: FreeXId.3,v 1.6 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_FreeXId 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_FreeXId \- make X resource identifier available for reuse .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_FreeXId(\fIdisplay, id\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Display *display out .AP Display *display in Display for which \fIid\fR was allocated. .AP XID id in Identifier of X resource (window, font, pixmap, cursor, graphics context, or colormap) that is no longer in use. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The default allocator for resource identifiers provided by Xlib is very simple-minded and does not allow resource identifiers to be re-used. If a long-running application reaches the end of the resource id space, it will generate an X protocol error and crash. Tk replaces the default id allocator with its own allocator, which allows identifiers to be reused. In order for this to work, \fBTk_FreeXId\fR must be called to tell the allocator about resources that have been freed. Tk automatically calls \fBTk_FreeXId\fR whenever it frees a resource, so if you use procedures like \fBTk_GetFont\fR, \fBTk_GetGC\fR, and \fBTk_GetPixmap\fR then you need not call \fBTk_FreeXId\fR. However, if you allocate resources directly from Xlib, for example by calling \fBXCreatePixmap\fR, then you should call \fBTk_FreeXId\fR when you call the corresponding Xlib free procedure, such as \fBXFreePixmap\fR. If you do not call \fBTk_FreeXId\fR then the resource identifier will be lost, which could cause problems if the application runs long enough to lose all of the available identifiers. .SH KEYWORDS resource identifier 0707010003fd11000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b800001e1d000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002d00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowVisual.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: SetVisual.3,v 1.4 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_SetWindowVisual 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_SetWindowVisual \- change visual characteristics of window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp int \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR(\fItkwin, visual, depth, colormap\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tk_Window int" colormap .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .AP Visual *visual in New visual type to use for \fItkwin\fR. .AP "int" depth in Number of bits per pixel desired for \fItkwin\fR. .AP Colormap colormap in New colormap for \fItkwin\fR, which must be compatible with \fIvisual\fR and \fIdepth\fR. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP When Tk creates a new window it assigns it the default visual characteristics (visual, depth, and colormap) for its screen. \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR may be called to change them. \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR must be called before the window has actually been created in X (e.g. before \fBTk_MapWindow\fR or \fBTk_MakeWindowExist\fR has been invoked for the window). The safest thing is to call \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR immediately after calling \fBTk_CreateWindow\fR. If \fItkwin\fR has already been created before \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR is called then it returns 0 and does not make any changes; otherwise it returns 1 to signify that the operation completed successfully. .PP Note: \fBTk_SetWindowVisual\fR should not be called if you just want to change a window's colormap without changing its visual or depth; call \fBTk_SetWindowColormap\fR instead. .SH KEYWORDS colormap, depth, visual 0707010003fcce000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b600004640000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000003400000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Australian National University '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" Author: Paul Mackerras (paulus@cs.anu.edu.au), '\" Department of Computer Science, '\" Australian National University. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: CrtPhImgFmt.3,v 1.10 2007/12/13 15:23:42 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat \- define new file format for photo images .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_CreatePhotoImageFormat\fR(\fIformatPtr\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr .AP Tk_PhotoImageFormat *formatPtr in Structure that defines the new file format. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_CreatePhotoImageFormat\fR is invoked to define a new file format for image data for use with photo images. The code that implements an image file format is called an image file format handler, or handler for short. The photo image code maintains a list of handlers that can be used to read and write data to or from a file. Some handlers may also support reading image data from a string or converting image data to a string format. The user can specify which handler to use with the \fB\-format\fR image configuration option or the \fB\-format\fR option to the \fBread\fR and \fBwrite\fR photo image subcommands. .PP An image file format handler consists of a collection of procedures plus a Tk_PhotoImageFormat structure, which contains the name of the image file format and pointers to six procedures provided by the handler to deal with files and strings in this format. The Tk_PhotoImageFormat structure contains the following fields: .CS typedef struct Tk_PhotoImageFormat { char *\fIname\fR; Tk_ImageFileMatchProc *\fIfileMatchProc\fR; Tk_ImageStringMatchProc *\fIstringMatchProc\fR; Tk_ImageFileReadProc *\fIfileReadProc\fR; Tk_ImageStringReadProc *\fIstringReadProc\fR; Tk_ImageFileWriteProc *\fIfileWriteProc\fR; Tk_ImageStringWriteProc *\fIstringWriteProc\fR; } Tk_PhotoImageFormat; .CE .PP The handler need not provide implementations of all six procedures. For example, the procedures that handle string data would not be provided for a format in which the image data are stored in binary, and could therefore contain null characters. If any procedure is not implemented, the corresponding pointer in the Tk_PhotoImageFormat structure should be set to NULL. The handler must provide the \fIfileMatchProc\fR procedure if it provides the \fIfileReadProc\fR procedure, and the \fIstringMatchProc\fR procedure if it provides the \fIstringReadProc\fR procedure. .SH NAME .PP \fIformatPtr->name\fR provides a name for the image type. Once \fBTk_CreatePhotoImageFormat\fR returns, this name may be used in the \fB\-format\fR photo image configuration and subcommand option. The manual page for the photo image (photo(n)) describes how image file formats are chosen based on their names and the value given to the \fB\-format\fR option. The first character of \fIformatPtr->name\fR must not be an uppercase character from the ASCII character set (that is, one of the characters \fBA\fR-\fBZ\fR). Such names are used only for legacy interface support (see below). .SH FILEMATCHPROC \fIformatPtr->fileMatchProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for Tk to call when it is searching for an image file format handler suitable for reading data in a given file. \fIformatPtr->fileMatchProc\fR must match the following prototype: .CS typedef int Tk_ImageFileMatchProc( Tcl_Channel \fIchan\fR, const char *\fIfileName\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR, int *\fIwidthPtr\fR, int *\fIheightPtr\fR, Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR); .CE The \fIfileName\fR argument is the name of the file containing the image data, which is open for reading as \fIchan\fR. The \fIformat\fR argument contains the value given for the \fB\-format\fR option, or NULL if the option was not specified. If the data in the file appears to be in the format supported by this handler, the \fIformatPtr->fileMatchProc\fR procedure should store the width and height of the image in *\fIwidthPtr\fR and *\fIheightPtr\fR respectively, and return 1. Otherwise it should return 0. .SH STRINGMATCHPROC \fIformatPtr->stringMatchProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for Tk to call when it is searching for an image file format handler for suitable for reading data from a given string. \fIformatPtr->stringMatchProc\fR must match the following prototype: .CS typedef int Tk_ImageStringMatchProc( Tcl_Obj *\fIdata\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR, int *\fIwidthPtr\fR, int *\fIheightPtr\fR, Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR); .CE The \fIdata\fR argument points to the object containing the image data. The \fIformat\fR argument contains the value given for the \fB\-format\fR option, or NULL if the option was not specified. If the data in the string appears to be in the format supported by this handler, the \fIformatPtr->stringMatchProc\fR procedure should store the width and height of the image in *\fIwidthPtr\fR and *\fIheightPtr\fR respectively, and return 1. Otherwise it should return 0. .SH FILEREADPROC \fIformatPtr->fileReadProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for Tk to call to read data from an image file into a photo image. \fIformatPtr->fileReadProc\fR must match the following prototype: .CS typedef int Tk_ImageFileReadProc( Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tcl_Channel \fIchan\fR, const char *\fIfileName\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR, PhotoHandle \fIimageHandle\fR, int \fIdestX\fR, int \fIdestY\fR, int \fIwidth\fR, int \fIheight\fR, int \fIsrcX\fR, int \fIsrcY\fR); .CE The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which the command was invoked to read the image; it should be used for reporting errors. The image data is in the file named \fIfileName\fR, which is open for reading as \fIchan\fR. The \fIformat\fR argument contains the value given for the \fB\-format\fR option, or NULL if the option was not specified. The image data in the file, or a subimage of it, is to be read into the photo image identified by the handle \fIimageHandle\fR. The subimage of the data in the file is of dimensions \fIwidth\fR x \fIheight\fR and has its top-left corner at coordinates (\fIsrcX\fR,\fIsrcY\fR). It is to be stored in the photo image with its top-left corner at coordinates (\fIdestX\fR,\fIdestY\fR) using the \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR procedure. The return value is a standard Tcl return value. .SH STRINGREADPROC \fIformatPtr->stringReadProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for Tk to call to read data from a string into a photo image. \fIformatPtr->stringReadProc\fR must match the following prototype: .CS typedef int Tk_ImageStringReadProc( Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIdata\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR, PhotoHandle \fIimageHandle\fR, int \fIdestX\fR, int \fIdestY\fR, int \fIwidth\fR, int \fIheight\fR, int \fIsrcX\fR, int \fIsrcY\fR); .CE The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which the command was invoked to read the image; it should be used for reporting errors. The \fIdata\fR argument points to the image data in object form. The \fIformat\fR argument contains the value given for the \fB\-format\fR option, or NULL if the option was not specified. The image data in the string, or a subimage of it, is to be read into the photo image identified by the handle \fIimageHandle\fR. The subimage of the data in the string is of dimensions \fIwidth\fR x \fIheight\fR and has its top-left corner at coordinates (\fIsrcX\fR,\fIsrcY\fR). It is to be stored in the photo image with its top-left corner at coordinates (\fIdestX\fR,\fIdestY\fR) using the \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR procedure. The return value is a standard Tcl return value. .SH FILEWRITEPROC \fIformatPtr->fileWriteProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for Tk to call to write data from a photo image to a file. \fIformatPtr->fileWriteProc\fR must match the following prototype: .CS typedef int Tk_ImageFileWriteProc( Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, const char *\fIfileName\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *\fIblockPtr\fR); .CE The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which the command was invoked to write the image; it should be used for reporting errors. The image data to be written are in memory and are described by the Tk_PhotoImageBlock structure pointed to by \fIblockPtr\fR; see the manual page FindPhoto(3) for details. The \fIfileName\fR argument points to the string giving the name of the file in which to write the image data. The \fIformat\fR argument contains the value given for the \fB\-format\fR option, or NULL if the option was not specified. The format string can contain extra characters after the name of the format. If appropriate, the \fIformatPtr->fileWriteProc\fR procedure may interpret these characters to specify further details about the image file. The return value is a standard Tcl return value. .SH STRINGWRITEPROC \fIformatPtr->stringWriteProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for Tk to call to translate image data from a photo image into a string. \fIformatPtr->stringWriteProc\fR must match the following prototype: .CS typedef int Tk_ImageStringWriteProc( Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIformat\fR, Tk_PhotoImageBlock *\fIblockPtr\fR); .CE The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which the command was invoked to convert the image; it should be used for reporting errors. The image data to be converted are in memory and are described by the Tk_PhotoImageBlock structure pointed to by \fIblockPtr\fR; see the manual page FindPhoto(3) for details. The data for the string should be put in the interpreter \fIinterp\fR result. The \fIformat\fR argument contains the value given for the \fB\-format\fR option, or NULL if the option was not specified. The format string can contain extra characters after the name of the format. If appropriate, the \fIformatPtr->stringWriteProc\fR procedure may interpret these characters to specify further details about the image file. The return value is a standard Tcl return value. .SH "LEGACY INTERFACE SUPPORT" In Tk 8.2 and earlier, the definition of all the function pointer types stored in fields of a \fBTk_PhotoImageFormat\fR struct were incompatibly different. Legacy programs and libraries dating from those days may still contain code that defines extended Tk photo image formats using the old interface. The Tk header file will still support this legacy interface if the code is compiled with the macro \fBUSE_OLD_IMAGE\fR defined. Alternatively, the legacy interfaces are used if the first character of \fIformatPtr->name\fR is an uppercase ASCII character (\fBA\fR-\fBZ\fR), and explicit casts are used to forgive the type mismatch. For example, .CS static Tk_PhotoImageFormat myFormat = { "MyFormat", (Tk_ImageFileMatchProc *) FileMatch, NULL, (Tk_ImageFileReadProc *) FileRead, NULL, NULL, NULL }; .CE would define a minimal \fBTk_PhotoImageFormat\fR that operates provide only file reading capability, where \fBFileMatch\fR and \fBFileRead\fR are written according to the legacy interfaces of Tk 8.2 or earlier. .PP Any stub-enabled extension providing an extended photo image format via the legacy interface enabled by the \fBUSE_OLD_IMAGE\fR macro that is compiled against Tk 8.5 headers and linked against the Tk 8.5 stub library will produce a file that can be loaded only into interps with Tk 8.5 or later; that is, the normal stub-compatibility rules. If a developer needs to generate from such code a file that is loadable into interps with Tk 8.4 or earlier, they must use Tk 8.4 headers and stub libraries to do so. .PP Any new code written today should not make use of the legacy interfaces. Expect their support to go away in Tk 9. .SH "SEE ALSO" Tk_FindPhoto, Tk_PhotoPutBlock .SH KEYWORDS photo image, image file 0707010003fcf0000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b7000019a9000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002a00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_HWNDToWindow.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation. '\" All rights reserved. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: HWNDToWindow.3,v 1.2 2000/09/07 00:28:38 ericm Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_HWNDToWindow 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_HWNDToWindow \- Find Tk's window information for a Windows window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_HWNDToWindow\fR(\fIhwnd\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AP HWND hwnd in Windows handle for the window. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP Given a Windows HWND window identifier, this procedure returns the corresponding Tk_Window handle. If there is no Tk_Window corresponding to \fIhwnd\fR then NULL is returned. .SH KEYWORDS Windows window id 0707010003fd13000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b800004e9b000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000003400000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: TextLayout.3,v 1.10 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_ComputeTextLayout 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_ComputeTextLayout, Tk_FreeTextLayout, Tk_DrawTextLayout, Tk_UnderlineTextLayout, Tk_PointToChar, Tk_CharBbox, Tk_DistanceToTextLayout, Tk_IntersectTextLayout, Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript \- routines to measure and display single-font, multi-line, justified text. .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Tk_TextLayout \fBTk_ComputeTextLayout(\fItkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags, widthPtr, heightPtr\fB)\fR .sp void \fBTk_FreeTextLayout(\fIlayout\fB)\fR .sp void \fBTk_DrawTextLayout(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, firstChar, lastChar\fB)\fR .sp void \fBTk_UnderlineTextLayout(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, underline\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_PointToChar(\fIlayout, x, y\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_CharBbox(\fIlayout, index, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_DistanceToTextLayout(\fIlayout, x, y\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_IntersectTextLayout(\fIlayout, x, y, width, height\fB)\fR .sp void \fBTk_TextLayoutToPostscript(\fIinterp, layout\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_TextLayout "*xPtr, *yPtr" .AP Tk_Font tkfont in Font to use when constructing and displaying a text layout. The \fItkfont\fR must remain valid for the lifetime of the text layout. Must have been returned by a previous call to \fBTk_GetFont\fR. .AP "const char" *string in Potentially multi-line string whose dimensions are to be computed and stored in the text layout. The \fIstring\fR must remain valid for the lifetime of the text layout. .AP int numChars in The number of characters to consider from \fIstring\fR. If \fInumChars\fR is less than 0, then assumes \fIstring\fR is null terminated and uses \fBTcl_NumUtfChars\fR to determine the length of \fIstring\fR. .AP int wrapLength in Longest permissible line length, in pixels. Lines in \fIstring\fR will automatically be broken at word boundaries and wrapped when they reach this length. If \fIwrapLength\fR is too small for even a single character to fit on a line, it will be expanded to allow one character to fit on each line. If \fIwrapLength\fR is <= 0, there is no automatic wrapping; lines will get as long as they need to be and only wrap if a newline/return character is encountered. .AP Tk_Justify justify in How to justify the lines in a multi-line text layout. Possible values are \fBTK_JUSTIFY_LEFT\fR, \fBTK_JUSTIFY_CENTER\fR, or \fBTK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT\fR. If the text layout only occupies a single line, then \fIjustify\fR is irrelevant. .AP int flags in Various flag bits OR-ed together. \fBTK_IGNORE_TABS\fR means that tab characters should not be expanded to the next tab stop. \fBTK_IGNORE_NEWLINES\fR means that newline/return characters should not cause a line break. If either tabs or newlines/returns are ignored, then they will be treated as regular characters, being measured and displayed in a platform-dependent manner as described in \fBTk_MeasureChars\fR, and will not have any special behaviors. .AP int *widthPtr out If non-NULL, filled with either the width, in pixels, of the widest line in the text layout, or the width, in pixels, of the bounding box for the character specified by \fIindex\fR. .AP int *heightPtr out If non-NULL, filled with either the total height, in pixels, of all the lines in the text layout, or the height, in pixels, of the bounding box for the character specified by \fIindex\fR. .AP Tk_TextLayout layout in A token that represents the cached layout information about the single-font, multi-line, justified piece of text. This token is returned by \fBTk_ComputeTextLayout\fR. .AP Display *display in Display on which to draw. .AP Drawable drawable in Window or pixmap in which to draw. .AP GC gc in Graphics context to use for drawing text layout. The font selected in this GC must correspond to the \fItkfont\fR used when constructing the text layout. .AP int "x, y" in Point, in pixels, at which to place the upper-left hand corner of the text layout when it is being drawn, or the coordinates of a point (with respect to the upper-left hand corner of the text layout) to check against the text layout. .AP int firstChar in The index of the first character to draw from the given text layout. The number 0 means to draw from the beginning. .AP int lastChar in The index of the last character up to which to draw. The character specified by \fIlastChar\fR itself will not be drawn. A number less than 0 means to draw all characters in the text layout. .AP int underline in Index of the single character to underline in the text layout, or a number less than 0 for no underline. .AP int index in The index of the character whose bounding box is desired. The bounding box is computed with respect to the upper-left hand corner of the text layout. .AP int "*xPtr, *yPtr" out Filled with the upper-left hand corner, in pixels, of the bounding box for the character specified by \fIindex\fR. Either or both \fIxPtr\fR and \fIyPtr\fR may be NULL, in which case the corresponding value is not calculated. .AP int "width, height" in Specifies the width and height, in pixels, of the rectangular area to compare for intersection against the text layout. .AP Tcl_Interp *interp out Postscript code that will print the text layout is appended to \fIinterp->result\fR. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These routines are for measuring and displaying single-font, multi-line, justified text. To measure and display simple single-font, single-line strings, refer to the documentation for \fBTk_MeasureChars\fR. There is no programming interface in the core of Tk that supports multi-font, multi-line text; support for that behavior must be built on top of simpler layers. Note that unlike the lower level text display routines, the functions described here all operate on character-oriented lengths and indices rather than byte-oriented values. See the description of \fBTcl_UtfAtIndex\fR for more details on converting between character and byte offsets. .PP The routines described here are built on top of the programming interface described in the \fBTk_MeasureChars\fR documentation. Tab characters and newline/return characters may be treated specially by these procedures, but all other characters are passed through to the lower level. .PP \fBTk_ComputeTextLayout\fR computes the layout information needed to display a single-font, multi-line, justified \fIstring\fR of text and returns a Tk_TextLayout token that holds this information. This token is used in subsequent calls to procedures such as \fBTk_DrawTextLayout\fR, \fBTk_DistanceToTextLayout\fR, and \fBTk_FreeTextLayout\fR. The \fIstring\fR and \fItkfont\fR used when computing the layout must remain valid for the lifetime of this token. .PP \fBTk_FreeTextLayout\fR is called to release the storage associated with \fIlayout\fR when it is no longer needed. A \fIlayout\fR should not be used in any other text layout procedures once it has been released. .PP \fBTk_DrawTextLayout\fR uses the information in \fIlayout\fR to display a single-font, multi-line, justified string of text at the specified location. .PP \fBTk_UnderlineTextLayout\fR uses the information in \fIlayout\fR to display an underline below an individual character. This procedure does not draw the text, just the underline. To produce natively underlined text, an underlined font should be constructed and used. All characters, including tabs, newline/return characters, and spaces at the ends of lines, can be underlined using this method. However, the underline will never be drawn outside of the computed width of \fIlayout\fR; the underline will stop at the edge for any character that would extend partially outside of \fIlayout\fR, and the underline will not be visible at all for any character that would be located completely outside of the layout. .PP \fBTk_PointToChar\fR uses the information in \fIlayout\fR to determine the character closest to the given point. The point is specified with respect to the upper-left hand corner of the \fIlayout\fR, which is considered to be located at (0, 0). Any point whose \fIy\fR-value is less that 0 will be considered closest to the first character in the text layout; any point whose \fIy\fR-value is greater than the height of the text layout will be considered closest to the last character in the text layout. Any point whose \fIx\fR-value is less than 0 will be considered closest to the first character on that line; any point whose \fIx\fR-value is greater than the width of the text layout will be considered closest to the last character on that line. The return value is the index of the character that was closest to the point. Given a \fIlayout\fR with no characters, the value 0 will always be returned, referring to a hypothetical zero-width placeholder character. .PP \fBTk_CharBbox\fR uses the information in \fIlayout\fR to return the bounding box for the character specified by \fIindex\fR. The width of the bounding box is the advance width of the character, and does not include any left or right bearing. Any character that extends partially outside of \fIlayout\fR is considered to be truncated at the edge. Any character that would be located completely outside of \fIlayout\fR is considered to be zero-width and pegged against the edge. The height of the bounding box is the line height for this font, extending from the top of the ascent to the bottom of the descent; information about the actual height of individual letters is not available. For measurement purposes, a \fIlayout\fR that contains no characters is considered to contain a single zero-width placeholder character at index 0. If \fIindex\fR was not a valid character index, the return value is 0 and \fI*xPtr\fR, \fI*yPtr\fR, \fI*widthPtr\fR, and \fI*heightPtr\fR are unmodified. Otherwise, if \fIindex\fR did specify a valid, the return value is non-zero, and \fI*xPtr\fR, \fI*yPtr\fR, \fI*widthPtr\fR, and \fI*heightPtr\fR are filled with the bounding box information for the character. If any of \fIxPtr\fR, \fIyPtr\fR, \fIwidthPtr\fR, or \fIheightPtr\fR are NULL, the corresponding value is not calculated or stored. .PP \fBTk_DistanceToTextLayout\fR computes the shortest distance in pixels from the given point (\fIx, y\fR) to the characters in \fIlayout\fR. Newline/return characters and non-displaying space characters that occur at the end of individual lines in the text layout are ignored for hit detection purposes, but tab characters are not. The return value is 0 if the point actually hits the \fIlayout\fR. If the point did not hit the \fIlayout\fR then the return value is the distance in pixels from the point to the \fIlayout\fR. .PP \fBTk_IntersectTextLayout\fR determines whether a \fIlayout\fR lies entirely inside, entirely outside, or overlaps a given rectangle. Newline/return characters and non-displaying space characters that occur at the end of individual lines in the \fIlayout\fR are ignored for intersection calculations. The return value is \-1 if the \fIlayout\fR is entirely outside of the rectangle, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely inside of the rectangle. .PP \fBTk_TextLayoutToPostscript\fR outputs code consisting of a Postscript array of strings that represent the individual lines in \fIlayout\fR. It is the responsibility of the caller to take the Postscript array of strings and add some Postscript function operate on the array to render each of the lines. The code that represents the Postscript array of strings is appended to \fIinterp->result\fR. .SH "DISPLAY MODEL" When measuring a text layout, space characters that occur at the end of a line are ignored. The space characters still exist and the insertion point can be positioned amongst them, but their additional width is ignored when justifying lines or returning the total width of a text layout. All end-of-line space characters are considered to be attached to the right edge of the line; this behavior is logical for left-justified text and reasonable for center-justified text, but not very useful when editing right-justified text. Spaces are considered variable width characters; the first space that extends past the edge of the text layout is clipped to the edge, and any subsequent spaces on the line are considered zero width and pegged against the edge. Space characters that occur in the middle of a line of text are not suppressed and occupy their normal space width. .PP Tab characters are not ignored for measurement calculations. If wrapping is turned on and there are enough tabs on a line, the next tab will wrap to the beginning of the next line. There are some possible strange interactions between tabs and justification; tab positions are calculated and the line length computed in a left-justified world, and then the whole resulting line is shifted so it is centered or right-justified, causing the tab columns not to align any more. .PP When wrapping is turned on, lines may wrap at word breaks (space or tab characters) or newline/returns. A dash or hyphen character in the middle of a word is not considered a word break. \fBTk_ComputeTextLayout\fR always attempts to place at least one word on each line. If it cannot because the \fIwrapLength\fR is too small, the word will be broken and as much as fits placed on the line and the rest on subsequent line(s). If \fIwrapLength\fR is so small that not even one character can fit on a given line, the \fIwrapLength\fR is ignored for that line and one character will be placed on the line anyhow. When wrapping is turned off, only newline/return characters may cause a line break. .PP When a text layout has been created using an underlined \fItkfont\fR, then any space characters that occur at the end of individual lines, newlines/returns, and tabs will not be displayed underlined when \fBTk_DrawTextLayout\fR is called, because those characters are never actually drawn \- they are merely placeholders maintained in the \fIlayout\fR. .SH KEYWORDS font 0707010003fcdb000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700001dbe000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002800000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreePixmap.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetPixmap.3,v 1.2 1998/09/14 18:22:50 stanton Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_GetPixmap 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetPixmap, Tk_FreePixmap \- allocate and free pixmaps .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Pixmap \fBTk_GetPixmap(\fIdisplay, d, width, height, depth\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_FreePixmap(\fIdisplay, pixmap\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Drawable" *pixelPtr .AP Display *display in X display for the pixmap. .AP Drawable d in Pixmap or window where the new pixmap will be used for drawing. .AP "int" width in Width of pixmap. .AP "int" height in Height of pixmap. .AP "int" depth in Number of bits per pixel in pixmap. .AP Pixmap pixmap in Pixmap to destroy. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These procedures are identical to the Xlib procedures \fBXCreatePixmap\fR and \fBXFreePixmap\fR, except that they have extra code to manage X resource identifiers so that identifiers for deleted pixmaps can be reused in the future. It is important for Tk applications to use these procedures rather than \fBXCreatePixmap\fR and \fBXFreePixmap\fR; otherwise long-running applications may run out of resource identifiers. .PP \fBTk_GetPixmap\fR creates a pixmap suitable for drawing in \fId\fR, with dimensions given by \fIwidth\fR, \fIheight\fR, and \fIdepth\fR, and returns its identifier. \fBTk_FreePixmap\fR destroys the pixmap given by \fIpixmap\fR and makes its resource identifier available for reuse. .SH KEYWORDS pixmap, resource identifier 0707010003fccc000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b6000075ba000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002c00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateItemType.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: CrtItemType.3,v 1.12 2007/12/13 15:23:42 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_CreateItemType 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_CreateItemType, Tk_GetItemTypes \- define new kind of canvas item .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_CreateItemType\fR(\fItypePtr\fR) .sp Tk_ItemType * \fBTk_GetItemTypes\fR() .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ItemType *typePtr .AP Tk_ItemType *typePtr in Structure that defines the new type of canvas item. .BE .SH INTRODUCTION .PP \fBTk_CreateItemType\fR is invoked to define a new kind of canvas item described by the \fItypePtr\fR argument. An item type corresponds to a particular value of the \fItype\fR argument to the \fBcreate\fR widget command for canvases, and the code that implements a canvas item type is called a \fItype manager\fR. Tk defines several built-in item types, such as \fBrectangle\fR and \fBtext\fR and \fBimage\fR, but \fBTk_CreateItemType\fR allows additional item types to be defined. Once \fBTk_CreateItemType\fR returns, the new item type may be used in new or existing canvas widgets just like the built-in item types. .PP \fBTk_GetItemTypes\fR returns a pointer to the first in the list of all item types currently defined for canvases. The entries in the list are linked together through their \fInextPtr\fR fields, with the end of the list marked by a NULL \fInextPtr\fR. .PP You may find it easier to understand the rest of this manual entry by looking at the code for an existing canvas item type such as bitmap (file tkCanvBmap.c) or text (tkCanvText.c). The easiest way to create a new type manager is to copy the code for an existing type and modify it for the new type. .PP Tk provides a number of utility procedures for the use of canvas type managers, such as \fBTk_CanvasCoords\fR and \fBTk_CanvasPsColor\fR; these are described in separate manual entries. .SH "DATA STRUCTURES" .PP A type manager consists of a collection of procedures that provide a standard set of operations on items of that type. The type manager deals with three kinds of data structures. The first data structure is a Tk_ItemType; it contains information such as the name of the type and pointers to the standard procedures implemented by the type manager: .CS typedef struct Tk_ItemType { char *\fIname\fR; int \fIitemSize\fR; Tk_ItemCreateProc *\fIcreateProc\fR; Tk_ConfigSpec *\fIconfigSpecs\fR; Tk_ItemConfigureProc *\fIconfigProc\fR; Tk_ItemCoordProc *\fIcoordProc\fR; Tk_ItemDeleteProc *\fIdeleteProc\fR; Tk_ItemDisplayProc *\fIdisplayProc\fR; int \fIalwaysRedraw\fR; Tk_ItemPointProc *\fIpointProc\fR; Tk_ItemAreaProc *\fIareaProc\fR; Tk_ItemPostscriptProc *\fIpostscriptProc\fR; Tk_ItemScaleProc *\fIscaleProc\fR; Tk_ItemTranslateProc *\fItranslateProc\fR; Tk_ItemIndexProc *\fIindexProc\fR; Tk_ItemCursorProc *\fIicursorProc\fR; Tk_ItemSelectionProc *\fIselectionProc\fR; Tk_ItemInsertProc *\fIinsertProc\fR; Tk_ItemDCharsProc *\fIdCharsProc\fR; Tk_ItemType *\fInextPtr\fR; } Tk_ItemType; .CE .PP The fields of a Tk_ItemType structure are described in more detail later in this manual entry. When \fBTk_CreateItemType\fR is called, its \fItypePtr\fR argument must point to a structure with all of the fields initialized except \fInextPtr\fR, which Tk sets to link all the types together into a list. The structure must be in permanent memory (either statically allocated or dynamically allocated but never freed); Tk retains a pointer to this structure. .PP The second data structure manipulated by a type manager is an \fIitem record\fR. For each item in a canvas there exists one item record. All of the items of a given type generally have item records with the same structure, but different types usually have different formats for their item records. The first part of each item record is a header with a standard structure defined by Tk via the type Tk_Item; the rest of the item record is defined by the type manager. A type manager must define its item records with a Tk_Item as the first field. For example, the item record for bitmap items is defined as follows: .CS typedef struct BitmapItem { Tk_Item \fIheader\fR; double \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR; Tk_Anchor \fIanchor\fR; Pixmap \fIbitmap\fR; XColor *\fIfgColor\fR; XColor *\fIbgColor\fR; GC \fIgc\fR; } BitmapItem; .CE The \fIheader\fR substructure contains information used by Tk to manage the item, such as its identifier, its tags, its type, and its bounding box. The fields starting with \fIx\fR belong to the type manager: Tk will never read or write them. The type manager should not need to read or write any of the fields in the header except for four fields whose names are \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR. These fields give a bounding box for the items using integer canvas coordinates: the item should not cover any pixels with x-coordinate lower than \fIx1\fR or y-coordinate lower than \fIy1\fR, nor should it cover any pixels with x-coordinate greater than or equal to \fIx2\fR or y-coordinate greater than or equal to \fIy2\fR. It is up to the type manager to keep the bounding box up to date as the item is moved and reconfigured. .PP Whenever Tk calls a procedure in a type manager it passes in a pointer to an item record. The argument is always passed as a pointer to a Tk_Item; the type manager will typically cast this into a pointer to its own specific type, such as BitmapItem. .PP The third data structure used by type managers has type Tk_Canvas; it serves as an opaque handle for the canvas widget as a whole. Type managers need not know anything about the contents of this structure. A Tk_Canvas handle is typically passed in to the procedures of a type manager, and the type manager can pass the handle back to library procedures such as Tk_CanvasTkwin to fetch information about the canvas. .SS NAME .PP This section and the ones that follow describe each of the fields in a Tk_ItemType structure in detail. The \fIname\fR field provides a string name for the item type. Once \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR returns, this name may be used in \fBcreate\fR widget commands to create items of the new type. If there already existed an item type by this name then the new item type replaces the old one. .SS ITEMSIZE \fItypePtr->itemSize\fR gives the size in bytes of item records of this type, including the Tk_Item header. Tk uses this size to allocate memory space for items of the type. All of the item records for a given type must have the same size. If variable length fields are needed for an item (such as a list of points for a polygon), the type manager can allocate a separate object of variable length and keep a pointer to it in the item record. .SS CREATEPROC .PP \fItypePtr->createProc\fR points to a procedure for Tk to call whenever a new item of this type is created. \fItypePtr->createProc\fR must match the following prototype: .CS typedef int Tk_ItemCreateProc( Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR, Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR, int \fIobjc\fR, Tcl_Obj* const \fIobjv\fR[]); .CE The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which the canvas's \fBcreate\fR widget command was invoked, and \fIcanvas\fR is a handle for the canvas widget. \fIitemPtr\fR is a pointer to a newly-allocated item of size \fItypePtr->itemSize\fR. Tk has already initialized the item's header (the first \fBsizeof(Tk_ItemType)\fR bytes). The \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR arguments describe all of the arguments to the \fBcreate\fR command after the \fItype\fR argument. For example, in the widget command .CS \fB\&.c create rectangle 10 20 50 50 \-fill black\fR .CE \fIobjc\fR will be \fB6\fR and \fIobjv\fR[0] will contain the integer object \fB10\fR. .PP \fIcreateProc\fR should use \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR to initialize the type-specific parts of the item record and set an initial value for the bounding box in the item's header. It should return a standard Tcl completion code and leave an error message in \fIinterp->result\fR if an error occurs. If an error occurs Tk will free the item record, so \fIcreateProc\fR must be sure to leave the item record in a clean state if it returns an error (e.g., it must free any additional memory that it allocated for the item). .SS CONFIGSPECS .PP Each type manager must provide a standard table describing its configuration options, in a form suitable for use with \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR. This table will normally be used by \fItypePtr->createProc\fR and \fItypePtr->configProc\fR, but Tk also uses it directly to retrieve option information in the \fBitemcget\fR and \fBitemconfigure\fR widget commands. \fItypePtr->configSpecs\fR must point to the configuration table for this type. Note: Tk provides a custom option type \fBtk_CanvasTagsOption\fR for implementing the \fB\-tags\fR option; see an existing type manager for an example of how to use it in \fIconfigSpecs\fR. .SS CONFIGPROC .PP \fItypePtr->configProc\fR is called by Tk whenever the \fBitemconfigure\fR widget command is invoked to change the configuration options for a canvas item. This procedure must match the following prototype: .CS typedef int Tk_ItemConfigureProc( Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR, Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR, int \fIobjc\fR, Tcl_Obj* const \fIobjv\fR[], int \fIflags\fR); .CE The \fIinterp\fR objument identifies the interpreter in which the widget command was invoked, \fIcanvas\fR is a handle for the canvas widget, and \fIitemPtr\fR is a pointer to the item being configured. \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR contain the configuration options. For example, if the following command is invoked: .CS \fB\&.c itemconfigure 2 \-fill red \-outline black\fR .CE \fIobjc\fR is \fB4\fR and \fIobjv\fR contains the string objects \fB\-fill\fR through \fBblack\fR. \fIobjc\fR will always be an even value. The \fIflags\fR argument contains flags to pass to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR; currently this value is always \fBTK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY\fR when Tk invokes \fItypePtr->configProc\fR, but the type manager's \fIcreateProc\fR procedure will usually invoke \fIconfigProc\fR with different flag values. .PP \fItypePtr->configProc\fR returns a standard Tcl completion code and leaves an error message in \fIinterp->result\fR if an error occurs. It must update the item's bounding box to reflect the new configuration options. .SS COORDPROC .PP \fItypePtr->coordProc\fR is invoked by Tk to implement the \fBcoords\fR widget command for an item. It must match the following prototype: .CS typedef int Tk_ItemCoordProc( Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR, Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR, int \fIobjc\fR, Tcl_Obj* const \fIobjv\fR[]); .CE The arguments \fIinterp\fR, \fIcanvas\fR, and \fIitemPtr\fR all have the standard meanings, and \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR describe the coordinate arguments. For example, if the following widget command is invoked: .CS \fB\&.c coords 2 30 90\fR .CE \fIobjc\fR will be \fB2\fR and \fBobjv\fR will contain the integer objects \fB30\fR and \fB90\fR. .PP The \fIcoordProc\fR procedure should process the new coordinates, update the item appropriately (e.g., it must reset the bounding box in the item's header), and return a standard Tcl completion code. If an error occurs, \fIcoordProc\fR must leave an error message in \fIinterp->result\fR. .SS DELETEPROC .PP \fItypePtr->deleteProc\fR is invoked by Tk to delete an item and free any resources allocated to it. It must match the following prototype: .CS typedef void Tk_ItemDeleteProc( Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR, Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR, Display *\fIdisplay\fR); .CE The \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments have the usual interpretations, and \fIdisplay\fR identifies the X display containing the canvas. \fIdeleteProc\fR must free up any resources allocated for the item, so that Tk can free the item record. \fIdeleteProc\fR should not actually free the item record; this will be done by Tk when \fIdeleteProc\fR returns. .SS "DISPLAYPROC AND ALWAYSREDRAW" .PP \fItypePtr->displayProc\fR is invoked by Tk to redraw an item on the screen. It must match the following prototype: .CS typedef void Tk_ItemDisplayProc( Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR, Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR, Display *\fIdisplay\fR, Drawable \fIdst\fR, int \fIx\fR, int \fIy\fR, int \fIwidth\fR, int \fIheight\fR); .CE The \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments have the usual meaning. \fIdisplay\fR identifies the display containing the canvas, and \fIdst\fR specifies a drawable in which the item should be rendered; typically this is an off-screen pixmap, which Tk will copy into the canvas's window once all relevant items have been drawn. \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR specify a rectangular region in canvas coordinates, which is the area to be redrawn; only information that overlaps this area needs to be redrawn. Tk will not call \fIdisplayProc\fR unless the item's bounding box overlaps the redraw area, but the type manager may wish to use the redraw area to optimize the redisplay of the item. .PP Because of scrolling and the use of off-screen pixmaps for double-buffered redisplay, the item's coordinates in \fIdst\fR will not necessarily be the same as those in the canvas. \fIdisplayProc\fR should call \fBTk_CanvasDrawableCoords\fR to transform coordinates from those of the canvas to those of \fIdst\fR. .PP Normally an item's \fIdisplayProc\fR is only invoked if the item overlaps the area being displayed. However, if \fItypePtr->alwaysRedraw\fR has a non-zero value, then \fIdisplayProc\fR is invoked during every redisplay operation, even if the item does not overlap the area of redisplay. \fIalwaysRedraw\fR should normally be set to 0; it is only set to 1 in special cases such as window items that need to be unmapped when they are off-screen. .SS POINTPROC .PP \fItypePtr->pointProc\fR is invoked by Tk to find out how close a given point is to a canvas item. Tk uses this procedure for purposes such as locating the item under the mouse or finding the closest item to a given point. The procedure must match the following prototype: .CS typedef double Tk_ItemPointProc( Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR, Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR, double *\fIpointPtr\fR); .CE \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR have the usual meaning. \fIpointPtr\fR points to an array of two numbers giving the x and y coordinates of a point. \fIpointProc\fR must return a real value giving the distance from the point to the item, or 0 if the point lies inside the item. .SS AREAPROC .PP \fItypePtr->areaProc\fR is invoked by Tk to find out the relationship between an item and a rectangular area. It must match the following prototype: .CS typedef int Tk_ItemAreaProc( Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR, Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR, double *\fIrectPtr\fR); .CE \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR have the usual meaning. \fIrectPtr\fR points to an array of four real numbers; the first two give the x and y coordinates of the upper left corner of a rectangle, and the second two give the x and y coordinates of the lower right corner. \fIareaProc\fR must return \-1 if the item lies entirely outside the given area, 0 if it lies partially inside and partially outside the area, and 1 if it lies entirely inside the area. .SS POSTSCRIPTPROC .PP \fItypePtr->postscriptProc\fR is invoked by Tk to generate Postscript for an item during the \fBpostscript\fR widget command. If the type manager is not capable of generating Postscript then \fItypePtr->postscriptProc\fR should be NULL. The procedure must match the following prototype: .CS typedef int Tk_ItemPostscriptProc( Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR, Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR, int \fIprepass\fR); .CE The \fIinterp\fR, \fIcanvas\fR, and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments all have standard meanings; \fIprepass\fR will be described below. If \fIpostscriptProc\fR completes successfully, it should append Postscript for the item to the information in \fIinterp->result\fR (e.g. by calling \fBTcl_AppendResult\fR, not \fBTcl_SetResult\fR) and return \fBTCL_OK\fR. If an error occurs, \fIpostscriptProc\fR should clear the result and replace its contents with an error message; then it should return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR. .PP Tk provides a collection of utility procedures to simplify \fIpostscriptProc\fR. For example, \fBTk_CanvasPsColor\fR will generate Postscript to set the current color to a given Tk color and \fBTk_CanvasPsFont\fR will set up font information. When generating Postscript, the type manager is free to change the graphics state of the Postscript interpreter, since Tk places \fBgsave\fR and \fBgrestore\fR commands around the Postscript for the item. The type manager can use canvas x coordinates directly in its Postscript, but it must call \fBTk_CanvasPsY\fR to convert y coordinates from the space of the canvas (where the origin is at the upper left) to the space of Postscript (where the origin is at the lower left). .PP In order to generate Postscript that complies with the Adobe Document Structuring Conventions, Tk actually generates Postscript in two passes. It calls each item's \fIpostscriptProc\fR in each pass. The only purpose of the first pass is to collect font information (which is done by \fBTk_CanvasPsFont\fR); the actual Postscript is discarded. Tk sets the \fIprepass\fR argument to \fIpostscriptProc\fR to 1 during the first pass; the type manager can use \fIprepass\fR to skip all Postscript generation except for calls to \fBTk_CanvasPsFont\fR. During the second pass \fIprepass\fR will be 0, so the type manager must generate complete Postscript. .SS SCALEPROC \fItypePtr->scaleProc\fR is invoked by Tk to rescale a canvas item during the \fBscale\fR widget command. The procedure must match the following prototype: .CS typedef void Tk_ItemScaleProc( Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR, Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR, double \fIoriginX\fR, double \fIoriginY\fR, double \fIscaleX\fR, double \fIscaleY\fR); .CE The \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments have the usual meaning. \fIoriginX\fR and \fIoriginY\fR specify an origin relative to which the item is to be scaled, and \fIscaleX\fR and \fIscaleY\fR give the x and y scale factors. The item should adjust its coordinates so that a point in the item that used to have coordinates \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR will have new coordinates \fIx\(fm\fR and \fIy\(fm\fR, where .CS \fIx\(fm = originX + scaleX*(x-originX) y\(fm = originY + scaleY*(y-originY)\fR .CE \fIscaleProc\fR must also update the bounding box in the item's header. .SS TRANSLATEPROC \fItypePtr->translateProc\fR is invoked by Tk to translate a canvas item during the \fBmove\fR widget command. The procedure must match the following prototype: .CS typedef void Tk_ItemTranslateProc( Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR, Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR, double \fIdeltaX\fR, double \fIdeltaY\fR); .CE The \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments have the usual meaning, and \fIdeltaX\fR and \fIdeltaY\fR give the amounts that should be added to each x and y coordinate within the item. The type manager should adjust the item's coordinates and update the bounding box in the item's header. .SS INDEXPROC \fItypePtr->indexProc\fR is invoked by Tk to translate a string index specification into a numerical index, for example during the \fBindex\fR widget command. It is only relevant for item types that support indexable text; \fItypePtr->indexProc\fR may be specified as NULL for non-textual item types. The procedure must match the following prototype: .CS typedef int Tk_ItemIndexProc( Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR, Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR, char \fIindexString\fR, int *\fIindexPtr\fR); .CE The \fIinterp\fR, \fIcanvas\fR, and \fIitemPtr\fR arguments all have the usual meaning. \fIindexString\fR contains a textual description of an index, and \fIindexPtr\fR points to an integer value that should be filled in with a numerical index. It is up to the type manager to decide what forms of index are supported (e.g., numbers, \fBinsert\fR, \fBsel.first\fR, \fBend\fR, etc.). \fIindexProc\fR should return a Tcl completion code and set \fIinterp->result\fR in the event of an error. .SS ICURSORPROC .PP \fItypePtr->icursorProc\fR is invoked by Tk during the \fBicursor\fR widget command to set the position of the insertion cursor in a textual item. It is only relevant for item types that support an insertion cursor; \fItypePtr->icursorProc\fR may be specified as NULL for item types that do not support an insertion cursor. The procedure must match the following prototype: .CS typedef void Tk_ItemCursorProc( Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR, Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR, int \fIindex\fR); .CE \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR have the usual meanings, and \fIindex\fR is an index into the item's text, as returned by a previous call to \fItypePtr->insertProc\fR. The type manager should position the insertion cursor in the item just before the character given by \fIindex\fR. Whether or not to actually display the insertion cursor is determined by other information provided by \fBTk_CanvasGetTextInfo\fR. .SS SELECTIONPROC .PP \fItypePtr->selectionProc\fR is invoked by Tk during selection retrievals; it must return part or all of the selected text in the item (if any). It is only relevant for item types that support text; \fItypePtr->selectionProc\fR may be specified as NULL for non-textual item types. The procedure must match the following prototype: .CS typedef int Tk_ItemSelectionProc( Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR, Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR, int \fIoffset\fR, char *\fIbuffer\fR, int \fImaxBytes\fR); .CE \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR have the usual meanings. \fIoffset\fR is an offset in bytes into the selection where 0 refers to the first byte of the selection; it identifies the first character that is to be returned in this call. \fIbuffer\fR points to an area of memory in which to store the requested bytes, and \fImaxBytes\fR specifies the maximum number of bytes to return. \fIselectionProc\fR should extract up to \fImaxBytes\fR characters from the selection and copy them to \fImaxBytes\fR; it should return a count of the number of bytes actually copied, which may be less than \fImaxBytes\fR if there are not \fIoffset+maxBytes\fR bytes in the selection. .SS INSERTPROC .PP \fItypePtr->insertProc\fR is invoked by Tk during the \fBinsert\fR widget command to insert new text into a canvas item. It is only relevant for item types that support text; \fItypePtr->insertProc\fR may be specified as NULL for non-textual item types. The procedure must match the following prototype: .CS typedef void Tk_ItemInsertProc( Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR, Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR, int \fIindex\fR, char *\fIstring\fR); .CE \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR have the usual meanings. \fIindex\fR is an index into the item's text, as returned by a previous call to \fItypePtr->insertProc\fR, and \fIstring\fR contains new text to insert just before the character given by \fIindex\fR. The type manager should insert the text and recompute the bounding box in the item's header. .SS DCHARSPROC .PP \fItypePtr->dCharsProc\fR is invoked by Tk during the \fBdchars\fR widget command to delete a range of text from a canvas item. It is only relevant for item types that support text; \fItypePtr->dCharsProc\fR may be specified as NULL for non-textual item types. The procedure must match the following prototype: .CS typedef void Tk_ItemDCharsProc( Tk_Canvas \fIcanvas\fR, Tk_Item *\fIitemPtr\fR, int \fIfirst\fR, int \fIlast\fR); .CE \fIcanvas\fR and \fIitemPtr\fR have the usual meanings. \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR give the indices of the first and last bytes to be deleted, as returned by previous calls to \fItypePtr->indexProc\fR. The type manager should delete the specified characters and update the bounding box in the item's header. .SH "SEE ALSO" Tk_CanvasPsY, Tk_CanvasTextInfo, Tk_CanvasTkwin .SH KEYWORDS canvas, focus, item type, selection, type manager 0707010003fcf4000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b600001d15000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000003100000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_InitConsoleChannels.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 2007 ActiveState Software Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: CrtConsoleChan.3,v 1.3 2007/12/13 15:23:42 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_InitConsoleChannels 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_InitConsoleChannels \- Install the console channels as standard channels .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_InitConsoleChannels\fR(\fIinterp\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tcl_Interp *interp in .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter in which the console channels are created. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_InitConsoleChannels\fR is invoked to create a set of console channels and install them as the standard channels. All I/O on these channels will be discarded until \fBTk_CreateConsoleWindow\fR is called to attach the console to a text widget. .PP This function is for use by shell applications based on Tk, like \fBwish\fR, on platforms which have no standard channels in graphical mode, like Win32. .PP The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which to create and install the console channels. .PP \fBNOTE:\fR If this function is used it has to be called before the first call to \fBTcl_RegisterChannel\fR, directly, or indirectly through other channel functions. Because otherwise the standard channels will be already initialized to the system defaults, which will be nonsensical for the case \fBTk_InitConsoleChannels\fR is for. .SH "SEE ALSO" console(n) .SH KEYWORDS standard channels, console 0707010003fced000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700001d53000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002400000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetUid.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetUid.3,v 1.8 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_GetUid 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetUid, Tk_Uid \- convert from string to unique identifier .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Tk_Uid \fBTk_GetUid\fR(\fIstring\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AP char *string in String for which the corresponding unique identifier is desired. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_GetUid\fR returns the unique identifier corresponding to \fIstring\fR. Unique identifiers are similar to atoms in Lisp, and are used in Tk to speed up comparisons and searches. A unique identifier (type Tk_Uid) is a string pointer and may be used anywhere that a variable of type .QW "char *" could be used. However, there is guaranteed to be exactly one unique identifier for any given string value. If \fBTk_GetUid\fR is called twice, once with string \fIa\fR and once with string \fIb\fR, and if \fIa\fR and \fIb\fR have the same string value (strcmp(a, b) == 0), then \fBTk_GetUid\fR will return exactly the same Tk_Uid value for each call (Tk_GetUid(a) == Tk_GetUid(b)). This means that variables of type Tk_Uid may be compared directly (x == y) without having to call \fBstrcmp\fR. In addition, the return value from \fBTk_GetUid\fR will have the same string value as its argument (strcmp(Tk_GetUid(a), a) == 0). .SH KEYWORDS atom, unique identifier 0707010003fcdd000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b600002747000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002d00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GeometryRequest.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GeomReq.3,v 1.3 2001/09/26 20:25:17 pspjuth Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_GeometryRequest 3 "8.4" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GeometryRequest, Tk_SetMinimumRequestSize, Tk_SetInternalBorder, Tk_SetInternalBorderEx \- specify desired geometry or internal border for a window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR(\fItkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight\fR) .sp \fBTk_SetMinimumRequestSize\fR(\fItkwin, minWidth, minHeight\fR) .sp \fBTk_SetInternalBorder\fR(\fItkwin, width\fR) .sp \fBTk_SetInternalBorderEx\fR(\fItkwin, left, right, top, bottom\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS baseHeight clientData .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window for which geometry is being requested. .AP int reqWidth in Desired width for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units. .AP int reqHeight in Desired height for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units. .AP int minWidth in Desired minimum requested width for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units. .AP int minHeight in Desired minimum requested height for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units. .AP int width in Space to leave for internal border for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units. .AP int left in Space to leave for left side of internal border for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units. .AP int right in Space to leave for right side of internal border for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units. .AP int top in Space to leave for top side of internal border for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units. .AP int bottom in Space to leave for bottom side of internal border for \fItkwin\fR, in pixel units. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR is called by widget code to indicate its preference for the dimensions of a particular window. The arguments to \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR are made available to the geometry manager for the window, which then decides on the actual geometry for the window. Although geometry managers generally try to satisfy requests made to \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR, there is no guarantee that this will always be possible. Widget code should not assume that a geometry request will be satisfied until it receives a \fBConfigureNotify\fR event indicating that the geometry change has occurred. Widget code should never call procedures like \fBTk_ResizeWindow\fR directly. Instead, it should invoke \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR and leave the final geometry decisions to the geometry manager. .PP If \fItkwin\fR is a top-level window, then the geometry information will be passed to the window manager using the standard ICCCM protocol. .PP \fBTk_SetInternalBorder\fR is called by widget code to indicate that the widget has an internal border. This means that the widget draws a decorative border inside the window instead of using the standard X borders, which are external to the window's area. For example, internal borders are used to draw 3-D effects. \fIWidth\fR specifies the width of the border in pixels. Geometry managers will use this information to avoid placing any children of \fItkwin\fR overlapping the outermost \fIwidth\fR pixels of \fItkwin\fR's area. .PP \fBTk_SetInternalBorderEx\fR works like \fBTk_SetInternalBorder\fR but lets you specify different widths for different sides of the window. .PP \fBTk_SetMinimumRequestSize\fR is called by widget code to indicate that a geometry manager should request at least this size for the widget. This allows a widget to have some control over its size when a propagating geometry manager is used inside it. .PP The information specified in calls to \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR, \fBTk_SetMinimumRequestSize\fR, \fBTk_SetInternalBorder\fR and \fBTk_SetInternalBorderEx\fR can be retrieved using the macros \fBTk_ReqWidth\fR, \fBTk_ReqHeight\fR, \fBTk_MinReqWidth\fR, \fBTk_MinReqHeight\fR, \fBTk_MinReqWidth\fR, \fBTk_InternalBorderLeft\fR, \fBTk_InternalBorderRight\fR, \fBTk_InternalBorderTop\fR and \fBTk_InternalBorderBottom\fR. See the \fBTk_WindowId\fR manual entry for details. .SH KEYWORDS geometry, request 0707010003fd00000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700001a59000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002900000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfImage.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: NameOfImg.3,v 1.4 2007/01/05 00:00:49 nijtmans Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_NameOfImage 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_NameOfImage \- Return name of image. .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfImage\fR(\fItypePtr\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ImageMaster *masterPtr .AP Tk_ImageMaster *masterPtr in Token for image, which was passed to image manager's \fIcreateProc\fR when the image was created. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This procedure is invoked by image managers to find out the name of an image. Given the token for the image, it returns the string name for the image. .SH KEYWORDS image manager, image name 0707010003fcde000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b6000022fe000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002e00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAnchorFromObj.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetAnchor.3,v 1.10 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_GetAnchorFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetAnchorFromObj, Tk_GetAnchor, Tk_NameOfAnchor \- translate between strings and anchor positions .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp int \fBTk_GetAnchorFromObj(\fIinterp, objPtr, anchorPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetAnchor(\fIinterp, string, anchorPtr\fB)\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfAnchor(\fIanchor\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tk_Anchor" *anchorPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting, or NULL. .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out String value contains name of anchor point: .QW n , .QW ne , .QW e , .QW se , .QW s , .QW sw , .QW w , .QW nw , or .QW center ; internal rep will be modified to cache corresponding Tk_Anchor. .AP "const char" *string in Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except description of anchor point is passed as a string. .AP int *anchorPtr out Pointer to location in which to store anchor position corresponding to \fIobjPtr\fR or \fIstring\fR. .AP Tk_Anchor anchor in Anchor position, e.g. \fBTCL_ANCHOR_CENTER\fR. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_GetAnchorFromObj\fR places in \fI*anchorPtr\fR an anchor position (enumerated type \fBTk_Anchor\fR) corresponding to \fIobjPtr\fR's value. The result will be one of \fBTK_ANCHOR_N\fR, \fBTK_ANCHOR_NE\fR, \fBTK_ANCHOR_E\fR, \fBTK_ANCHOR_SE\fR, \fBTK_ANCHOR_S\fR, \fBTK_ANCHOR_SW\fR, \fBTK_ANCHOR_W\fR, \fBTK_ANCHOR_NW\fR, or \fBTK_ANCHOR_CENTER\fR. Anchor positions are typically used for indicating a point on an object that will be used to position the object, e.g. \fBTK_ANCHOR_N\fR means position the top center point of the object at a particular place. .PP Under normal circumstances the return value is \fBTCL_OK\fR and \fIinterp\fR is unused. If \fIstring\fR does not contain a valid anchor position or an abbreviation of one of these names, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned, \fI*anchorPtr\fR is unmodified, and an error message is stored in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL. \fBTk_GetAnchorFromObj\fR caches information about the return value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to \fBTk_GetAnchorFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR is identical to \fBTk_GetAnchorFromObj\fR except that the description of the anchor is specified with a string instead of an object. This prevents \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR from caching the return value, so \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR is less efficient than \fBTk_GetAnchorFromObj\fR. .PP \fBTk_NameOfAnchor\fR is the logical inverse of \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR. Given an anchor position such as \fBTK_ANCHOR_N\fR it returns a statically-allocated string corresponding to \fIanchor\fR. If \fIanchor\fR is not a legal anchor value, then .QW "unknown anchor position" is returned. .SH KEYWORDS anchor position 0707010003fce7000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700001f01000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002a00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetJoinStyle.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetJoinStl.3,v 1.8 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_GetJoinStyle 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetJoinStyle, Tk_NameOfJoinStyle \- translate between strings and join styles .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp int \fBTk_GetJoinStyle(\fIinterp, string, joinPtr\fB)\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfJoinStyle(\fIjoin\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tcl_Interp" *joinPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP "const char" *string in String containing name of join style: one of .QW bevel , .QW miter , or .QW round . .AP int *joinPtr out Pointer to location in which to store X join style corresponding to \fIstring\fR. .AP int join in Join style: one of \fBJoinBevel\fR, \fBJoinMiter\fR, \fBJoinRound\fR. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR places in \fI*joinPtr\fR the X join style corresponding to \fIstring\fR, which will be one of \fBJoinBevel\fR, \fBJoinMiter\fR, or \fBJoinRound\fR. Join styles are typically used in X graphics contexts to indicate how adjacent line segments should be joined together. See the X documentation for information on what each style implies. .PP Under normal circumstances the return value is \fBTCL_OK\fR and \fIinterp\fR is unused. If \fIstring\fR does not contain a valid join style or an abbreviation of one of these names, then an error message is stored in \fIinterp->result\fR, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned, and \fI*joinPtr\fR is unmodified. .PP \fBTk_NameOfJoinStyle\fR is the logical inverse of \fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR. Given a join style such as \fBJoinBevel\fR it returns a statically-allocated string corresponding to \fIjoin\fR. If \fIjoin\fR is not a legal join style, then .QW "unknown join style" is returned. .SH KEYWORDS bevel, join style, miter, round 0707010003fcd4000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b60000308f000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002b00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DestroyWindow.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: CrtWindow.3,v 1.12 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_CreateWindow 3 4.2 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_CreateWindow, Tk_CreateWindowFromPath, Tk_DestroyWindow, Tk_MakeWindowExist \- create or delete window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_CreateWindow\fR(\fIinterp, parent, name, topLevScreen\fR) .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_CreateAnonymousWindow\fR(\fIinterp, parent, topLevScreen\fR) .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_CreateWindowFromPath\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, pathName, topLevScreen\fR) .sp \fBTk_DestroyWindow\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp \fBTk_MakeWindowExist\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tcl_Interp *topLevScreen .AP Tcl_Interp *interp out Tcl interpreter to use for error reporting. If no error occurs, then \fI*interp\fR is not modified. .AP Tk_Window parent in Token for the window that is to serve as the logical parent of the new window. .AP "const char" *name in Name to use for this window. Must be unique among all children of the same \fIparent\fR. .AP "const char" *topLevScreen in Has same format as \fIscreenName\fR. If NULL, then new window is created as an internal window. If non-NULL, new window is created as a top-level window on screen \fItopLevScreen\fR. If \fItopLevScreen\fR is an empty string .PQ "" then new window is created as top-level window of \fIparent\fR's screen. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .AP "const char" *pathName in Name of new window, specified as path name within application (e.g. \fB.a.b.c\fR). .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP The procedures \fBTk_CreateWindow\fR, \fBTk_CreateAnonymousWindow\fR, and \fBTk_CreateWindowFromPath\fR are used to create new windows for use in Tk-based applications. Each of the procedures returns a token that can be used to manipulate the window in other calls to the Tk library. If the window could not be created successfully, then NULL is returned and \fIinterp->result\fR is modified to hold an error message. .PP Tk supports two different kinds of windows: internal windows and top-level windows. An internal window is an interior window of a Tk application, such as a scrollbar or menu bar or button. A top-level window is one that is created as a child of a screen's root window, rather than as an interior window, but which is logically part of some existing main window. Examples of top-level windows are pop-up menus and dialog boxes. .PP New windows may be created by calling \fBTk_CreateWindow\fR. If the \fItopLevScreen\fR argument is NULL, then the new window will be an internal window. If \fItopLevScreen\fR is non-NULL, then the new window will be a top-level window: \fItopLevScreen\fR indicates the name of a screen and the new window will be created as a child of the root window of \fItopLevScreen\fR. In either case Tk will consider the new window to be the logical child of \fIparent\fR: the new window's path name will reflect this fact, options may be specified for the new window under this assumption, and so on. The only difference is that new X window for a top-level window will not be a child of \fIparent\fR's X window. For example, a pull-down menu's \fIparent\fR would be the button-like window used to invoke it, which would in turn be a child of the menu bar window. A dialog box might have the application's main window as its parent. .PP \fBTk_CreateAnonymousWindow\fR differs from \fBTk_CreateWindow\fR in that it creates an unnamed window. This window will be manipulable only using C interfaces, and will not be visible to Tcl scripts. Both interior windows and top-level windows may be created with \fBTk_CreateAnonymousWindow\fR. .PP \fBTk_CreateWindowFromPath\fR offers an alternate way of specifying new windows. In \fBTk_CreateWindowFromPath\fR the new window is specified with a token for any window in the target application (\fItkwin\fR), plus a path name for the new window. It produces the same effect as \fBTk_CreateWindow\fR and allows both top-level and internal windows to be created, depending on the value of \fItopLevScreen\fR. In calls to \fBTk_CreateWindowFromPath\fR, as in calls to \fBTk_CreateWindow\fR, the parent of the new window must exist at the time of the call, but the new window must not already exist. .PP The window creation procedures do not actually issue the command to X to create a window. Instead, they create a local data structure associated with the window and defer the creation of the X window. The window will actually be created by the first call to \fBTk_MapWindow\fR. Deferred window creation allows various aspects of the window (such as its size, background color, etc.) to be modified after its creation without incurring any overhead in the X server. When the window is finally mapped all of the window attributes can be set while creating the window. .PP The value returned by a window-creation procedure is not the X token for the window (it cannot be, since X has not been asked to create the window yet). Instead, it is a token for Tk's local data structure for the window. Most of the Tk library procedures take Tk_Window tokens, rather than X identifiers. The actual X window identifier can be retrieved from the local data structure using the \fBTk_WindowId\fR macro; see the manual entry for \fBTk_WindowId\fR for details. .PP \fBTk_DestroyWindow\fR deletes a window and all the data structures associated with it, including any event handlers created with \fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR. In addition, \fBTk_DestroyWindow\fR will delete any children of \fItkwin\fR recursively (where children are defined in the Tk sense, consisting of all windows that were created with the given window as \fIparent\fR). If \fItkwin\fR is an internal window, then event handlers interested in destroy events are invoked immediately. If \fItkwin\fR is a top-level or main window, then the event handlers will be invoked later, after X has seen the request and returned an event for it. .PP If a window has been created but has not been mapped, so no X window exists, it is possible to force the creation of the X window by calling \fBTk_MakeWindowExist\fR. This procedure issues the X commands to instantiate the window given by \fItkwin\fR. .SH KEYWORDS create, deferred creation, destroy, display, internal window, screen, top-level window, window 0707010003fcf9000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700001bed000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002800000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MainWindow.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: MainWin.3,v 1.3 2000/04/25 01:42:18 ericm Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_MainWindow 3 7.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_MainWindow, Tk_GetNumMainWindows \- functions for querying main window information .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_MainWindow\fR(\fIinterp\fR) .sp int \fBTk_GetNumMainWindows\fR() .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tcl_Interp *pathName .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in/out Interpreter associated with the application. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A main window is a special kind of toplevel window used as the outermost window in an application. .PP If \fIinterp\fR is associated with a Tk application then \fBTk_MainWindow\fR returns the application's main window. If there is no Tk application associated with \fIinterp\fR then \fBTk_MainWindow\fR returns NULL and leaves an error message in \fIinterp->result\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetNumMainWindows\fR returns a count of the number of main windows currently open in the process. .SH KEYWORDS application, main window 0707010003fce3000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b70000193c000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002a00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetHINSTANCE.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation. '\" All rights reserved. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetHINSTANCE.3,v 1.2 2002/11/15 15:35:55 dkf Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_GetHISTANCE 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetHINSTANCE \- retrieve the global application instance handle .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp HINSTANCE \fBTk_GetHINSTANCE\fR() .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_GetHINSTANCE\fR returns the Windows application instance handle for the Tk application. This function is only available on Windows platforms. .SH KEYWORDS identifier, instance 0707010003fcda000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b7000028a6000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002600000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeFont.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetFont.3,v 1.11 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_AllocFontFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_AllocFontFromObj, Tk_GetFont, Tk_GetFontFromObj, Tk_NameOfFont, Tk_FreeFontFromObj, Tk_FreeFont \- maintain database of fonts .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Tk_Font \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp Tk_Font \fBTk_GetFont(\fIinterp, tkwin, string\fB)\fR .sp Tk_Font \fBTk_GetFontFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfFont(\fItkfont\fB)\fR .sp Tk_Font \fBTk_FreeFontFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp void \fBTk_FreeFont(\fItkfont\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "const char" *tkfont .AP "Tcl_Interp" *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. If \fBNULL\fR, then no error messages are left after errors. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window in which font will be used. .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out Gives name or description of font. See documentation for the \fBfont\fR command for details on acceptable formats. Internal rep will be modified to cache corresponding Tk_Font. .AP "const char" *string in Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except description of font is passed as a string and resulting Tk_Font is not cached. .AP Tk_Font tkfont in Opaque font token. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR finds the font indicated by \fIobjPtr\fR and returns a token that represents the font. The return value can be used in subsequent calls to procedures such as \fBTk_GetFontMetrics\fR, \fBTk_MeasureChars\fR, and \fBTk_FreeFont\fR. The Tk_Font token will remain valid until \fBTk_FreeFontFromObj\fR or \fBTk_FreeFont\fR is called to release it. \fIObjPtr\fR can contain either a symbolic name or a font description; see the documentation for the \fBfont\fR command for a description of the valid formats. If \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR is unsuccessful (because, for example, \fIobjPtr\fR did not contain a valid font specification) then it returns \fBNULL\fR and leaves an error message in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not \fBNULL\fR. \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR caches information about the return value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to procedures such as \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetFontFromObj\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetFont\fR is identical to \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR except that the description of the font is specified with a string instead of an object. This prevents \fBTk_GetFont\fR from caching the matching Tk_Font, so \fBTk_GetFont\fR is less efficient than \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetFontFromObj\fR returns the token for an existing font, given the window and description used to create the font. \fBTk_GetFontFromObj\fR does not actually create the font; the font must already have been created with a previous call to \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR or \fBTk_GetFont\fR. The return value is cached in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to \fBTk_GetFontFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR and \fItkwin\fR. .PP \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetFont\fR maintain a database of all fonts they have allocated. If the same font is requested multiple times (e.g. by different windows or for different purposes), then a single Tk_Font will be shared for all uses. The underlying resources will be freed automatically when no-one is using the font anymore. .PP The procedure \fBTk_NameOfFont\fR is roughly the inverse of \fBTk_GetFont\fR. Given a \fItkfont\fR that was created by \fBTk_GetFont\fR (or \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR), the return value is the \fIstring\fR argument that was passed to \fBTk_GetFont\fR to create the font. The string returned by \fBTk_NameOfFont\fR is only guaranteed to persist until the \fItkfont\fR is deleted. The caller must not modify this string. .PP When a font is no longer needed, \fBTk_FreeFontFromObj\fR or \fBTk_FreeFont\fR should be called to release it. For \fBTk_FreeFontFromObj\fR the font to release is specified with the same information used to create it; for \fBTk_FreeFont\fR the font to release is specified with its Tk_Font token. There should be exactly one call to \fBTk_FreeFontFromObj\fR or \fBTk_FreeFont\fR for each call to \fBTk_AllocFontFromObj\fR or \fBTk_GetFont\fR. .SH "SEE ALSO" Tk_FontId(3) .SH KEYWORDS font 0707010003fcc1000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b600001d74000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002700000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_AddOption.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation. '\" All rights reserved. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: AddOption.3,v 1.6 2007/12/13 15:23:42 dgp Exp $ '\" '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_AddOption 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_AddOption \- Add an option to the option database .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp void \fBTk_AddOption\fR(\fItkwin, name, value, priority\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .AP "const char" *name in Multi-element name of option. .AP "const char" *value in Value of option. .AP int priority in Overall priority level to use for option. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This procedure is invoked to add an option to the database associated with \fItkwin\fR's main window. \fIName\fR contains the option being specified and consists of names and/or classes separated by asterisks or dots, in the usual X format. \fIValue\fR contains the text string to associate with \fIname\fR; this value will be returned in calls to \fBTk_GetOption\fR. \fIPriority\fR specifies the priority of the value; when options are queried using \fBTk_GetOption\fR, the value with the highest priority is returned. \fIPriority\fR must be between 0 and \fBTK_MAX_PRIO\fR. Some common priority values are: .IP 20 Used for default values hard-coded into widgets. .IP 40 Used for options specified in application-specific startup files. .IP 60 Used for options specified in user-specific defaults files, such as \fB.Xdefaults\fR, resource databases loaded into the X server, or user-specific startup files. .IP 80 Used for options specified interactively after the application starts running. .SH KEYWORDS class, name, option, add 0707010003fceb000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b70000220c000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002e00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetScrollInfoObj.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetScroll.3,v 1.6 2007/01/05 00:00:49 nijtmans Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_GetScrollInfo 3 8.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetScrollInfo, Tk_GetScrollInfoObj \- parse arguments for scrolling commands .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp int \fBTk_GetScrollInfo(\fIinterp, argc, argv, dblPtr, intPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetScrollInfoObj(\fIinterp, objc, objv, dblPtr, intPtr\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tcl_Interp" *dblPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP int argc in Number of strings in \fIargv\fR array. .AP "const char" *argv[] in Argument strings. These represent the entire widget command, of which the first word is typically the widget name and the second word is typically \fBxview\fR or \fByview\fR. .AP int objc in Number of Tcl_Obj's in \fIobjv\fR array. .AP "Tcl_Obj *const" objv[] in Argument objects. These represent the entire widget command, of which the first word is typically the widget name and the second word is typically \fBxview\fR or \fByview\fR. .AP double *dblPtr out Filled in with fraction from \fBmoveto\fR option, if any. .AP int *intPtr out Filled in with line or page count from \fBscroll\fR option, if any. The value may be negative. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_GetScrollInfo\fR parses the arguments expected by widget scrolling commands such as \fBxview\fR and \fByview\fR. It receives the entire list of words that make up a widget command and parses the words starting with \fIargv\fR[2]. The words starting with \fIargv\fR[2] must have one of the following forms: .CS \fBmoveto \fIfraction\fR \fBscroll \fInumber\fB units\fR \fBscroll \fInumber\fB pages\fR .CE .LP Any of the \fBmoveto\fR, \fBscroll\fR, \fBunits\fR, and \fBpages\fR keywords may be abbreviated. If \fIargv\fR has the \fBmoveto\fR form, \fBTK_SCROLL_MOVETO\fR is returned as result and \fI*dblPtr\fR is filled in with the \fIfraction\fR argument to the command, which must be a proper real value. If \fIargv\fR has the \fBscroll\fR form, \fBTK_SCROLL_UNITS\fR or \fBTK_SCROLL_PAGES\fR is returned and \fI*intPtr\fR is filled in with the \fInumber\fR value, which must be a proper integer. If an error occurs in parsing the arguments, \fBTK_SCROLL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp->result\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetScrollInfoObj\fR is identical in function to \fBTk_GetScrollInfo\fR. However, \fBTk_GetScrollInfoObj\fR accepts Tcl_Obj style arguments, making it more appropriate for use with new development. .SH KEYWORDS parse, scrollbar, scrolling command, xview, yview 0707010003fcca000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b60000213b000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000003800000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: CrtCmHdlr.3,v 1.4 2007/12/13 15:23:42 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler 3 "8.4" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_CreateClientMessageHandler, Tk_DeleteClientMessageHandler \- associate procedure callback with ClientMessage type X events .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_CreateClientMessageHandler\fR(\fIproc\fR) .sp \fBTk_DeleteClientMessageHandler\fR(\fIproc\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AP Tk_ClientMessageProc *proc in Procedure to invoke whenever a ClientMessage X event occurs on any display. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_CreateClientMessageHandler\fR arranges for \fIproc\fR to be invoked in the future whenever a ClientMessage X event occurs that is not handled by \fBWM_PROTOCOL\fR. \fBTk_CreateClientMessageHandler\fR is intended for use by applications which need to watch X ClientMessage events, such as drag and drop applications. .PP The callback to \fIproc\fR will be made by \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR; this mechanism only works in programs that dispatch events through \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR (or through other Tk procedures that call \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR, such as \fBTk_DoOneEvent\fR or \fBTk_MainLoop\fR). .PP \fIProc\fR should have arguments and result that match the type \fBTk_ClientMessageProc\fR: .CS typedef int Tk_ClientMessageProc( Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR, XEvent *\fIeventPtr\fR); .CE The \fItkwin\fR parameter to \fIproc\fR is the Tk window which is associated with this event. \fIEventPtr\fR is a pointer to the X event. .PP Whenever an X ClientMessage event is processed by \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR, the \fIproc\fR is called if it was not handled as a \fBWM_PROTOCOL\fR. The return value from \fIproc\fR is normally 0. A non-zero return value indicates that the event is not to be handled further; that is, \fIproc\fR has done all processing that is to be allowed for the event. .PP If there are multiple ClientMessage event handlers, each one is called for each event, in the order in which they were established. .PP \fBTk_DeleteClientMessageHandler\fR may be called to delete a previously-created ClientMessage event handler: it deletes each handler it finds that matches the \fIproc\fR argument. If no such handler exists, then \fBTk_DeleteClientMessageHandler\fR returns without doing anything. Although Tk supports it, it's probably a bad idea to have more than one callback with the same \fIproc\fR argument. .SH KEYWORDS bind, callback, event, handler 0707010003fce5000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700002ac3000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002600000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImage.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetImage.3,v 1.9 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_GetImage 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetImage, Tk_RedrawImage, Tk_SizeOfImage, Tk_FreeImage \- use an image in a widget .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Tk_Image \fBTk_GetImage\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, name, changeProc, clientData\fR) .sp \fBTk_RedrawImage\fR(\fIimage, imageX, imageY, width, height, drawable, drawableX, drawableY\fR) .sp \fBTk_SizeOfImage\fR(\fIimage, widthPtr, heightPtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_FreeImage\fR(\fIimage\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Place to leave error message. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window in which image will be used. .AP "const char" *name in Name of image. .AP Tk_ImageChangedProc *changeProc in Procedure for Tk to invoke whenever image content or size changes. .AP ClientData clientData in One-word value for Tk to pass to \fIchangeProc\fR. .AP Tk_Image image in Token for image instance; must have been returned by a previous call to \fBTk_GetImage\fR. .AP int imageX in X-coordinate of upper-left corner of region of image to redisplay (measured in pixels from the image's upper-left corner). .AP int imageY in Y-coordinate of upper-left corner of region of image to redisplay (measured in pixels from the image's upper-left corner). .AP "int" width (in) Width of region of image to redisplay. .AP "int" height (in) Height of region of image to redisplay. .AP Drawable drawable in Where to display image. Must either be window specified to \fBTk_GetImage\fR or a pixmap compatible with that window. .AP int drawableX in Where to display image in \fIdrawable\fR: this is the x-coordinate in \fIdrawable\fR where x-coordinate \fIimageX\fR of the image should be displayed. .AP int drawableY in Where to display image in \fIdrawable\fR: this is the y-coordinate in \fIdrawable\fR where y-coordinate \fIimageY\fR of the image should be displayed. .AP "int" widthPtr out Store width of \fIimage\fR (in pixels) here. .AP "int" heightPtr out Store height of \fIimage\fR (in pixels) here. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These procedures are invoked by widgets that wish to display images. \fBTk_GetImage\fR is invoked by a widget when it first decides to display an image. \fIname\fR gives the name of the desired image and \fItkwin\fR identifies the window where the image will be displayed. \fBTk_GetImage\fR looks up the image in the table of existing images and returns a token for a new instance of the image. If the image does not exist then \fBTk_GetImage\fR returns NULL and leaves an error message in \fIinterp->result\fR. .PP When a widget wishes to actually display an image it must call \fBTk_RedrawImage\fR, identifying the image (\fIimage\fR), a region within the image to redisplay (\fIimageX\fR, \fIimageY\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR), and a place to display the image (\fIdrawable\fR, \fIdrawableX\fR, and \fIdrawableY\fR). Tk will then invoke the appropriate image manager, which will display the requested portion of the image before returning. .PP A widget can find out the dimensions of an image by calling \fBTk_SizeOfImage\fR: the width and height will be stored in the locations given by \fIwidthPtr\fR and \fIheightPtr\fR, respectively. .PP When a widget is finished with an image (e.g., the widget is being deleted or it is going to use a different image instead of the current one), it must call \fBTk_FreeImage\fR to release the image instance. The widget should never again use the image token after passing it to \fBTk_FreeImage\fR. There must be exactly one call to \fBTk_FreeImage\fR for each call to \fBTk_GetImage\fR. .PP If the contents or size of an image changes, then any widgets using the image will need to find out about the changes so that they can redisplay themselves. The \fIchangeProc\fR and \fIclientData\fR arguments to \fBTk_GetImage\fR are used for this purpose. \fIchangeProc\fR will be called by Tk whenever a change occurs in the image; it must match the following prototype: .CS typedef void Tk_ImageChangedProc( ClientData \fIclientData\fR, int \fIx\fR, int \fIy\fR, int \fIwidth\fR, int \fIheight\fR, int \fIimageWidth\fR, int \fIimageHeight\fR); .CE The \fIclientData\fR argument to \fIchangeProc\fR is the same as the \fIclientData\fR argument to \fBTk_GetImage\fR. It is usually a pointer to the widget record for the widget or some other data structure managed by the widget. The arguments \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR identify a region within the image that must be redisplayed; they are specified in pixels measured from the upper-left corner of the image. The arguments \fIimageWidth\fR and \fIimageHeight\fR give the image's (new) size. .SH "SEE ALSO" Tk_CreateImageType .SH KEYWORDS images, redisplay 0707010003fcfd000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700001f81000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000003000000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MoveToplevelWindow.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: MoveToplev.3,v 1.4 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_MoveToplevelWindow 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_MoveToplevelWindow \- Adjust the position of a top-level window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_MoveToplevelWindow(\fItkwin, x, y\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window tkwin .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for top-level window to move. .AP int x in New x-coordinate for the top-left pixel of \fItkwin\fR's border, or the top-left pixel of the decorative border supplied for \fItkwin\fR by the window manager, if there is one. .AP int y in New y-coordinate for the top-left pixel of \fItkwin\fR's border, or the top-left pixel of the decorative border supplied for \fItkwin\fR by the window manager, if there is one. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP In general, a window should never set its own position; this should be done only by the geometry manger that is responsible for the window. For top-level windows the window manager is effectively the geometry manager; Tk provides interface code between the application and the window manager to convey the application's desires to the geometry manager. The desired size for a top-level window is conveyed using the usual \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR mechanism. The procedure \fBTk_MoveToplevelWindow\fR may be used by an application to request a particular position for a top-level window; this procedure is similar in function to the \fBwm geometry\fR Tcl command except that negative offsets cannot be specified. It is invoked by widgets such as menus that want to appear at a particular place on the screen. .PP When \fBTk_MoveToplevelWindow\fR is called it does not immediately pass on the new desired location to the window manager; it defers this action until all other outstanding work has been completed, using the \fBTk_DoWhenIdle\fR mechanism. .SH KEYWORDS position, top-level window, window manager 0707010003fcd1000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b6000022d3000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000003000000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteEventHandler.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: EventHndlr.3,v 1.5 2004/09/19 16:05:36 dkf Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_CreateEventHandler 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_CreateEventHandler, Tk_DeleteEventHandler \- associate procedure callback with an X event .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR(\fItkwin, mask, proc, clientData\fR) .sp \fBTk_DeleteEventHandler\fR(\fItkwin, mask, proc, clientData\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "unsigned long" clientData .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window in which events may occur. .AP "unsigned long" mask in Bit-mask of events (such as \fBButtonPressMask\fR) for which \fIproc\fR should be called. .AP Tk_EventProc *proc in Procedure to invoke whenever an event in \fImask\fR occurs in the window given by \fItkwin\fR. .AP ClientData clientData in Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIproc\fR. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR arranges for \fIproc\fR to be invoked in the future whenever one of the event types specified by \fImask\fR occurs in the window specified by \fItkwin\fR. The callback to \fIproc\fR will be made by \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR; this mechanism only works in programs that dispatch events through \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR (or through other Tk procedures that call \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR, such as \fBTk_DoOneEvent\fR or \fBTk_MainLoop\fR). .PP \fIProc\fR should have arguments and result that match the type \fBTk_EventProc\fR: .CS typedef void Tk_EventProc( ClientData \fIclientData\fR, XEvent *\fIeventPtr\fR); .CE The \fIclientData\fR parameter to \fIproc\fR is a copy of the \fIclientData\fR argument given to \fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR when the callback was created. Typically, \fIclientData\fR points to a data structure containing application-specific information about the window in which the event occurred. \fIEventPtr\fR is a pointer to the X event, which will be one of the ones specified in the \fImask\fR argument to \fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR. .PP \fBTk_DeleteEventHandler\fR may be called to delete a previously-created event handler: it deletes the first handler it finds that is associated with \fItkwin\fR and matches the \fImask\fR, \fIproc\fR, and \fIclientData\fR arguments. If no such handler exists, then \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR returns without doing anything. Although Tk supports it, it's probably a bad idea to have more than one callback with the same \fImask\fR, \fIproc\fR, and \fIclientData\fR arguments. When a window is deleted all of its handlers will be deleted automatically; in this case there is no need to call \fBTk_DeleteEventHandler\fR. .PP If multiple handlers are declared for the same type of X event on the same window, then the handlers will be invoked in the order they were created. .SH KEYWORDS bind, callback, event, handler 0707010003fd0b000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b800002125000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002600000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SafeInit.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: Tk_Init.3,v 1.6 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_Init 3 8.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_Init, Tk_SafeInit \- add Tk to an interpreter and make a new Tk application. .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp int \fBTk_Init\fR(\fIinterp\fR) .sp int \fBTk_SafeInit\fR(\fIinterp\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter in which to load Tk. Tk should not already be loaded in this interpreter. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_Init\fR is the package initialization procedure for Tk. It is normally invoked by the \fBTcl_AppInit\fR procedure for an application or by the \fBload\fR command. \fBTk_Init\fR adds all of Tk's commands to \fIinterp\fR and creates a new Tk application, including its main window. If the initialization is successful \fBTk_Init\fR returns \fBTCL_OK\fR; if there is an error it returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR. \fBTk_Init\fR also leaves a result or error message in \fIinterp->result\fR. .PP If there is a variable \fBargv\fR in \fIinterp\fR, \fBTk_Init\fR treats the contents of this variable as a list of options for the new Tk application. The options may have any of the forms documented for the \fBwish\fR application (in fact, \fBwish\fR uses Tk_Init to process its command-line arguments). .PP \fBTk_SafeInit\fR is identical to \fBTk_Init\fR except that it removes all Tk commands that are considered unsafe. Those commands and the reasons for their exclusion are: .TP \fBbell\fR Continuous ringing of the bell is a nuisance. .TP \fBclipboard\fR A malicious script could replace the contents of the clipboard with the string .QW "\fBrm \-r *\fR" and lead to surprises when the contents of the clipboard are pasted. .TP \fBgrab\fR Grab can be used to block the user from using any other applications. .TP \fBmenu\fR Menus can be used to cover the entire screen and to steal input from the user. .TP \fBselection\fR See clipboard. .TP \fBsend\fR Send can be used to cause unsafe interpreters to execute commands. .TP \fBtk\fR The tk command recreates the send command, which is unsafe. .TP \fBtkwait\fR Tkwait can block the containing process forever .TP \fBtoplevel\fR Toplevels can be used to cover the entire screen and to steal input from the user. .TP \fBwm\fR If toplevels are ever allowed, wm can be used to remove decorations, move windows around, etc. .SH KEYWORDS safe, application, initialization, load, main window 0707010003fcf3000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b70000208f000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002a00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ImageChanged.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: ImgChanged.3,v 1.2 1998/09/14 18:22:52 stanton Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_ImageChanged 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_ImageChanged \- notify widgets that image needs to be redrawn .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR(\fIimageMaster, x, y, width, height, imageWidth, imageHeight\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ImageMaster imageHeight .AP Tk_ImageMaster imageMaster in Token for image, which was passed to image's \fIcreateProc\fR when the image was created. .AP int x in X-coordinate of upper-left corner of region that needs redisplay (measured from upper-left corner of image). .AP int y in Y-coordinate of upper-left corner of region that needs redisplay (measured from upper-left corner of image). .AP "int" width in Width of region that needs to be redrawn, in pixels. .AP "int" height in Height of region that needs to be redrawn, in pixels. .AP "int" imageWidth in Current width of image, in pixels. .AP "int" imageHeight in Current height of image, in pixels. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP An image manager calls \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR for an image whenever anything happens that requires the image to be redrawn. As a result of calling \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR, any widgets using the image are notified so that they can redisplay themselves appropriately. The \fIimageMaster\fR argument identifies the image, and \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR specify a rectangular region within the image that needs to be redrawn. \fIimageWidth\fR and \fIimageHeight\fR specify the image's (new) size. .PP An image manager should call \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR during its \fIcreateProc\fR to specify the image's initial size and to force redisplay if there are existing instances for the image. If any of the pixel values in the image should change later on, \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR should be called again with \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR values that cover all the pixels that changed. If the size of the image should change, then \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR must be called to indicate the new size, even if no pixels need to be redisplayed. .SH "SEE ALSO" Tk_CreateImageType .SH KEYWORDS images, redisplay, image size changes 0707010003fd05000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b600004100000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002a00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PhotoSetSize.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Australian National University '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" Author: Paul Mackerras (paulus@cs.anu.edu.au), '\" Department of Computer Science, '\" Australian National University. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: FindPhoto.3,v 1.10 2007/01/05 00:00:48 nijtmans Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_FindPhoto 3 8.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_FindPhoto, Tk_PhotoPutBlock, Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock, Tk_PhotoGetImage, Tk_PhotoBlank, Tk_PhotoExpand, Tk_PhotoGetSize, Tk_PhotoSetSize \- manipulate the image data stored in a photo image. .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Tk_PhotoHandle \fBTk_FindPhoto\fR(\fIinterp, imageName\fR) .sp .VS 8.5 int \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR(\fIinterp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,\ compRule\fR) .sp int \fBTk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock\fR(\fIinterp, handle, blockPtr, x, y, width, height,\ zoomX, zoomY, subsampleX, subsampleY, compRule\fR) .VE 8.5 .sp int \fBTk_PhotoGetImage\fR(\fIhandle, blockPtr\fR) .sp void \fBTk_PhotoBlank\fR(\fIhandle\fR) .sp .VS 8.5 int \fBTk_PhotoExpand\fR(\fIinterp, handle, width, height\fR) .VE 8.5 .sp void \fBTk_PhotoGetSize\fR(\fIhandle, widthPtr, heightPtr\fR) .sp .VS 8.5 int \fBTk_PhotoSetSize\fR(\fIinterp. handle, width, height\fR) .VE 8.5 .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_PhotoImageBlock window_path .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter in which image was created and in which error reporting is to be done. .AP "const char" *imageName in Name of the photo image. .AP Tk_PhotoHandle handle in Opaque handle identifying the photo image to be affected. .AP Tk_PhotoImageBlock *blockPtr in Specifies the address and storage layout of image data. .AP int x in Specifies the X coordinate where the top-left corner of the block is to be placed within the image. .AP int y in Specifies the Y coordinate where the top-left corner of the block is to be placed within the image. .AP int width in Specifies the width of the image area to be affected (for \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR) or the desired image width (for \fBTk_PhotoExpand\fR and \fBTk_PhotoSetSize\fR). .AP int compRule in Specifies the compositing rule used when combining transparent pixels in a block of data with a photo image. Must be one of \fBTK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY\fR (which puts the block of data over the top of the existing photo image, with the previous contents showing through in the transparent bits) or \fBTK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET\fR (which discards the existing photo image contents in the rectangle covered by the data block.) .AP int height in Specifies the height of the image area to be affected (for \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR) or the desired image height (for \fBTk_PhotoExpand\fR and \fBTk_PhotoSetSize\fR). .AP int *widthPtr out Pointer to location in which to store the image width. .AP int *heightPtr out Pointer to location in which to store the image height. .AP int subsampleX in Specifies the subsampling factor in the X direction for input image data. .AP int subsampleY in Specifies the subsampling factor in the Y direction for input image data. .AP int zoomX in Specifies the zoom factor to be applied in the X direction to pixels being written to the photo image. .AP int zoomY in Specifies the zoom factor to be applied in the Y direction to pixels being written to the photo image. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_FindPhoto\fR returns an opaque handle that is used to identify a particular photo image to the other procedures. The parameter is the name of the image, that is, the name specified to the \fBimage create photo\fR command, or assigned by that command if no name was specified. .PP \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR is used to supply blocks of image data to be displayed. The call affects an area of the image of size \fIwidth\fR x \fIheight\fR pixels, with its top-left corner at coordinates (\fIx\fR,\fIy\fR). All of \fIwidth\fR, \fIheight\fR, \fIx\fR, and \fIy\fR must be non-negative. If part of this area lies outside the current bounds of the image, the image will be expanded to include the area, unless the user has specified an explicit image size with the \fB\-width\fR and/or \fB\-height\fR widget configuration options (see photo(n)); in that case the area is silently clipped to the image boundaries. .PP The \fIblock\fR parameter is a pointer to a \fBTk_PhotoImageBlock\fR structure, defined as follows: .CS typedef struct { unsigned char *\fIpixelPtr\fR; int \fIwidth\fR; int \fIheight\fR; int \fIpitch\fR; int \fIpixelSize\fR; int \fIoffset[4]\fR; } Tk_PhotoImageBlock; .CE The \fIpixelPtr\fR field points to the first pixel, that is, the top-left pixel in the block. The \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR fields specify the dimensions of the block of pixels. The \fIpixelSize\fR field specifies the address difference between two horizontally adjacent pixels. Often it is 3 or 4, but it can have any value. The \fIpitch\fR field specifies the address difference between two vertically adjacent pixels. The \fIoffset\fR array contains the offsets from the address of a pixel to the addresses of the bytes containing the red, green, blue and alpha (transparency) components. These are normally 0, 1, 2 and 3, but can have other values, e.g., for images that are stored as separate red, green and blue planes. .PP The \fIcompRule\fR parameter to \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR specifies a compositing rule that says what to do with transparent pixels. The value \fBTK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY\fR says that the previous contents of the photo image should show through, and the value \fBTK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_SET\fR says that the previous contents of the photo image should be completely ignored, and the values from the block be copied directly across. The behavior in Tk8.3 and earlier was equivalent to having \fBTK_PHOTO_COMPOSITE_OVERLAY\fR as a compositing rule. .PP The value given for the \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR parameters to \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR do not have to correspond to the values specified in \fIblock\fR. If they are smaller, \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR extracts a sub-block from the image data supplied. If they are larger, the data given are replicated (in a tiled fashion) to fill the specified area. These rules operate independently in the horizontal and vertical directions. .PP .VS 8.5 \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR, though if it cannot allocate sufficient memory to hold the resulting image, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned instead and, if the \fIinterp\fR argument is non-NULL, an error message is placed in the interpreter's result. .VE 8.5 .PP \fBTk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock\fR works like \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR except that the image can be reduced or enlarged for display. The \fIsubsampleX\fR and \fIsubsampleY\fR parameters allow the size of the image to be reduced by subsampling. \fBTk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock\fR will use only pixels from the input image whose X coordinates are multiples of \fIsubsampleX\fR, and whose Y coordinates are multiples of \fIsubsampleY\fR. For example, an image of 512x512 pixels can be reduced to 256x256 by setting \fIsubsampleX\fR and \fIsubsampleY\fR to 2. .PP The \fIzoomX\fR and \fIzoomY\fR parameters allow the image to be enlarged by pixel replication. Each pixel of the (possibly subsampled) input image will be written to a block \fIzoomX\fR pixels wide and \fIzoomY\fR pixels high of the displayed image. Subsampling and zooming can be used together for special effects. .PP \fBTk_PhotoGetImage\fR can be used to retrieve image data from a photo image. \fBTk_PhotoGetImage\fR fills in the structure pointed to by the \fIblockPtr\fR parameter with values that describe the address and layout of the image data that the photo image has stored internally. The values are valid until the image is destroyed or its size is changed. \fBTk_PhotoGetImage\fR returns 1 for compatibility with the corresponding procedure in the old photo widget. .PP \fBTk_PhotoBlank\fR blanks the entire area of the photo image. Blank areas of a photo image are transparent. .PP \fBTk_PhotoExpand\fR requests that the widget's image be expanded to be at least \fIwidth\fR x \fIheight\fR pixels in size. The width and/or height are unchanged if the user has specified an explicit image width or height with the \fB\-width\fR and/or \fB\-height\fR configuration options, respectively. If the image data are being supplied in many small blocks, it is more efficient to use \fBTk_PhotoExpand\fR or \fBTk_PhotoSetSize\fR at the beginning rather than allowing the image to expand in many small increments as image blocks are supplied. .PP .VS 8.5 \fBTk_PhotoExpand\fR normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR, though if it cannot allocate sufficient memory to hold the resulting image, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned instead and, if the \fIinterp\fR argument is non-NULL, an error message is placed in the interpreter's result. .VE 8.5 .PP \fBTk_PhotoSetSize\fR specifies the size of the image, as if the user had specified the given \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR values to the \fB\-width\fR and \fB\-height\fR configuration options. A value of zero for \fIwidth\fR or \fIheight\fR does not change the image's width or height, but allows the width or height to be changed by subsequent calls to \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR, \fBTk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock\fR or \fBTk_PhotoExpand\fR. .PP .VS 8.5 \fBTk_PhotoSetSize\fR normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR, though if it cannot allocate sufficient memory to hold the resulting image, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned instead and, if the \fIinterp\fR argument is non-NULL, an error message is placed in the interpreter's result. .VE 8.5 .PP \fBTk_PhotoGetSize\fR returns the dimensions of the image in *\fIwidthPtr\fR and *\fIheightPtr\fR. .SH PORTABILITY .PP In Tk 8.3 and earlier, \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR and \fBTk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock\fR had different signatures. If you want to compile code that uses the old interface against 8.4 without updating your code, compile it with the flag -DUSE_COMPOSITELESS_PHOTO_PUT_BLOCK. Code linked using Stubs against older versions of Tk will continue to work. .PP .VS 8.5 In Tk 8.4, \fBTk_PhotoPutBlock\fR, \fBTk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock\fR, \fBTk_PhotoExpand\fR and \fBTk_PhotoSetSize\fR did not take an \fIinterp\fR argument or return any result code. If insufficient memory was available for an image, Tk would panic. This behaviour is still supported if you compile your extension with the additional flag -DUSE_PANIC_ON_PHOTO_ALLOC_FAILURE. Code linked using Stubs against older versions of Tk will continue to work. .VE 8.5 .SH CREDITS .PP The code for the photo image type was developed by Paul Mackerras, based on his earlier photo widget code. .SH KEYWORDS photo, image 0707010003fce1000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b7000020f9000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002500000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetDash.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1989-1993 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetDash.3,v 1.7 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_GetDash 3 8.3 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetDash \- convert from string to valid dash structure. .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp int \fBTk_GetDash\fR(\fIinterp, string, dashPtr\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Dash *dashPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP "const char *" string in Textual value to be converted. .AP Tk_Dash *dashPtr out Points to place to store the dash pattern value converted from \fIstring\fR. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These procedure parses the string and fills in the result in the Tk_Dash structure. The string can be a list of integers or a character string containing only .QW \fB.,\-_\fR or spaces. If all goes well, \fBTCL_OK\fR is returned. If \fIstring\fR does not have the proper syntax then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned, an error message is left in the interpreter's result, and nothing is stored at *\fIdashPtr\fR. .PP The first possible syntax is a list of integers. Each element represents the number of pixels of a line segment. Only the odd segments are drawn using the .QW outline color. The other segments are drawn transparent. .PP The second possible syntax is a character list containing only 5 possible characters .QW "\fB.,\-_ \fR" . The space can be used to enlarge the space between other line elements, and can not occur as the first position in the string. Some examples: .CS \-dash . = \-dash {2 4} \-dash \- = \-dash {6 4} \-dash \-. = \-dash {6 4 2 4} \-dash \-.. = \-dash {6 4 2 4 2 4} \-dash {. } = \-dash {2 8} \-dash , = \-dash {4 4} .CE .PP The main difference of this syntax with the previous is that it is shape-conserving. This means that all values in the dash list will be multiplied by the line width before display. This assures that .QW . will always be displayed as a dot and .QW \- always as a dash regardless of the line width. .PP On systems where only a limited set of dash patterns, the dash pattern will be displayed as the most close dash pattern that is available. For example, on Windows only the first 4 of the above examples are available. The last 2 examples will be displayed identically as the first one. .SH KEYWORDS dash, conversion 0707010003fcfa000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b70000272f000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002e00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MaintainGeometry.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: MaintGeom.3,v 1.5 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_MaintainGeometry 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_MaintainGeometry, Tk_UnmaintainGeometry \- maintain geometry of one window relative to another .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_MaintainGeometry\fR(\fIslave, master, x, y, width, height\fR) .sp \fBTk_UnmaintainGeometry\fR(\fIslave, master\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window master .AP Tk_Window slave in Window whose geometry is to be controlled. .AP Tk_Window master in Window relative to which \fIslave\fR's geometry will be controlled. .AP int x in Desired x-coordinate of \fIslave\fR in \fImaster\fR, measured in pixels from the inside of \fImaster\fR's left border to the outside of \fIslave\fR's left border. .AP int y in Desired y-coordinate of \fIslave\fR in \fImaster\fR, measured in pixels from the inside of \fImaster\fR's top border to the outside of \fIslave\fR's top border. .AP int width in Desired width for \fIslave\fR, in pixels. .AP int height in Desired height for \fIslave\fR, in pixels. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_MaintainGeometry\fR and \fBTk_UnmaintainGeometry\fR make it easier for geometry managers to deal with slaves whose masters are not their parents. Three problems arise if the master for a slave is not its parent: .IP [1] The x- and y-position of the slave must be translated from the coordinate system of the master to that of the parent before positioning the slave. .IP [2] If the master window, or any of its ancestors up to the slave's parent, is moved, then the slave must be repositioned within its parent in order to maintain the correct position relative to the master. .IP [3] If the master or one of its ancestors is mapped or unmapped, then the slave must be mapped or unmapped to correspond. .LP None of these problems is an issue if the parent and master are the same. For example, if the master or one of its ancestors is unmapped, the slave is automatically removed by the screen by X. .PP \fBTk_MaintainGeometry\fR deals with these problems for slaves whose masters are not their parents, as well as handling the simpler case of slaves whose masters are their parents. \fBTk_MaintainGeometry\fR is typically called by a window manager once it has decided where a slave should be positioned relative to its master. \fBTk_MaintainGeometry\fR translates the coordinates to the coordinate system of \fIslave\fR's parent and then moves and resizes the slave appropriately. Furthermore, it remembers the desired position and creates event handlers to monitor the master and all of its ancestors up to (but not including) the slave's parent. If any of these windows is moved, mapped, or unmapped, the slave will be adjusted so that it is mapped only when the master is mapped and its geometry relative to the master remains as specified by \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR. .PP When a window manager relinquishes control over a window, or if it decides that it does not want the window to appear on the screen under any conditions, it calls \fBTk_UnmaintainGeometry\fR. \fBTk_UnmaintainGeometry\fR unmaps the window and cancels any previous calls to \fBTk_MaintainGeometry\fR for the \fImaster\fR\-\fIslave\fR pair, so that the slave's geometry and mapped state are no longer maintained automatically. \fBTk_UnmaintainGeometry\fR need not be called by a geometry manager if the slave, the master, or any of the master's ancestors is destroyed: Tk will call it automatically. .PP If \fBTk_MaintainGeometry\fR is called repeatedly for the same \fImaster\fR\-\fIslave\fR pair, the information from the most recent call supersedes any older information. If \fBTk_UnmaintainGeometry\fR is called for a \fImaster\fR\-\fIslave\fR pair that is is not currently managed, the call has no effect. .SH KEYWORDS geometry manager, map, master, parent, position, slave, unmap 0707010003fd0c000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700002042000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002800000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetAppName.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: SetAppName.3,v 1.8 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_SetAppName 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_SetAppName \- Set the name of an application for 'send' commands .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp const char * \fBTk_SetAppName\fR(\fItkwin, name\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window parent .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window in application. Used only to select a particular application. .AP "const char" *name in Name under which to register the application. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_SetAppName\fR associates a name with a given application and records that association on the display containing with the application's main window. After this procedure has been invoked, other applications on the display will be able to use the \fBsend\fR command to invoke operations in the application. If \fIname\fR is already in use by some other application on the display, then a new name will be generated by appending .QW "\fB #2\fR" to \fIname\fR; if this name is also in use, the number will be incremented until an unused name is found. The return value from the procedure is a pointer to the name actually used. .PP If the application already has a name when \fBTk_SetAppName\fR is called, then the new name replaces the old name. .PP \fBTk_SetAppName\fR also adds a \fBsend\fR command to the application's interpreter, which can be used to send commands from this application to others on any of the displays where the application has windows. .PP The application's name registration persists until the interpreter is deleted or the \fBsend\fR command is deleted from \fIinterp\fR, at which point the name is automatically unregistered and the application becomes inaccessible via \fBsend\fR. The application can be made accessible again by calling \fBTk_SetAppName\fR. .PP \fBTk_SetAppName\fR is called automatically by \fBTk_Init\fR, so applications do not normally need to call it explicitly. .PP The command \fBtk appname\fR provides Tcl-level access to the functionality of \fBTk_SetAppName\fR. .SH KEYWORDS application, name, register, send command 0707010003fd0f000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b7000023ce000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002b00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetClassProcs.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 2000 Ajuba Solutions. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: SetClassProcs.3,v 1.3 2004/09/19 16:05:36 dkf Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_SetClassProcs 3 8.4 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_SetClassProcs \- register widget specific procedures .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_SetClassProcs\fR(\fItkwin, procs, instanceData\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ClassProc instanceData .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window to modify. .AP Tk_ClassProcs *procs in Pointer to data structure containing widget specific procedures. The data structure pointed to by \fIprocs\fR must be static: Tk keeps a reference to it as long as the window exists. .AP ClientData instanceData in Arbitrary one-word value to pass to widget callbacks. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_SetClassProcs\fR is called to register a set of procedures that are used as callbacks in different places. .PP The structure pointed to by \fIprocs\fR contains the following: .CS typedef struct Tk_ClassProcs { unsigned int \fIsize\fR; Tk_ClassWorldChangedProc *\fIworldChangedProc\fR; Tk_ClassCreateProc *\fIcreateProc\fR; Tk_ClassModalProc *\fImodalProc\fR; } Tk_ClassProcs; .CE The \fIsize\fR field is used to simplify future expansion of the structure. It should always be set to (literally) \fBsizeof(Tk_ClassProcs)\fR. .PP \fIworldChangedProc\fR is invoked when the system has altered in some way that requires some reaction from the widget. For example, when a font alias (see the \fBfont\fR manual entry) is reconfigured, widgets configured to use that font alias must update their display accordingly. \fIworldChangedProc\fR should have arguments and results that match the type \fBTk_ClassWorldChangedProc\fR: .CS typedef void Tk_ClassWorldChangedProc( ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR); .CE The \fIinstanceData\fR parameter passed to the \fIworldChangedProc\fR will be identical to the \fIinstanceData\fR parameter passed to \fBTk_SetClassProcs\fR. .PP \fIcreateProc\fR is used to create platform-dependant windows. It is invoked by \fBTk_MakeWindowExist\fR. \fIcreateProc\fR should have arguments and results that match the type \fBTk_ClassCreateProc\fR: .CS typedef Window Tk_ClassCreateProc( Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR, Window \fIparent\fR, ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR); .CE The \fItkwin\fR and \fIinstanceData\fR parameters will be identical to the \fItkwin\fR and \fIinstanceData\fR parameters passed to \fBTk_SetClassProcs\fR. The \fIparent\fR parameter will be the parent of the window to be created. The \fIcreateProc\fR should return the created window. .PP \fImodalProc\fR is invoked after all bindings on a widget have been triggered in order to handle a modal loop. \fImodalProc\fR should have arguments and results that match the type \fBTk_ClassModalProc\fR: .CS typedef void Tk_ClassModalProc( Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR, XEvent *\fIeventPtr\fR); .CE The \fItkwin\fR parameter to \fImodalProc\fR will be identical to the \fItkwin\fR parameter passed to \fBTk_SetClassProcs\fR. The \fIeventPtr\fR parameter will be a pointer to an XEvent structure describing the event being processed. .SH KEYWORDS callback, class 0707010003fcd8000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b600002339000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002a00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColormap.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetClrmap.3,v 1.7 2008/03/19 15:34:41 dkf Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_GetColormap 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetColormap, Tk_PreserveColormap, Tk_FreeColormap \- allocate and free colormaps .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Colormap \fBTk_GetColormap(\fIinterp, tkwin, string\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_PreserveColormap(\fIdisplay, colormap\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_FreeColormap(\fIdisplay, colormap\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Colormap" colormap .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window in which colormap will be used. .AP "const char" *string in Selects a colormap: either \fBnew\fR or the name of a window with the same screen and visual as \fItkwin\fR. .AP Display *display in Display for which \fIcolormap\fR was allocated. .AP Colormap colormap in Colormap to free or preserve; must have been returned by a previous call to \fBTk_GetColormap\fR or \fBTk_GetVisual\fR. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These procedures are used to manage colormaps. \fBTk_GetColormap\fR returns a colormap suitable for use in \fItkwin\fR. If its \fIstring\fR argument is \fBnew\fR then a new colormap is created; otherwise \fIstring\fR must be the name of another window with the same screen and visual as \fItkwin\fR, and the colormap from that window is returned. If \fIstring\fR does not make sense, or if it refers to a window on a different screen from \fItkwin\fR or with a different visual than \fItkwin\fR, then \fBTk_GetColormap\fR returns \fBNone\fR and leaves an error message in \fIinterp\fR's result. .PP \fBTk_PreserveColormap\fR increases the internal reference count for a colormap previously returned by \fBTk_GetColormap\fR, which allows the colormap to be stored in several locations without knowing which order they will be released. .PP \fBTk_FreeColormap\fR should be called when a colormap returned by \fBTk_GetColormap\fR is no longer needed. Tk maintains a reference count for each colormap returned by \fBTk_GetColormap\fR, so there should eventually be one call to \fBTk_FreeColormap\fR for each call to \fBTk_GetColormap\fR and each call to \fBTk_PreserveColormap\fR. When a colormap's reference count becomes zero, Tk releases the X colormap. .PP \fBTk_GetVisual\fR and \fBTk_GetColormap\fR work together, in that a new colormap created by \fBTk_GetVisual\fR may later be returned by \fBTk_GetColormap\fR. The reference counting mechanism for colormaps includes both procedures, so callers of \fBTk_GetVisual\fR must also call \fBTk_FreeColormap\fR to release the colormap. If \fBTk_GetColormap\fR is called with a \fIstring\fR value of \fBnew\fR then the resulting colormap will never be returned by \fBTk_GetVisual\fR; however, it can be used in other windows by calling \fBTk_GetColormap\fR with the original window's name as \fIstring\fR. .SH KEYWORDS colormap, visual 0707010003fcfc000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700001d81000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002700000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MapWindow.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: MapWindow.3,v 1.6 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_MapWindow 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_MapWindow, Tk_UnmapWindow \- map or unmap a window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_MapWindow\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .sp \fBTk_UnmapWindow\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window parent .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These procedures may be used to map and unmap windows managed by Tk. \fBTk_MapWindow\fR maps the window given by \fItkwin\fR, and also creates an X window corresponding to \fItkwin\fR if it does not already exist. See the \fBTk_CreateWindow\fR manual entry for information on deferred window creation. \fBTk_UnmapWindow\fR unmaps \fItkwin\fR's window from the screen. .PP If \fItkwin\fR is a child window (i.e. \fBTk_CreateWindow\fR was used to create a child window), then event handlers interested in map and unmap events are invoked immediately. If \fItkwin\fR is not an internal window, then the event handlers will be invoked later, after X has seen the request and returned an event for it. .PP These procedures should be used in place of the X procedures \fBXMapWindow\fR and \fBXUnmapWindow\fR, since they update Tk's local data structure for \fItkwin\fR. Applications using Tk should not invoke \fBXMapWindow\fR and \fBXUnmapWindow\fR directly. .SH KEYWORDS map, unmap, window 0707010003fcf8000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700001acb000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002600000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_MainLoop.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: MainLoop.3,v 1.2 1998/09/14 18:22:52 stanton Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_MainLoop 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_MainLoop \- loop for events until all windows are deleted .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_MainLoop\fR() .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_MainLoop\fR is a procedure that loops repeatedly calling \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR. It returns only when there are no applications left in this process (i.e. no main windows exist anymore). Most windowing applications will call \fBTk_MainLoop\fR after initialization; the main execution of the application will consist entirely of callbacks invoked via \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR. .SH KEYWORDS application, event, main loop 0707010003fcd5000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700002e5e000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002700000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawChars.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: MeasureChar.3,v 1.10 2008/02/04 09:53:24 dkf Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_MeasureChars 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_MeasureChars, Tk_TextWidth, Tk_DrawChars, Tk_UnderlineChars \- routines to measure and display simple single-line strings. .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp int \fBTk_MeasureChars(\fItkfont, string, numBytes, maxPixels, flags, lengthPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_TextWidth(\fItkfont, string, numBytes\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_DrawChars(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, tkfont, string, numBytes, x, y\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_UnderlineChars(\fIdisplay, drawable, gc, tkfont, string, x, y, firstByte, lastByte\fB)\fR .sp .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "const char" firstChar .AP Tk_Font tkfont in Token for font in which text is to be drawn or measured. Must have been returned by a previous call to \fBTk_GetFont\fR. .AP "const char" *string in Text to be measured or displayed. Need not be null terminated. Any non-printing meta-characters in the string (such as tabs, newlines, and other control characters) will be measured or displayed in a platform-dependent manner. .AP int numBytes in The maximum number of bytes to consider when measuring or drawing \fIstring\fR. Must be greater than or equal to 0. .AP int maxPixels in If \fImaxPixels\fR is >= 0, it specifies the longest permissible line length in pixels. Characters from \fIstring\fR are processed only until this many pixels have been covered. If \fImaxPixels\fR is < 0, then the line length is unbounded and the \fIflags\fR argument is ignored. .AP int flags in Various flag bits OR-ed together: \fBTK_PARTIAL_OK\fR means include a character as long as any part of it fits in the length given by \fImaxPixels\fR; otherwise, a character must fit completely to be considered. \fBTK_WHOLE_WORDS\fR means stop on a word boundary, if possible. If \fBTK_AT_LEAST_ONE\fR is set, it means return at least one character even if no characters could fit in the length given by \fImaxPixels\fR. If \fBTK_AT_LEAST_ONE\fR is set and \fBTK_WHOLE_WORDS\fR is also set, it means that if not even one word fits on the line, return the first few letters of the word that did fit; if not even one letter of the word fit, then the first letter will still be returned. .AP int *lengthPtr out Filled with the number of pixels occupied by the number of characters returned as the result of \fBTk_MeasureChars\fR. .AP Display *display in Display on which to draw. .AP Drawable drawable in Window or pixmap in which to draw. .AP GC gc in Graphics context for drawing characters. The font selected into this GC must be the same as the \fItkfont\fR. .AP int "x, y" in Coordinates at which to place the left edge of the baseline when displaying \fIstring\fR. .AP int firstByte in The index of the first byte of the first character to underline in the \fIstring\fR. Underlining begins at the left edge of this character. .AP int lastByte in The index of the first byte of the last character up to which the underline will be drawn. The character specified by \fIlastByte\fR will not itself be underlined. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These routines are for measuring and displaying simple single-font, single-line strings. To measure and display single-font, multi-line, justified text, refer to the documentation for \fBTk_ComputeTextLayout\fR. There is no programming interface in the core of Tk that supports multi-font, multi-line text; support for that behavior must be built on top of simpler layers. Note that the interfaces described here are byte-oriented not character-oriented, so index values coming from Tcl scripts need to be converted to byte offsets using the \fBTcl_UtfAtIndex\fR and related routines. .PP A glyph is the displayable picture of a letter, number, or some other symbol. Not all character codes in a given font have a glyph. Characters such as tabs, newlines/returns, and control characters that have no glyph are measured and displayed by these procedures in a platform-dependent manner; under X, they are replaced with backslashed escape sequences, while under Windows and Macintosh hollow or solid boxes may be substituted. Refer to the documentation for \fBTk_ComputeTextLayout\fR for a programming interface that supports the platform-independent expansion of tab characters into columns and newlines/returns into multi-line text. .PP \fBTk_MeasureChars\fR is used both to compute the length of a given string and to compute how many characters from a string fit in a given amount of space. The return value is the number of bytes from \fIstring\fR that fit in the space specified by \fImaxPixels\fR subject to the conditions described by \fIflags\fR. If all characters fit, the return value will be \fInumBytes\fR. \fI*lengthPtr\fR is filled with the computed width, in pixels, of the portion of the string that was measured. For example, if the return value is 5, then \fI*lengthPtr\fR is filled with the distance between the left edge of \fIstring\fR[0] and the right edge of \fIstring\fR[4]. .PP \fBTk_TextWidth\fR is a wrapper function that provides a simpler interface to the \fBTk_MeasureChars\fR function. The return value is how much space in pixels the given \fIstring\fR needs. .PP \fBTk_DrawChars\fR draws the \fIstring\fR at the given location in the given \fIdrawable\fR. .PP \fBTk_UnderlineChars\fR underlines the given range of characters in the given \fIstring\fR. It does not draw the characters (which are assumed to have been displayed previously by \fBTk_DrawChars\fR); it just draws the underline. This procedure is used to underline a few characters without having to construct an underlined font. To produce natively underlined text, the appropriate underlined font should be constructed and used. .SH "SEE ALSO" font(n), FontId(3) .SH KEYWORDS font, measurement 0707010003fd10000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b600002f4f000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000003300000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: ConfigWind.3,v 1.4 2007/12/13 15:23:42 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_ConfigureWindow 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_ConfigureWindow, Tk_MoveWindow, Tk_ResizeWindow, Tk_MoveResizeWindow, Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth, Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes, Tk_SetWindowBackground, Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap, Tk_SetWindowBorder, Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap, Tk_SetWindowColormap, Tk_DefineCursor, Tk_UndefineCursor \- change window configuration or attributes .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_ConfigureWindow\fR(\fItkwin, valueMask, valuePtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_MoveWindow\fR(\fItkwin, x, y\fR) .sp \fBTk_ResizeWindow\fR(\fItkwin, width, height\fR) .sp \fBTk_MoveResizeWindow\fR(\fItkwin, x, y, width, height\fR) .sp \fBTk_SetWindowBorderWidth\fR(\fItkwin, borderWidth\fR) .sp \fBTk_ChangeWindowAttributes\fR(\fItkwin, valueMask, attsPtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_SetWindowBackground\fR(\fItkwin, pixel\fR) .sp \fBTk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap\fR(\fItkwin, pixmap\fR) .sp \fBTk_SetWindowBorder\fR(\fItkwin, pixel\fR) .sp \fBTk_SetWindowBorderPixmap\fR(\fItkwin, pixmap\fR) .sp \fBTk_SetWindowColormap\fR(\fItkwin, colormap\fR) .sp \fBTk_DefineCursor\fR(\fItkwin, cursor\fR) .sp \fBTk_UndefineCursor\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS XSetWindowAttributes borderWidth .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .AP "unsigned int" valueMask in OR-ed mask of values like \fBCWX\fR or \fBCWBorderPixel\fR, indicating which fields of \fI*valuePtr\fR or \fI*attsPtr\fR to use. .AP XWindowChanges *valuePtr in Points to a structure containing new values for the configuration parameters selected by \fIvalueMask\fR. Fields not selected by \fIvalueMask\fR are ignored. .AP int x in New x-coordinate for \fItkwin\fR's top left pixel (including border, if any) within tkwin's parent. .AP int y in New y-coordinate for \fItkwin\fR's top left pixel (including border, if any) within tkwin's parent. .AP "int" width in New width for \fItkwin\fR (interior, not including border). .AP "int" height in New height for \fItkwin\fR (interior, not including border). .AP "int" borderWidth in New width for \fItkwin\fR's border. .AP XSetWindowAttributes *attsPtr in Points to a structure containing new values for the attributes given by the \fIvalueMask\fR argument. Attributes not selected by \fIvalueMask\fR are ignored. .AP "unsigned long" pixel in New background or border color for window. .AP Pixmap pixmap in New pixmap to use for background or border of \fItkwin\fR. WARNING: cannot necessarily be deleted immediately, as for Xlib calls. See note below. .AP Colormap colormap in New colormap to use for \fItkwin\fR. .AP Tk_Cursor cursor in New cursor to use for \fItkwin\fR. If \fBNone\fR is specified, then \fItkwin\fR will not have its own cursor; it will use the cursor of its parent. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These procedures are analogous to the X library procedures with similar names, such as \fBXConfigureWindow\fR. Each one of the above procedures calls the corresponding X procedure and also saves the configuration information in Tk's local structure for the window. This allows the information to be retrieved quickly by the application (using macros such as \fBTk_X\fR and \fBTk_Height\fR) without having to contact the X server. In addition, if no X window has actually been created for \fItkwin\fR yet, these procedures do not issue X operations or cause event handlers to be invoked; they save the information in Tk's local structure for the window; when the window is created later, the saved information will be used to configure the window. .PP See the X library documentation for details on what these procedures do and how they use their arguments. .PP In the procedures \fBTk_ConfigureWindow\fR, \fBTk_MoveWindow\fR, \fBTk_ResizeWindow\fR, \fBTk_MoveResizeWindow\fR, and \fBTk_SetWindowBorderWidth\fR, if \fItkwin\fR is an internal window then event handlers interested in configure events are invoked immediately, before the procedure returns. If \fItkwin\fR is a top-level window then the event handlers will be invoked later, after X has seen the request and returned an event for it. .PP Applications using Tk should never call procedures like \fBXConfigureWindow\fR directly; they should always use the corresponding Tk procedures. .PP The size and location of a window should only be modified by the appropriate geometry manager for that window and never by a window itself (but see \fBTk_MoveToplevelWindow\fR for moving a top-level window). .PP You may not use \fBTk_ConfigureWindow\fR to change the stacking order of a window (\fIvalueMask\fR may not contain the \fBCWSibling\fR or \fBCWStackMode\fR bits). To change the stacking order, use the procedure \fBTk_RestackWindow\fR. .PP The procedure \fBTk_SetWindowColormap\fR will automatically add \fItkwin\fR to the \fBTK_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR property of its nearest top-level ancestor if the new colormap is different from that of \fItkwin\fR's parent and \fItkwin\fR is not already in the \fBTK_COLORMAP_WINDOWS\fR property. .SH BUGS .PP \fBTk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap\fR and \fBTk_SetWindowBorderPixmap\fR differ slightly from their Xlib counterparts in that the \fIpixmap\fR argument may not necessarily be deleted immediately after calling one of these procedures. This is because \fItkwin\fR's window may not exist yet at the time of the call, in which case \fIpixmap\fR is merely saved and used later when \fItkwin\fR's window is actually created. If you wish to delete \fIpixmap\fR, then call \fBTk_MakeWindowExist\fR first to be sure that \fItkwin\fR's window exists and \fIpixmap\fR has been passed to the X server. .PP A similar problem occurs for the \fIcursor\fR argument passed to \fBTk_DefineCursor\fR. The solution is the same as for pixmaps above: call \fBTk_MakeWindowExist\fR before freeing the cursor. .SH "SEE ALSO" Tk_MoveToplevelWindow, Tk_RestackWindow .SH KEYWORDS attributes, border, color, configure, height, pixel, pixmap, width, window, x, y 0707010003fd03000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700001e28000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002a00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_OwnSelection.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: OwnSelect.3,v 1.2 1998/09/14 18:22:53 stanton Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_OwnSelection 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_OwnSelection \- make a window the owner of the primary selection .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_OwnSelection\fR(\fItkwin, selection, proc, clientData\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_LostSelProc clientData .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window that is to become new selection owner. .AP Atom selection in The name of the selection to be owned, such as XA_PRIMARY. .AP Tk_LostSelProc *proc in Procedure to invoke when \fItkwin\fR loses selection ownership later. .AP ClientData clientData in Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIproc\fR. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_OwnSelection\fR arranges for \fItkwin\fR to become the new owner of the selection specified by the atom \fIselection\fR. After this call completes, future requests for the selection will be directed to handlers created for \fItkwin\fR using \fBTk_CreateSelHandler\fR. When \fItkwin\fR eventually loses the selection ownership, \fIproc\fR will be invoked so that the window can clean itself up (e.g. by unhighlighting the selection). \fIProc\fR should have arguments and result that match the type \fBTk_LostSelProc\fR: .CS typedef void Tk_LostSelProc(ClientData \fIclientData\fR); .CE The \fIclientData\fR parameter to \fIproc\fR is a copy of the \fIclientData\fR argument given to \fBTk_OwnSelection\fR, and is usually a pointer to a data structure containing application-specific information about \fItkwin\fR. .SH KEYWORDS own, selection owner 0707010003fcc4000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b6000027e5000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002c00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTextInfo.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: CanvTxtInfo.3,v 1.5 2007/12/13 15:23:42 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_CanvasTextInfo 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_CanvasTextInfo \- additional information for managing text items in canvases .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Tk_CanvasTextInfo * \fBTk_CanvasGetTextInfo\fR(\fIcanvas\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Canvas canvas .AP Tk_Canvas canvas in A token that identifies a particular canvas widget. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP Textual canvas items are somewhat more complicated to manage than other items, due to things like the selection and the input focus. \fBTk_CanvasGetTextInfo\fR may be invoked by a type manager to obtain additional information needed for items that display text. The return value from \fBTk_CanvasGetTextInfo\fR is a pointer to a structure that is shared between Tk and all the items that display text. The structure has the following form: .CS typedef struct Tk_CanvasTextInfo { Tk_3DBorder \fIselBorder\fR; int \fIselBorderWidth\fR; XColor *\fIselFgColorPtr\fR; Tk_Item *\fIselItemPtr\fR; int \fIselectFirst\fR; int \fIselectLast\fR; Tk_Item *\fIanchorItemPtr\fR; int \fIselectAnchor\fR; Tk_3DBorder \fIinsertBorder\fR; int \fIinsertWidth\fR; int \fIinsertBorderWidth\fR; Tk_Item *\fIfocusItemPtr\fR; int \fIgotFocus\fR; int \fIcursorOn\fR; } Tk_CanvasTextInfo; .CE The \fBselBorder\fR field identifies a Tk_3DBorder that should be used for drawing the background under selected text. \fIselBorderWidth\fR gives the width of the raised border around selected text, in pixels. \fIselFgColorPtr\fR points to an XColor that describes the foreground color to be used when drawing selected text. \fIselItemPtr\fR points to the item that is currently selected, or NULL if there is no item selected or if the canvas does not have the selection. \fIselectFirst\fR and \fIselectLast\fR give the indices of the first and last selected characters in \fIselItemPtr\fR, as returned by the \fIindexProc\fR for that item. \fIanchorItemPtr\fR points to the item that currently has the selection anchor; this is not necessarily the same as \fIselItemPtr\fR. \fIselectAnchor\fR is an index that identifies the anchor position within \fIanchorItemPtr\fR. \fIinsertBorder\fR contains a Tk_3DBorder to use when drawing the insertion cursor; \fIinsertWidth\fR gives the total width of the insertion cursor in pixels, and \fIinsertBorderWidth\fR gives the width of the raised border around the insertion cursor. \fIfocusItemPtr\fR identifies the item that currently has the input focus, or NULL if there is no such item. \fIgotFocus\fR is 1 if the canvas widget has the input focus and 0 otherwise. \fIcursorOn\fR is 1 if the insertion cursor should be drawn in \fIfocusItemPtr\fR and 0 if it should not be drawn; this field is toggled on and off by Tk to make the cursor blink. .PP The structure returned by \fBTk_CanvasGetTextInfo\fR is shared between Tk and the type managers; typically the type manager calls \fBTk_CanvasGetTextInfo\fR once when an item is created and then saves the pointer in the item's record. Tk will update information in the Tk_CanvasTextInfo; for example, a \fBconfigure\fR widget command might change the \fIselBorder\fR field, or a \fBselect\fR widget command might change the \fIselectFirst\fR field, or Tk might change \fIcursorOn\fR in order to make the insertion cursor flash on and off during successive redisplays. .PP Type managers should treat all of the fields of the Tk_CanvasTextInfo structure as read-only, except for \fIselItemPtr\fR, \fIselectFirst\fR, \fIselectLast\fR, and \fIselectAnchor\fR. Type managers may change \fIselectFirst\fR, \fIselectLast\fR, and \fIselectAnchor\fR to adjust for insertions and deletions in the item (but only if the item is the current owner of the selection or anchor, as determined by \fIselItemPtr\fR or \fIanchorItemPtr\fR). If all of the selected text in the item is deleted, the item should set \fIselItemPtr\fR to NULL to indicate that there is no longer a selection. .SH KEYWORDS canvas, focus, insertion cursor, selection, selection anchor, text 0707010003fcc8000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b600008883000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002b00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ConfigureInfo.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: ConfigWidg.3,v 1.20 2007/12/13 15:23:42 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_ConfigureWidget 3 4.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_ConfigureWidget, Tk_ConfigureInfo, Tk_ConfigureValue, Tk_FreeOptions \- process configuration options for widgets .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp int \fBTk_ConfigureWidget(\fIinterp, tkwin, specs, argc, argv, widgRec, flags\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_ConfigureInfo(\fIinterp, tkwin, specs, widgRec, argvName, flags\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_ConfigureValue(\fIinterp, tkwin, specs, widgRec, argvName, flags\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_FreeOptions(\fIspecs, widgRec, display, flags\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ConfigSpec *widgRec in/out .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for returning error messages. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window used to represent widget (needed to set up X resources). .AP Tk_ConfigSpec *specs in Pointer to table specifying legal configuration options for this widget. .AP int argc in Number of arguments in \fIargv\fR. .AP "const char" **argv in Command-line options for configuring widget. .AP char *widgRec in/out Points to widget record structure. Fields in this structure get modified by \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR to hold configuration information. .AP int flags in If non-zero, then it specifies an OR-ed combination of flags that control the processing of configuration information. \fBTK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY\fR causes the option database and defaults to be ignored, and flag bits \fBTK_CONFIG_USER_BIT\fR and higher are used to selectively disable entries in \fIspecs\fR. .AP "type name" type in The name of the type of a widget record. .AP "field name" field in The name of a field in records of type \fItype\fR. .AP "const char" *argvName in The name used on Tcl command lines to refer to a particular option (e.g. when creating a widget or invoking the \fBconfigure\fR widget command). If non-NULL, then information is returned only for this option. If NULL, then information is returned for all available options. .AP Display *display in Display containing widget whose record is being freed; needed in order to free up resources. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP Note: \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR should be replaced with the new \fBTcl_Obj\fR based API \fBTk_SetOptions\fR. The old interface is retained for backward compatibility. .PP \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR is called to configure various aspects of a widget, such as colors, fonts, border width, etc. It is intended as a convenience procedure to reduce the amount of code that must be written in individual widget managers to handle configuration information. It is typically invoked when widgets are created, and again when the \fBconfigure\fR command is invoked for a widget. Although intended primarily for widgets, \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR can be used in other situations where \fIargc-argv\fR information is to be used to fill in a record structure, such as configuring graphical elements for a canvas widget or entries of a menu. .PP \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR processes a table specifying the configuration options that are supported (\fIspecs\fR) and a collection of command-line arguments (\fIargc\fR and \fIargv\fR) to fill in fields of a record (\fIwidgRec\fR). It uses the option database and defaults specified in \fIspecs\fR to fill in fields of \fIwidgRec\fR that are not specified in \fIargv\fR. \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR normally returns the value \fBTCL_OK\fR; in this case it does not modify \fIinterp\fR. If an error occurs then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR will leave an error message in \fIinterp->result\fR in the standard Tcl fashion. In the event of an error return, some of the fields of \fIwidgRec\fR could already have been set, if configuration information for them was successfully processed before the error occurred. The other fields will be set to reasonable initial values so that \fBTk_FreeOptions\fR can be called for cleanup. .PP The \fIspecs\fR array specifies the kinds of configuration options expected by the widget. Each of its entries specifies one configuration option and has the following structure: .CS typedef struct { int \fItype\fR; char *\fIargvName\fR; char *\fIdbName\fR; char *\fIdbClass\fR; char *\fIdefValue\fR; int \fIoffset\fR; int \fIspecFlags\fR; Tk_CustomOption *\fIcustomPtr\fR; } Tk_ConfigSpec; .CE The \fItype\fR field indicates what type of configuration option this is (e.g. \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR for a color value, or \fBTK_CONFIG_INT\fR for an integer value). The \fItype\fR field indicates how to use the value of the option (more on this below). The \fIargvName\fR field is a string such as .QW \-font or .QW \-bg , which is compared with the values in \fIargv\fR (if \fIargvName\fR is NULL it means this is a grouped entry; see \fBGROUPED ENTRIES\fR below). The \fIdbName\fR and \fIdbClass\fR fields are used to look up a value for this option in the option database. The \fIdefValue\fR field specifies a default value for this configuration option if no value is specified in either \fIargv\fR or the option database. \fIOffset\fR indicates where in \fIwidgRec\fR to store information about this option, and \fIspecFlags\fR contains additional information to control the processing of this configuration option (see FLAGS below). The last field, \fIcustomPtr\fR, is only used if \fItype\fR is \fBTK_CONFIG_CUSTOM\fR; see CUSTOM OPTION TYPES below. .PP \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR first processes \fIargv\fR to see which (if any) configuration options are specified there. \fIArgv\fR must contain an even number of fields; the first of each pair of fields must match the \fIargvName\fR of some entry in \fIspecs\fR (unique abbreviations are acceptable), and the second field of the pair contains the value for that configuration option. If there are entries in \fIspec\fR for which there were no matching entries in \fIargv\fR, \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR uses the \fIdbName\fR and \fIdbClass\fR fields of the \fIspecs\fR entry to probe the option database; if a value is found, then it is used as the value for the option. Finally, if no entry is found in the option database, the \fIdefValue\fR field of the \fIspecs\fR entry is used as the value for the configuration option. If the \fIdefValue\fR is NULL, or if the \fBTK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT\fR bit is set in \fIflags\fR, then there is no default value and this \fIspecs\fR entry will be ignored if no value is specified in \fIargv\fR or the option database. .PP Once a string value has been determined for a configuration option, \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR translates the string value into a more useful form, such as a color if \fItype\fR is \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR or an integer if \fItype\fR is \fBTK_CONFIG_INT\fR. This value is then stored in the record pointed to by \fIwidgRec\fR. This record is assumed to contain information relevant to the manager of the widget; its exact type is unknown to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR. The \fIoffset\fR field of each \fIspecs\fR entry indicates where in \fIwidgRec\fR to store the information about this configuration option. You should use the \fBTk_Offset\fR macro to generate \fIoffset\fR values (see below for a description of \fBTk_Offset\fR). The location indicated by \fIwidgRec\fR and \fIoffset\fR will be referred to as the .QW target in the descriptions below. .PP The \fItype\fR field of each entry in \fIspecs\fR determines what to do with the string value of that configuration option. The legal values for \fItype\fR, and the corresponding actions, are: .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR\fR The value must be an ASCII string identifying a cursor in a form suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetCursor\fR. The value is converted to a \fBTk_Cursor\fR by calling \fBTk_GetCursor\fR and the result is stored in the target. In addition, the resulting cursor is made the active cursor for \fItkwin\fR by calling \fBXDefineCursor\fR. If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value may be an empty string, in which case the target and \fItkwin\fR's active cursor will be set to \fBNone\fR. If the previous value of the target was not \fBNone\fR, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_FreeCursor\fR. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_ANCHOR\fR The value must be an ASCII string identifying an anchor point in one of the ways accepted by \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR. The string is converted to a \fBTk_Anchor\fR by calling \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR and the result is stored in the target. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_BITMAP\fR The value must be an ASCII string identifying a bitmap in a form suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. The value is converted to a \fBPixmap\fR by calling \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR and the result is stored in the target. If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value may be an empty string, in which case the target is set to \fBNone\fR. If the previous value of the target was not \fBNone\fR, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_FreeBitmap\fR. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_BOOLEAN\fR The value must be an ASCII string specifying a boolean value. Any of the values .QW true , .QW yes , .QW on , or .QW 1 , or an abbreviation of one of these values, means true; any of the values .QW false , .QW no , .QW off , or .QW 0 , or an abbreviation of one of these values, means false. The target is expected to be an integer; for true values it will be set to 1 and for false values it will be set to 0. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_BORDER\fR The value must be an ASCII string identifying a border color in a form suitable for passing to \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR. The value is converted to a (\fBTk_3DBorder *\fR) by calling \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR and the result is stored in the target. If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to NULL. If the previous value of the target was not NULL, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_Free3DBorder\fR. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_CAP_STYLE\fR The value must be an ASCII string identifying a cap style in one of the ways accepted by \fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR. The string is converted to an integer value corresponding to the cap style by calling \fBTk_GetCapStyle\fR and the result is stored in the target. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR The value must be an ASCII string identifying a color in a form suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetColor\fR. The value is converted to an (\fBXColor *\fR) by calling \fBTk_GetColor\fR and the result is stored in the target. If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to \fBNone\fR. If the previous value of the target was not NULL, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_FreeColor\fR. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_CURSOR\fR This option is identical to \fBTK_CONFIG_ACTIVE_CURSOR\fR except that the new cursor is not made the active one for \fItkwin\fR. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_CUSTOM\fR This option allows applications to define new option types. The \fIcustomPtr\fR field of the entry points to a structure defining the new option type. See the section \fBCUSTOM OPTION TYPES\fR below for details. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_DOUBLE\fR The value must be an ASCII floating-point number in the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR. The string is converted to a \fBdouble\fR value, and the value is stored in the target. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_END\fR Marks the end of the table. The last entry in \fIspecs\fR must have this type; all of its other fields are ignored and it will never match any arguments. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_FONT\fR The value must be an ASCII string identifying a font in a form suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetFont\fR. The value is converted to a \fBTk_Font\fR by calling \fBTk_GetFont\fR and the result is stored in the target. If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to NULL. If the previous value of the target was not NULL, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTk_FreeFont\fR. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_INT\fR The value must be an ASCII integer string in the format accepted by \fBstrtol\fR (e.g. .QW 0 and .QW 0x prefixes may be used to specify octal or hexadecimal numbers, respectively). The string is converted to an integer value and the integer is stored in the target. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_JOIN_STYLE\fR The value must be an ASCII string identifying a join style in one of the ways accepted by \fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR. The string is converted to an integer value corresponding to the join style by calling \fBTk_GetJoinStyle\fR and the result is stored in the target. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_JUSTIFY\fR The value must be an ASCII string identifying a justification method in one of the ways accepted by \fBTk_GetJustify\fR. The string is converted to a \fBTk_Justify\fR by calling \fBTk_GetJustify\fR and the result is stored in the target. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_MM\fR The value must specify a screen distance in one of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetScreenMM\fR. The string is converted to double-precision floating-point distance in millimeters and the value is stored in the target. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_PIXELS\fR The value must specify screen units in one of the forms acceptable to \fBTk_GetPixels\fR. The string is converted to an integer distance in pixels and the value is stored in the target. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_RELIEF\fR The value must be an ASCII string identifying a relief in a form suitable for passing to \fBTk_GetRelief\fR. The value is converted to an integer relief value by calling \fBTk_GetRelief\fR and the result is stored in the target. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_STRING\fR A copy of the value is made by allocating memory space with \fBTcl_Alloc\fR and copying the value into the dynamically-allocated space. A pointer to the new string is stored in the target. If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR then the value may be an empty string, in which case the target will be set to NULL. If the previous value of the target was not NULL, then it is freed by passing it to \fBTcl_Free\fR. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_SYNONYM\fR This \fItype\fR value identifies special entries in \fIspecs\fR that are synonyms for other entries. If an \fIargv\fR value matches the \fIargvName\fR of a \fBTK_CONFIG_SYNONYM\fR entry, the entry is not used directly. Instead, \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR searches \fIspecs\fR for another entry whose \fIargvName\fR is the same as the \fIdbName\fR field in the \fBTK_CONFIG_SYNONYM\fR entry; this new entry is used just as if its \fIargvName\fR had matched the \fIargv\fR value. The synonym mechanism allows multiple \fIargv\fR values to be used for a single configuration option, such as .QW \-background and .QW \-bg . .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_UID\fR The value is translated to a \fBTk_Uid\fR (by passing it to \fBTk_GetUid\fR). The resulting value is stored in the target. If \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR is specified in \fIspecFlags\fR and the value is an empty string then the target will be set to NULL. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_WINDOW\fR The value must be a window path name. It is translated to a \fBTk_Window\fR token and the token is stored in the target. .SH "GROUPED ENTRIES" .PP In some cases it is useful to generate multiple resources from a single configuration value. For example, a color name might be used both to generate the background color for a widget (using \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR) and to generate a 3-D border to draw around the widget (using \fBTK_CONFIG_BORDER\fR). In cases like this it is possible to specify that several consecutive entries in \fIspecs\fR are to be treated as a group. The first entry is used to determine a value (using its \fIargvName\fR, \fIdbName\fR, \fIdbClass\fR, and \fIdefValue\fR fields). The value will be processed several times (one for each entry in the group), generating multiple different resources and modifying multiple targets within \fIwidgRec\fR. Each of the entries after the first must have a NULL value in its \fIargvName\fR field; this indicates that the entry is to be grouped with the entry that precedes it. Only the \fItype\fR and \fIoffset\fR fields are used from these follow-on entries. .SH "FLAGS" .PP The \fIflags\fR argument passed to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR is used in conjunction with the \fIspecFlags\fR fields in the entries of \fIspecs\fR to provide additional control over the processing of configuration options. These values are used in three different ways as described below. .PP First, if the \fIflags\fR argument to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR has the \fBTK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY\fR bit set (i.e., \fIflags\fR | \fBTK_CONFIG_ARGV_ONLY\fR != 0), then the option database and \fIdefValue\fR fields are not used. In this case, if an entry in \fIspecs\fR does not match a field in \fIargv\fR then nothing happens: the corresponding target is not modified. This feature is useful when the goal is to modify certain configuration options while leaving others in their current state, such as when a \fBconfigure\fR widget command is being processed. .PP Second, the \fIspecFlags\fR field of an entry in \fIspecs\fR may be used to control the processing of that entry. Each \fIspecFlags\fR field may consists of an OR-ed combination of the following values: .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY\fR If this bit is set then the entry will only be considered if the display for \fItkwin\fR has more than one bit plane. If the display is monochromatic then this \fIspecs\fR entry will be ignored. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY\fR If this bit is set then the entry will only be considered if the display for \fItkwin\fR has exactly one bit plane. If the display is not monochromatic then this \fIspecs\fR entry will be ignored. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_NULL_OK\fR This bit is only relevant for some types of entries (see the descriptions of the various entry types above). If this bit is set, it indicates that an empty string value for the field is acceptable and if it occurs then the target should be set to NULL or \fBNone\fR, depending on the type of the target. This flag is typically used to allow a feature to be turned off entirely, e.g. set a cursor value to \fBNone\fR so that a window simply inherits its parent's cursor. If this bit is not set then empty strings are processed as strings, which generally results in an error. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_DONT_SET_DEFAULT\fR If this bit is one, it means that the \fIdefValue\fR field of the entry should only be used for returning the default value in \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR. In calls to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR no default will be supplied for entries with this flag set; it is assumed that the caller has already supplied a default value in the target location. This flag provides a performance optimization where it is expensive to process the default string: the client can compute the default once, save the value, and provide it before calling \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR. .TP \fBTK_CONFIG_OPTION_SPECIFIED\fR This bit is .VS 8.5 deprecated. It used to be set and cleared by \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR so that callers could detect what entries were specified in \fIargv\fR, but it was removed because it was inherently thread-unsafe. Code that wishes to detect what options were specified should use \fBTk_SetOptions\fR instead. .VE 8.5 .PP The \fBTK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY\fR and \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY\fR flags are typically used to specify different default values for monochrome and color displays. This is done by creating two entries in \fIspecs\fR that are identical except for their \fIdefValue\fR and \fIspecFlags\fR fields. One entry should have the value \fBTK_CONFIG_MONO_ONLY\fR in its \fIspecFlags\fR and the default value for monochrome displays in its \fIdefValue\fR; the other entry should have the value \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR_ONLY\fR in its \fIspecFlags\fR and the appropriate \fIdefValue\fR for color displays. .PP Third, it is possible to use \fIflags\fR and \fIspecFlags\fR together to selectively disable some entries. This feature is not needed very often. It is useful in cases where several similar kinds of widgets are implemented in one place. It allows a single \fIspecs\fR table to be created with all the configuration options for all the widget types. When processing a particular widget type, only entries relevant to that type will be used. This effect is achieved by setting the high-order bits (those in positions equal to or greater than \fBTK_CONFIG_USER_BIT\fR) in \fIspecFlags\fR values or in \fIflags\fR. In order for a particular entry in \fIspecs\fR to be used, its high-order bits must match exactly the high-order bits of the \fIflags\fR value passed to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR. If a \fIspecs\fR table is being used for N different widget types, then N of the high-order bits will be used. Each \fIspecs\fR entry will have one of more of those bits set in its \fIspecFlags\fR field to indicate the widget types for which this entry is valid. When calling \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR, \fIflags\fR will have a single one of these bits set to select the entries for the desired widget type. For a working example of this feature, see the code in tkButton.c. .SH TK_OFFSET .PP The \fBTk_Offset\fR macro is provided as a safe way of generating the \fIoffset\fR values for entries in Tk_ConfigSpec structures. It takes two arguments: the name of a type of record, and the name of a field in that record. It returns the byte offset of the named field in records of the given type. .SH TK_CONFIGUREINFO .PP The \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR procedure may be used to obtain information about one or all of the options for a given widget. Given a token for a window (\fItkwin\fR), a table describing the configuration options for a class of widgets (\fIspecs\fR), a pointer to a widget record containing the current information for a widget (\fIwidgRec\fR), and a NULL \fIargvName\fR argument, \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR generates a string describing all of the configuration options for the window. The string is placed in \fIinterp->result\fR. Under normal circumstances it returns \fBTCL_OK\fR; if an error occurs then it returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR and \fIinterp->result\fR contains an error message. .PP If \fIargvName\fR is NULL, then the value left in \fIinterp->result\fR by \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR consists of a list of one or more entries, each of which describes one configuration option (i.e. one entry in \fIspecs\fR). Each entry in the list will contain either two or five values. If the corresponding entry in \fIspecs\fR has type \fBTK_CONFIG_SYNONYM\fR, then the list will contain two values: the \fIargvName\fR for the entry and the \fIdbName\fR (synonym name). Otherwise the list will contain five values: \fIargvName\fR, \fIdbName\fR, \fIdbClass\fR, \fIdefValue\fR, and current value. The current value is computed from the appropriate field of \fIwidgRec\fR by calling procedures like \fBTk_NameOfColor\fR. .PP If the \fIargvName\fR argument to \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR is non-NULL, then it indicates a single option, and information is returned only for that option. The string placed in \fIinterp->result\fR will be a list containing two or five values as described above; this will be identical to the corresponding sublist that would have been returned if \fIargvName\fR had been NULL. .PP The \fIflags\fR argument to \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR is used to restrict the \fIspecs\fR entries to consider, just as for \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR. .SH TK_CONFIGUREVALUE .PP \fBTk_ConfigureValue\fR takes arguments similar to \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR; instead of returning a list of values, it just returns the current value of the option given by \fIargvName\fR (\fIargvName\fR must not be NULL). The value is returned in \fIinterp->result\fR and \fBTCL_OK\fR is normally returned as the procedure's result. If an error occurs in \fBTk_ConfigureValue\fR (e.g., \fIargvName\fR is not a valid option name), \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp->result\fR. This procedure is typically called to implement \fBcget\fR widget commands. .SH TK_FREEOPTIONS .PP The \fBTk_FreeOptions\fR procedure may be invoked during widget cleanup to release all of the resources associated with configuration options. It scans through \fIspecs\fR and for each entry corresponding to a resource that must be explicitly freed (e.g. those with type \fBTK_CONFIG_COLOR\fR), it frees the resource in the widget record. If the field in the widget record does not refer to a resource (e.g. it contains a null pointer) then no resource is freed for that entry. After freeing a resource, \fBTk_FreeOptions\fR sets the corresponding field of the widget record to null. .SH "CUSTOM OPTION TYPES" .PP Applications can extend the built-in configuration types with additional configuration types by writing procedures to parse and print options of the a type and creating a structure pointing to those procedures: .CS typedef struct Tk_CustomOption { Tk_OptionParseProc *\fIparseProc\fR; Tk_OptionPrintProc *\fIprintProc\fR; ClientData \fIclientData\fR; } Tk_CustomOption; typedef int Tk_OptionParseProc( ClientData \fIclientData\fR, Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR, char *\fIvalue\fR, char *\fIwidgRec\fR, int \fIoffset\fR); typedef char *Tk_OptionPrintProc( ClientData \fIclientData\fR, Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR, char *\fIwidgRec\fR, int \fIoffset\fR, Tcl_FreeProc **\fIfreeProcPtr\fR); .CE The Tk_CustomOption structure contains three fields, which are pointers to the two procedures and a \fIclientData\fR value to be passed to those procedures when they are invoked. The \fIclientData\fR value typically points to a structure containing information that is needed by the procedures when they are parsing and printing options. .PP The \fIparseProc\fR procedure is invoked by \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR to parse a string and store the resulting value in the widget record. The \fIclientData\fR argument is a copy of the \fIclientData\fR field in the Tk_CustomOption structure. The \fIinterp\fR argument points to a Tcl interpreter used for error reporting. \fITkwin\fR is a copy of the \fItkwin\fR argument to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR. The \fIvalue\fR argument is a string describing the value for the option; it could have been specified explicitly in the call to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR or it could come from the option database or a default. \fIValue\fR will never be a null pointer but it may point to an empty string. \fIRecordPtr\fR is the same as the \fIwidgRec\fR argument to \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR; it points to the start of the widget record to modify. The last argument, \fIoffset\fR, gives the offset in bytes from the start of the widget record to the location where the option value is to be placed. The procedure should translate the string to whatever form is appropriate for the option and store the value in the widget record. It should normally return \fBTCL_OK\fR, but if an error occurs in translating the string to a value then it should return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR and store an error message in \fIinterp->result\fR. .PP The \fIprintProc\fR procedure is called by \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR to produce a string value describing an existing option. Its \fIclientData\fR, \fItkwin\fR, \fIwidgRec\fR, and \fIoffset\fR arguments all have the same meaning as for Tk_OptionParseProc procedures. The \fIprintProc\fR procedure should examine the option whose value is stored at \fIoffset\fR in \fIwidgRec\fR, produce a string describing that option, and return a pointer to the string. If the string is stored in dynamically-allocated memory, then the procedure must set \fI*freeProcPtr\fR to the address of a procedure to call to free the string's memory; \fBTk_ConfigureInfo\fR will call this procedure when it is finished with the string. If the result string is stored in static memory then \fIprintProc\fR need not do anything with the \fIfreeProcPtr\fR argument. .PP Once \fIparseProc\fR and \fIprintProc\fR have been defined and a Tk_CustomOption structure has been created for them, options of this new type may be manipulated with Tk_ConfigSpec entries whose \fItype\fR fields are \fBTK_CONFIG_CUSTOM\fR and whose \fIcustomPtr\fR fields point to the Tk_CustomOption structure. .SH EXAMPLES .PP Although the explanation of \fBTk_ConfigureWidget\fR is fairly complicated, its actual use is pretty straightforward. The easiest way to get started is to copy the code from an existing widget. The library implementation of frames (tkFrame.c) has a simple configuration table, and the library implementation of buttons (tkButton.c) has a much more complex table that uses many of the fancy \fIspecFlags\fR mechanisms. .SH "SEE ALSO" Tk_SetOptions(3) .SH KEYWORDS anchor, bitmap, boolean, border, cap style, color, configuration options, cursor, custom, double, font, integer, join style, justify, millimeters, pixels, relief, synonym, uid 0707010003fcdf000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700001eac000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002900000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetAtomName.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: InternAtom.3,v 1.9 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_InternAtom 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_InternAtom, Tk_GetAtomName \- manage cache of X atoms .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Atom \fBTk_InternAtom(\fItkwin, name\fR) .sp const char * \fBTk_GetAtomName(\fItkwin, atom\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window parent .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. Used to map atom or name relative to a particular display. .AP "const char" *name in String name for which atom is desired. .AP Atom atom in Atom for which corresponding string name is desired. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These procedures are similar to the Xlib procedures \fBXInternAtom\fR and \fBXGetAtomName\fR. \fBTk_InternAtom\fR returns the atom identifier associated with string given by \fIname\fR; the atom identifier is only valid for the display associated with \fItkwin\fR. \fBTk_GetAtomName\fR returns the string associated with \fIatom\fR on \fItkwin\fR's display. The string returned by \fBTk_GetAtomName\fR is in Tk's storage: the caller need not free this space when finished with the string, and the caller should not modify the contents of the returned string. If there is no atom \fIatom\fR on \fItkwin\fR's display, then \fBTk_GetAtomName\fR returns the string .QW "?bad atom?" . .PP Tk caches the information returned by \fBTk_InternAtom\fR and \fBTk_GetAtomName\fR so that future calls for the same information can be serviced from the cache without contacting the server. Thus \fBTk_InternAtom\fR and \fBTk_GetAtomName\fR are generally much faster than their Xlib counterparts, and they should be used in place of the Xlib procedures. .SH KEYWORDS atom, cache, display 0707010003fcfb000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b7000024a0000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002c00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ManageGeometry.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: ManageGeom.3,v 1.6 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_ManageGeometry 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_ManageGeometry \- arrange to handle geometry requests for a window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR(\fItkwin, mgrPtr, clientData\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_GeometryProc clientData .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window to be managed. .AP "const Tk_GeomMgr" *mgrPtr in Pointer to data structure containing information about the geometry manager, or NULL to indicate that \fItkwin\fR's geometry should not be managed anymore. The data structure pointed to by \fImgrPtr\fR must be static: Tk keeps a reference to it as long as the window is managed. .AP ClientData clientData in Arbitrary one-word value to pass to geometry manager callbacks. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR arranges for a particular geometry manager, described by the \fImgrPtr\fR argument, to control the geometry of a particular slave window, given by \fItkwin\fR. If \fItkwin\fR was previously managed by some other geometry manager, the previous manager loses control in favor of the new one. If \fImgrPtr\fR is NULL, geometry management is cancelled for \fItkwin\fR. .PP The structure pointed to by \fImgrPtr\fR contains information about the geometry manager: .CS typedef struct { const char *\fIname\fR; Tk_GeomRequestProc *\fIrequestProc\fR; Tk_GeomLostSlaveProc *\fIlostSlaveProc\fR; } Tk_GeomMgr; .CE The \fIname\fR field is the textual name for the geometry manager, such as \fBpack\fR or \fBplace\fR; this value will be returned by the command \fBwinfo manager\fR. .PP \fIrequestProc\fR is a procedure in the geometry manager that will be invoked whenever \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR is called by the slave to change its desired geometry. \fIrequestProc\fR should have arguments and results that match the type \fBTk_GeomRequestProc\fR: .CS typedef void Tk_GeomRequestProc( ClientData \fIclientData\fR, Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR); .CE The parameters to \fIrequestProc\fR will be identical to the corresponding parameters passed to \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR. \fIclientData\fR usually points to a data structure containing application-specific information about how to manage \fItkwin\fR's geometry. .PP The \fIlostSlaveProc\fR field of \fImgrPtr\fR points to another procedure in the geometry manager. Tk will invoke \fIlostSlaveProc\fR if some other manager calls \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR to claim \fItkwin\fR away from the current geometry manager. \fIlostSlaveProc\fR is not invoked if \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR is called with a NULL value for \fImgrPtr\fR (presumably the current geometry manager has made this call, so it already knows that the window is no longer managed), nor is it called if \fImgrPtr\fR is the same as the window's current geometry manager. \fIlostSlaveProc\fR should have arguments and results that match the following prototype: .CS typedef void Tk_GeomLostSlaveProc( ClientData \fIclientData\fR, Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR); .CE The parameters to \fIlostSlaveProc\fR will be identical to the corresponding parameters passed to \fBTk_ManageGeometry\fR. .SH KEYWORDS callback, geometry, managed, request, unmanaged 0707010003fce6000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b6000044a3000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000003000000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetImageMasterData.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: CrtImgType.3,v 1.13 2007/12/13 15:23:42 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_CreateImageType 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_CreateImageType, Tk_GetImageMasterData, Tk_InitImageArgs \- define new kind of image .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR(\fItypePtr\fR) .sp ClientData \fBTk_GetImageMasterData\fR(\fIinterp, name, typePtrPtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_InitImageArgs\fR(\fIinterp, argc, argvPtr\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ImageType *typePtrPtr .AP Tk_ImageType *typePtr in Structure that defines the new type of image. Must be static: a pointer to this structure is retained by the image code. .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter in which image was created. .AP "const char" *name in Name of existing image. .AP Tk_ImageType **typePtrPtr out Points to word in which to store a pointer to type information for the given image, if it exists. .AP int argc in Number of arguments .AP char ***argvPtr in/out Pointer to argument list .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR is invoked to define a new kind of image. An image type corresponds to a particular value of the \fItype\fR argument for the \fBimage create\fR command. There may exist any number of different image types, and new types may be defined dynamically by calling \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR. For example, there might be one type for 2-color bitmaps, another for multi-color images, another for dithered images, another for video, and so on. .PP The code that implements a new image type is called an \fIimage manager\fR. It consists of a collection of procedures plus three different kinds of data structures. The first data structure is a Tk_ImageType structure, which contains the name of the image type and pointers to five procedures provided by the image manager to deal with images of this type: .CS typedef struct Tk_ImageType { char *\fIname\fR; Tk_ImageCreateProc *\fIcreateProc\fR; Tk_ImageGetProc *\fIgetProc\fR; Tk_ImageDisplayProc *\fIdisplayProc\fR; Tk_ImageFreeProc *\fIfreeProc\fR; Tk_ImageDeleteProc *\fIdeleteProc\fR; } Tk_ImageType; .CE The fields of this structure will be described in later subsections of this entry. .PP The second major data structure manipulated by an image manager is called an \fIimage master\fR; it contains overall information about a particular image, such as the values of the configuration options specified in an \fBimage create\fR command. There will usually be one of these structures for each invocation of the \fBimage create\fR command. .PP The third data structure related to images is an \fIimage instance\fR. There will usually be one of these structures for each usage of an image in a particular widget. It is possible for a single image to appear simultaneously in multiple widgets, or even multiple times in the same widget. Furthermore, different instances may be on different screens or displays. The image instance data structure describes things that may vary from instance to instance, such as colors and graphics contexts for redisplay. There is usually one instance structure for each \fB\-image\fR option specified for a widget or canvas item. .PP The following subsections describe the fields of a Tk_ImageType in more detail. .SS NAME .PP \fItypePtr->name\fR provides a name for the image type. Once \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR returns, this name may be used in \fBimage create\fR commands to create images of the new type. If there already existed an image type by this name then the new image type replaces the old one. .SS CREATEPROC \fItypePtr->createProc\fR provides the address of a procedure for Tk to call whenever \fBimage create\fR is invoked to create an image of the new type. \fItypePtr->createProc\fR must match the following prototype: .CS typedef int Tk_ImageCreateProc( Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, char *\fIname\fR, int \fIobjc\fR, Tcl_Obj *const \fIobjv\fR[], Tk_ImageType *\fItypePtr\fR, Tk_ImageMaster \fImaster\fR, ClientData *\fImasterDataPtr\fR); .CE The \fIinterp\fR argument is the interpreter in which the \fBimage\fR command was invoked, and \fIname\fR is the name for the new image, which was either specified explicitly in the \fBimage\fR command or generated automatically by the \fBimage\fR command. The \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR arguments describe all the configuration options for the new image (everything after the name argument to \fBimage\fR). The \fImaster\fR argument is a token that refers to Tk's information about this image; the image manager must return this token to Tk when invoking the \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR procedure. Typically \fIcreateProc\fR will parse \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR and create an image master data structure for the new image. \fIcreateProc\fR may store an arbitrary one-word value at *\fImasterDataPtr\fR, which will be passed back to the image manager when other callbacks are invoked. Typically the value is a pointer to the master data structure for the image. .PP If \fIcreateProc\fR encounters an error, it should leave an error message in the interpreter result and return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR; otherwise it should return \fBTCL_OK\fR. .PP \fIcreateProc\fR should call \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR in order to set the size of the image and request an initial redisplay. .SS GETPROC .PP \fItypePtr->getProc\fR is invoked by Tk whenever a widget calls \fBTk_GetImage\fR to use a particular image. This procedure must match the following prototype: .CS typedef ClientData Tk_ImageGetProc( Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR, ClientData \fImasterData\fR); .CE The \fItkwin\fR argument identifies the window in which the image will be used and \fImasterData\fR is the value returned by \fIcreateProc\fR when the image master was created. \fIgetProc\fR will usually create a data structure for the new instance, including such things as the resources needed to display the image in the given window. \fIgetProc\fR returns a one-word token for the instance, which is typically the address of the instance data structure. Tk will pass this value back to the image manager when invoking its \fIdisplayProc\fR and \fIfreeProc\fR procedures. .SS DISPLAYPROC .PP \fItypePtr->displayProc\fR is invoked by Tk whenever an image needs to be displayed (i.e., whenever a widget calls \fBTk_RedrawImage\fR). \fIdisplayProc\fR must match the following prototype: .CS typedef void Tk_ImageDisplayProc( ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR, Display *\fIdisplay\fR, Drawable \fIdrawable\fR, int \fIimageX\fR, int \fIimageY\fR, int \fIwidth\fR, int \fIheight\fR, int \fIdrawableX\fR, int \fIdrawableY\fR); .CE The \fIinstanceData\fR will be the same as the value returned by \fIgetProc\fR when the instance was created. \fIdisplay\fR and \fIdrawable\fR indicate where to display the image; \fIdrawable\fR may be a pixmap rather than the window specified to \fIgetProc\fR (this is usually the case, since most widgets double-buffer their redisplay to get smoother visual effects). \fIimageX\fR, \fIimageY\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR identify the region of the image that must be redisplayed. This region will always be within the size of the image as specified in the most recent call to \fBTk_ImageChanged\fR. \fIdrawableX\fR and \fIdrawableY\fR indicate where in \fIdrawable\fR the image should be displayed; \fIdisplayProc\fR should display the given region of the image so that point (\fIimageX\fR, \fIimageY\fR) in the image appears at (\fIdrawableX\fR, \fIdrawableY\fR) in \fIdrawable\fR. .SS FREEPROC .PP \fItypePtr->freeProc\fR contains the address of a procedure that Tk will invoke when an image instance is released (i.e., when \fBTk_FreeImage\fR is invoked). This can happen, for example, when a widget is deleted or a image item in a canvas is deleted, or when the image displayed in a widget or canvas item is changed. \fIfreeProc\fR must match the following prototype: .CS typedef void Tk_ImageFreeProc( ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR, Display *\fIdisplay\fR); .CE The \fIinstanceData\fR will be the same as the value returned by \fIgetProc\fR when the instance was created, and \fIdisplay\fR is the display containing the window for the instance. \fIfreeProc\fR should release any resources associated with the image instance, since the instance will never be used again. .SS DELETEPROC .PP \fItypePtr->deleteProc\fR is a procedure that Tk invokes when an image is being deleted (i.e. when the \fBimage delete\fR command is invoked). Before invoking \fIdeleteProc\fR Tk will invoke \fIfreeProc\fR for each of the image's instances. \fIdeleteProc\fR must match the following prototype: .CS typedef void Tk_ImageDeleteProc( ClientData \fImasterData\fR); .CE The \fImasterData\fR argument will be the same as the value stored in \fI*masterDataPtr\fR by \fIcreateProc\fR when the image was created. \fIdeleteProc\fR should release any resources associated with the image. .SH TK_GETIMAGEMASTERDATA .PP The procedure \fBTk_GetImageMasterData\fR may be invoked to retrieve information about an image. For example, an image manager can use this procedure to locate its image master data for an image. If there exists an image named \fIname\fR in the interpreter given by \fIinterp\fR, then \fI*typePtrPtr\fR is filled in with type information for the image (the \fItypePtr\fR value passed to \fBTk_CreateImageType\fR when the image type was registered) and the return value is the ClientData value returned by the \fIcreateProc\fR when the image was created (this is typically a pointer to the image master data structure). If no such image exists then NULL is returned and NULL is stored at \fI*typePtrPtr\fR. .SH "LEGACY INTERFACE SUPPORT" In Tk 8.2 and earlier, the definition of \fBTk_ImageCreateProc\fR was incompatibly different, with the following prototype: .CS typedef int Tk_ImageCreateProc( Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, char *\fIname\fR, int \fIargc\fR, char **\fIargv\fR, Tk_ImageType *\fItypePtr\fR, Tk_ImageMaster \fImaster\fR, ClientData *\fImasterDataPtr\fR); .CE Legacy programs and libraries dating from those days may still contain code that defines extended Tk image types using the old interface. The Tk header file will still support this legacy interface if the code is compiled with the macro \fBUSE_OLD_IMAGE\fR defined. .PP When the \fBUSE_OLD_IMAGE\fR legacy support is enabled, you may see the routine \fBTk_InitImageArgs\fR in use. This was a migration tool used to create stub-enabled extensions that could be loaded into interps containing all versions of Tk 8.1 and later. Tk 8.5 no longer provides this routine, but uses a macro to convert any attempted calls of this routine into an empty comment. Any stub-enabled extension providing an extended image type via the legacy interface that is compiled against Tk 8.5 headers and linked against the Tk 8.5 stub library will produce a file that can be loaded only into interps with Tk 8.5 or later; that is, the normal stub-compatibility rules. If a developer needs to generate from such code a file that is loadable into interps with Tk 8.4 or earlier, they must use Tk 8.4 headers and stub libraries to do so. .PP Any new code written today should not make use of the legacy interfaces. Expect their support to go away in Tk 9. .SH "SEE ALSO" Tk_ImageChanged, Tk_GetImage, Tk_FreeImage, Tk_RedrawImage, Tk_SizeOfImage .SH KEYWORDS image manager, image type, instance, master 0707010003fcd3000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b600001a82000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002900000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteImage.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: DeleteImg.3,v 1.4 2007/01/05 00:00:49 nijtmans Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_DeleteImage 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_DeleteImage \- Destroy an image. .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_DeleteImage\fR(\fIinterp, name\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tcl_Interp *interp .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter for which the image was created. .AP "const char" *name in Name of the image. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_DeleteImage\fR deletes the image given by \fIinterp\fR and \fIname\fR, if there is one. All instances of that image will redisplay as empty regions. If the given image does not exist then the procedure has no effect. .SH KEYWORDS delete image, image manager 0707010003fcf1000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700001d71000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002900000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_HandleEvent.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1992 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: HandleEvent.3,v 1.4 1999/04/21 21:53:22 rjohnson Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_HandleEvent 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_HandleEvent \- invoke event handlers for window system events .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR(\fIeventPtr\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS XEvent *eventPtr .AP XEvent *eventPtr in Pointer to X event to dispatch to relevant handler(s). .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR is a lower-level procedure that deals with window events. It is called by \fBTcl_ServiceEvent\fR (and indirectly by \fBTk_DoOneEvent\fR), and in a few other cases within Tk. It makes callbacks to any window event handlers (created by calls to \fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR) that match \fIeventPtr\fR and then returns. In some cases it may be useful for an application to bypass the Tk event queue and call \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR directly instead of calling \fBTcl_QueueEvent\fR followed by \fBTcl_ServiceEvent\fR. .PP This procedure may be invoked recursively. For example, it is possible to invoke \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR recursively from a handler called by \fBTk_HandleEvent\fR. This sort of operation is useful in some modal situations, such as when a notifier has been popped up and an application wishes to wait for the user to click a button in the notifier before doing anything else. .SH KEYWORDS callback, event, handler, window 0707010003fd0e000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700001f04000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002600000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetClass.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: SetClass.3,v 1.2 1998/09/14 18:22:53 stanton Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_SetClass 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_SetClass, Tk_Class \- set or retrieve a window's class .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_SetClass\fR(\fItkwin, class\fR) .sp Tk_Uid \fBTk_Class\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window parent .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .AP char *class in New class name for window. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_SetClass\fR is called to associate a class with a particular window. The \fIclass\fR string identifies the type of the window; all windows with the same general class of behavior (button, menu, etc.) should have the same class. By convention all class names start with a capital letter, and there exists a Tcl command with the same name as each class (except all in lower-case) which can be used to create and manipulate windows of that class. A window's class string is initialized to NULL when the window is created. .PP For main windows, Tk automatically propagates the name and class to the WM_CLASS property used by window managers. This happens either when a main window is actually created (e.g. in \fBTk_MakeWindowExist\fR), or when \fBTk_SetClass\fR is called, whichever occurs later. If a main window has not been assigned a class then Tk will not set the WM_CLASS property for the window. .PP \fBTk_Class\fR is a macro that returns the current value of \fItkwin\fR's class. The value is returned as a Tk_Uid, which may be used just like a string pointer but also has the properties of a unique identifier (see the manual entry for \fBTk_GetUid\fR for details). If \fItkwin\fR has not yet been given a class, then \fBTk_Class\fR will return NULL. .SH KEYWORDS class, unique identifier, window, window manager 0707010003fd06000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b6000024ce000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000003000000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_PostscriptFontName.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: FontId.3,v 1.11 2008/02/04 09:53:23 dkf Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_FontId 3 8.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_FontId, Tk_GetFontMetrics, Tk_PostscriptFontName \- accessor functions for fonts .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Font \fBTk_FontId(\fItkfont\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_GetFontMetrics(\fItkfont, fmPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_PostscriptFontName(\fItkfont, dsPtr\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_FontMetrics *dsPtr .AP Tk_Font tkfont in Opaque font token being queried. Must have been returned by a previous call to \fBTk_GetFont\fR. .AP Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr out Pointer to structure in which the font metrics for \fItkfont\fR will be stored. See \fBDATA STRUCTURES\fR below for details. .AP Tcl_DString *dsPtr out Pointer to an initialized \fBTcl_DString\fR to which the name of the Postscript font that corresponds to \fItkfont\fR will be appended. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP Given a \fItkfont\fR, \fBTk_FontId\fR returns the token that should be selected into an XGCValues structure in order to construct a graphics context that can be used to draw text in the specified font. .PP \fBTk_GetFontMetrics\fR computes the ascent, descent, and linespace of the \fItkfont\fR in pixels and stores those values in the structure pointer to by \fIfmPtr\fR. These values can be used in computations such as to space multiple lines of text, to align the baselines of text in different fonts, and to vertically align text in a given region. See the documentation for the \fBfont\fR command for definitions of the terms ascent, descent, and linespace, used in font metrics. .PP \fBTk_PostscriptFontName\fR maps a \fItkfont\fR to the corresponding Postscript font name that should be used when printing. The return value is the size in points of the \fItkfont\fR and the Postscript font name is appended to \fIdsPtr\fR. \fIDsPtr\fR must refer to an initialized \fBTcl_DString\fR. Given a .QW reasonable Postscript printer, the following screen font families should print correctly: .IP \fBAvant Garde\fR, \fBArial\fR, \fBBookman\fR, \fBCourier\fR, \fBCourier New\fR, \fBGeneva\fR, \fBHelvetica\fR, \fBMonaco\fR, \fBNew Century Schoolbook\fR, \fBNew York\fR, \fBPalatino\fR, \fBSymbol\fR, \fBTimes\fR, \fBTimes New Roman\fR, \fBZapf Chancery\fR, and \fBZapf Dingbats\fR. .PP Any other font families may not print correctly because the computed Postscript font name may be incorrect or not exist on the printer. .SH "DATA STRUCTURES" The \fBTk_FontMetrics\fR data structure is used by \fBTk_GetFontMetrics\fR to return information about a font and is defined as follows: .CS typedef struct Tk_FontMetrics { int \fIascent\fR; int \fIdescent\fR; int \fIlinespace\fR; } Tk_FontMetrics; .CE .PP The \fIascent\fR field is the amount in pixels that the tallest letter sticks up above the baseline, plus any extra blank space added by the designer of the font. .PP The \fIdescent\fR is the largest amount in pixels that any letter sticks below the baseline, plus any extra blank space added by the designer of the font. .PP The \fIlinespace\fR is the sum of the ascent and descent. How far apart two lines of text in the same font should be placed so that none of the characters in one line overlap any of the characters in the other line. .SH "SEE ALSO" font(n), MeasureChar(3) .SH KEYWORDS font, measurement, Postscript 0707010003fce2000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b7000021fc000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002300000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetGC.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetGC.3,v 1.2 1998/09/14 18:22:49 stanton Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_GetGC 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetGC, Tk_FreeGC \- maintain database of read-only graphics contexts .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp GC \fBTk_GetGC\fR(\fItkwin, valueMask, valuePtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_FreeGC(\fIdisplay, gc\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "unsigned long" valueMask .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window in which the graphics context will be used. .AP "unsigned long" valueMask in Mask of bits (such as \fBGCForeground\fR or \fBGCStipple\fR) indicating which fields of \fI*valuePtr\fR are valid. .AP XGCValues *valuePtr in Pointer to structure describing the desired values for the graphics context. .AP Display *display in Display for which \fIgc\fR was allocated. .AP GC gc in X identifier for graphics context that is no longer needed. Must have been allocated by \fBTk_GetGC\fR. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_GetGC\fR and \fBTk_FreeGC\fR manage a collection of graphics contexts being used by an application. The procedures allow graphics contexts to be shared, thereby avoiding the server overhead that would be incurred if a separate GC were created for each use. \fBTk_GetGC\fR takes arguments describing the desired graphics context and returns an X identifier for a GC that fits the description. The graphics context that is returned will have default values in all of the fields not specified explicitly by \fIvalueMask\fR and \fIvaluePtr\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetGC\fR maintains a database of all the graphics contexts it has created. Whenever possible, a call to \fBTk_GetGC\fR will return an existing graphics context rather than creating a new one. This approach can substantially reduce server overhead, so \fBTk_GetGC\fR should generally be used in preference to the Xlib procedure \fBXCreateGC\fR, which creates a new graphics context on each call. .PP Since the return values of \fBTk_GetGC\fR are shared, callers should never modify the graphics contexts returned by \fBTk_GetGC\fR. If a graphics context must be modified dynamically, then it should be created by calling \fBXCreateGC\fR instead of \fBTk_GetGC\fR. .PP When a graphics context is no longer needed, \fBTk_FreeGC\fR should be called to release it. There should be exactly one call to \fBTk_FreeGC\fR for each call to \fBTk_GetGC\fR. When a graphics context is no longer in use anywhere (i.e. it has been freed as many times as it has been gotten) \fBTk_FreeGC\fR will release it to the X server and delete it from the database. .SH KEYWORDS graphics context 0707010003fd12000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b800001ba0000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002900000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_StrictMotif.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: StrictMotif.3,v 1.6 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_StrictMotif 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_StrictMotif \- Return value of tk_strictMotif variable .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp int \fBTk_StrictMotif\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window tkwin .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This procedure returns the current value of the \fBtk_strictMotif\fR variable in the interpreter associated with \fItkwin\fR's application. The value is returned as an integer that is either 0 or 1. 1 means that strict Motif compliance has been requested, so anything that is not part of the Motif specification should be avoided. 0 means that .QW Motif-like is good enough, and extra features are welcome. .PP This procedure uses a link to the Tcl variable to provide much faster access to the variable's value than could be had by calling \fBTcl_GetVar\fR. .SH KEYWORDS Motif compliance, tk_strictMotif variable 0707010003fcc2000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b500004cdb000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000003200000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1993 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: 3DBorder.3,v 1.11 2007/12/13 15:23:42 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj, Tk_Get3DBorder, Tk_Get3DBorderFromObj, Tk_Draw3DRectangle, Tk_Fill3DRectangle, Tk_Draw3DPolygon, Tk_Fill3DPolygon, Tk_3DVerticalBevel, Tk_3DHorizontalBevel, Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder, Tk_NameOf3DBorder, Tk_3DBorderColor, Tk_3DBorderGC, Tk_Free3DBorderFromObj, Tk_Free3DBorder \- draw borders with three-dimensional appearance .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Tk_3DBorder \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp Tk_3DBorder \fBTk_Get3DBorder(\fIinterp, tkwin, colorName\fB)\fR .sp Tk_3DBorder \fBTk_Get3DBorderFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp void \fBTk_Draw3DRectangle(\fItkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height, borderWidth, relief\fB)\fR .sp void \fBTk_Fill3DRectangle(\fItkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height, borderWidth, relief\fB)\fR .sp void \fBTk_Draw3DPolygon(\fItkwin, drawable, border, pointPtr, numPoints, polyBorderWidth, leftRelief\fB)\fR .sp void \fBTk_Fill3DPolygon(\fItkwin, drawable, border, pointPtr, numPoints, polyBorderWidth, leftRelief\fB)\fR .sp void \fBTk_3DVerticalBevel\fR(\fItkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height, leftBevel, relief\fB)\fR .sp void \fBTk_3DHorizontalBevel\fR(\fItkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height, leftIn, rightIn, topBevel, relief\fB)\fR .sp void \fBTk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(\fItkwin, border\fB)\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOf3DBorder(\fIborder\fB)\fR .sp XColor * \fBTk_3DBorderColor(\fIborder\fB)\fR .sp GC * \fBTk_3DBorderGC(\fItkwin, border, which\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_Free3DBorderFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_Free3DBorder(\fIborder\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tk_3DBorder" borderWidth .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window (for all procedures except \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR, must be the window for which the border was allocated). .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in Pointer to object whose value describes color corresponding to background (flat areas). Illuminated edges will be brighter than this and shadowed edges will be darker than this. .AP char *colorName in Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except value is supplied as a string rather than an object. .AP Drawable drawable in X token for window or pixmap; indicates where graphics are to be drawn. Must either be the X window for \fItkwin\fR or a pixmap with the same screen and depth as \fItkwin\fR. .AP Tk_3DBorder border in Token for border previously allocated in call to \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR. .AP int x in X-coordinate of upper-left corner of rectangle describing border or bevel, in pixels. .AP int y in Y-coordinate of upper-left corner of rectangle describing border or bevel, in pixels. .AP int width in Width of rectangle describing border or bevel, in pixels. .AP int height in Height of rectangle describing border or bevel, in pixels. .AP int borderWidth in Width of border in pixels. Positive means border is inside rectangle given by \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, \fIheight\fR, negative means border is outside rectangle. .AP int relief in Indicates 3-D position of interior of object relative to exterior; should be \fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_SUNKEN\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_GROOVE\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_SOLID\fR, or \fBTK_RELIEF_RIDGE\fR (may also be \fBTK_RELIEF_FLAT\fR for \fBTk_Fill3DRectangle\fR). .AP XPoint *pointPtr in Pointer to array of points describing the set of vertices in a polygon. The polygon need not be closed (it will be closed automatically if it is not). .AP int numPoints in Number of points at \fI*pointPtr\fR. .AP int polyBorderWidth in Width of border in pixels. If positive, border is drawn to left of trajectory given by \fIpointPtr\fR; if negative, border is drawn to right of trajectory. If \fIleftRelief\fR is \fBTK_RELIEF_GROOVE\fR or \fBTK_RELIEF_RIDGE\fR then the border is centered on the trajectory. .AP int leftRelief in Height of left side of polygon's path relative to right. \fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR means left side should appear higher and \fBTK_RELIEF_SUNKEN\fR means right side should appear higher; \fBTK_RELIEF_GROOVE\fR and \fBTK_RELIEF_RIDGE\fR mean the obvious things. For \fBTk_Fill3DPolygon\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_FLAT\fR may also be specified to indicate no difference in height. .AP int leftBevel in Non-zero means this bevel forms the left side of the object; zero means it forms the right side. .AP int leftIn in Non-zero means that the left edge of the horizontal bevel angles in, so that the bottom of the edge is farther to the right than the top. Zero means the edge angles out, so that the bottom is farther to the left than the top. .AP int rightIn in Non-zero means that the right edge of the horizontal bevel angles in, so that the bottom of the edge is farther to the left than the top. Zero means the edge angles out, so that the bottom is farther to the right than the top. .AP int topBevel in Non-zero means this bevel forms the top side of the object; zero means it forms the bottom side. .AP int which in Specifies which of the border's graphics contexts is desired. Must be \fBTK_3D_FLAT_GC\fR, \fBTK_3D_LIGHT_GC\fR, or \fBTK_3D_DARK_GC\fR. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These procedures provide facilities for drawing window borders in a way that produces a three-dimensional appearance. \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR allocates colors and Pixmaps needed to draw a border in the window given by the \fItkwin\fR argument. The value of \fIobjPtr\fR is a standard Tk color name that determines the border colors. The color indicated by \fIobjPtr\fR will not actually be used in the border; it indicates the background color for the window (i.e. a color for flat surfaces). The illuminated portions of the border will appear brighter than indicated by \fIobjPtr\fR, and the shadowed portions of the border will appear darker than \fIobjPtr\fR. .PP \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR returns a token that may be used in later calls to \fBTk_Draw3DRectangle\fR. If an error occurs in allocating information for the border (e.g. a bogus color name was given) then NULL is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp->result\fR. If it returns successfully, \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR caches information about the return value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR and \fItkwin\fR. .PP \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR is identical to \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR except that the color is specified with a string instead of an object. This prevents \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR from caching the return value, so \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR is less efficient than \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR. .PP \fBTk_Get3DBorderFromObj\fR returns the token for an existing border, given the window and color name used to create the border. \fBTk_Get3DBorderFromObj\fR does not actually create the border; it must already have been created with a previous call to \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR or \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR. The return value is cached in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to \fBTk_Get3DBorderFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR and \fItkwin\fR. .PP Once a border structure has been created, \fBTk_Draw3DRectangle\fR may be invoked to draw the border. The \fItkwin\fR argument specifies the window for which the border was allocated, and \fIdrawable\fR specifies a window or pixmap in which the border is to be drawn. \fIDrawable\fR need not refer to the same window as \fItkwin\fR, but it must refer to a compatible pixmap or window: one associated with the same screen and with the same depth as \fItkwin\fR. The \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR arguments define the bounding box of the border region within \fIdrawable\fR (usually \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR are zero and \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR are the dimensions of the window), and \fIborderWidth\fR specifies the number of pixels actually occupied by the border. The \fIrelief\fR argument indicates which of several three-dimensional effects is desired: \fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR means that the interior of the rectangle should appear raised relative to the exterior of the rectangle, and \fBTK_RELIEF_SUNKEN\fR means that the interior should appear depressed. \fBTK_RELIEF_GROOVE\fR and \fBTK_RELIEF_RIDGE\fR mean that there should appear to be a groove or ridge around the exterior of the rectangle. .PP \fBTk_Fill3DRectangle\fR is somewhat like \fBTk_Draw3DRectangle\fR except that it first fills the rectangular area with the background color (one corresponding to the color used to create \fIborder\fR). Then it calls \fBTk_Draw3DRectangle\fR to draw a border just inside the outer edge of the rectangular area. The argument \fIrelief\fR indicates the desired effect (\fBTK_RELIEF_FLAT\fR means no border should be drawn; all that happens is to fill the rectangle with the background color). .PP The procedure \fBTk_Draw3DPolygon\fR may be used to draw more complex shapes with a three-dimensional appearance. The \fIpointPtr\fR and \fInumPoints\fR arguments define a trajectory, \fIpolyBorderWidth\fR indicates how wide the border should be (and on which side of the trajectory to draw it), and \fIleftRelief\fR indicates which side of the trajectory should appear raised. \fBTk_Draw3DPolygon\fR draws a border around the given trajectory using the colors from \fIborder\fR to produce a three-dimensional appearance. If the trajectory is non-self-intersecting, the appearance will be a raised or sunken polygon shape. The trajectory may be self-intersecting, although it's not clear how useful this is. .PP \fBTk_Fill3DPolygon\fR is to \fBTk_Draw3DPolygon\fR what \fBTk_Fill3DRectangle\fR is to \fBTk_Draw3DRectangle\fR: it fills the polygonal area with the background color from \fIborder\fR, then calls \fBTk_Draw3DPolygon\fR to draw a border around the area (unless \fIleftRelief\fR is \fBTK_RELIEF_FLAT\fR; in this case no border is drawn). .PP The procedures \fBTk_3DVerticalBevel\fR and \fBTk_3DHorizontalBevel\fR provide lower-level drawing primitives that are used by procedures such as \fBTk_Draw3DRectangle\fR. These procedures are also useful in their own right for drawing rectilinear border shapes. \fBTk_3DVerticalBevel\fR draws a vertical beveled edge, such as the left or right side of a rectangle, and \fBTk_3DHorizontalBevel\fR draws a horizontal beveled edge, such as the top or bottom of a rectangle. Each procedure takes \fIx\fR, \fIy\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR arguments that describe the rectangular area of the beveled edge (e.g., \fIwidth\fR is the border width for \fBTk_3DVerticalBevel\fR). The \fIleftBorder\fR and \fItopBorder\fR arguments indicate the position of the border relative to the .QW inside of the object, and \fIrelief\fR indicates the relief of the inside of the object relative to the outside. \fBTk_3DVerticalBevel\fR just draws a rectangular region. \fBTk_3DHorizontalBevel\fR draws a trapezoidal region to generate mitered corners; it should be called after \fBTk_3DVerticalBevel\fR (otherwise \fBTk_3DVerticalBevel\fR will overwrite the mitering in the corner). The \fIleftIn\fR and \fIrightIn\fR arguments to \fBTk_3DHorizontalBevel\fR describe the mitering at the corners; a value of 1 means that the bottom edge of the trapezoid will be shorter than the top, 0 means it will be longer. For example, to draw a rectangular border the top bevel should be drawn with 1 for both \fIleftIn\fR and \fIrightIn\fR, and the bottom bevel should be drawn with 0 for both arguments. .PP The procedure \fBTk_SetBackgroundFromBorder\fR will modify the background pixel and/or pixmap of \fItkwin\fR to produce a result compatible with \fIborder\fR. For color displays, the resulting background will just be the color specified when \fIborder\fR was created; for monochrome displays, the resulting background will be a light stipple pattern, in order to distinguish the background from the illuminated portion of the border. .PP Given a token for a border, the procedure \fBTk_NameOf3DBorder\fR will return the color name that was used to create the border. .PP The procedure \fBTk_3DBorderColor\fR returns the XColor structure that will be used for flat surfaces drawn for its \fIborder\fR argument by procedures like \fBTk_Fill3DRectangle\fR. The return value corresponds to the color name that was used to create the border. The XColor, and its associated pixel value, will remain allocated as long as \fIborder\fR exists. .PP The procedure \fBTk_3DBorderGC\fR returns one of the X graphics contexts that are used to draw the border. The argument \fIwhich\fR selects which one of the three possible GC's: \fBTK_3D_FLAT_GC\fR returns the context used for flat surfaces, \fBTK_3D_LIGHT_GC\fR returns the context for light shadows, and \fBTK_3D_DARK_GC\fR returns the context for dark shadows. .PP When a border is no longer needed, \fBTk_Free3DBorderFromObj\fR or \fBTk_Free3DBorder\fR should be called to release the resources associated with it. For \fBTk_Free3DBorderFromObj\fR the border to release is specified with the window and color name used to create the border; for \fBTk_Free3DBorder\fR the border to release is specified with the Tk_3DBorder token for the border. There should be exactly one call to \fBTk_Free3DBorderFromObj\fR or \fBTk_Free3DBorder\fR for each call to \fBTk_Alloc3DBorderFromObj\fR or \fBTk_Get3DBorder\fR. .SH KEYWORDS 3D, background, border, color, depressed, illumination, object, polygon, raised, shadow, three-dimensional effect 0707010003fce8000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700001cac000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002700000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetOption.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetOption.3,v 1.4 2007/01/05 00:00:48 nijtmans Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_GetOption 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetOption \- retrieve an option from the option database .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Tk_Uid \fBTk_GetOption\fR(\fItkwin, name, class\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window *class .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .AP "const char" *name in Name of desired option. .AP "const char" *class in Class of desired option. Null means there is no class for this option; do lookup based on name only. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This procedure is invoked to retrieve an option from the database associated with \fItkwin\fR's main window. If there is an option for \fItkwin\fR that matches the given \fIname\fR or \fIclass\fR, then it is returned in the form of a Tk_Uid. If multiple options match \fIname\fR and \fIclass\fR, then the highest-priority one is returned. If no option matches, then NULL is returned. .PP \fBTk_GetOption\fR caches options related to \fItkwin\fR so that successive calls for the same \fItkwin\fR will execute much more quickly than successive calls for different windows. .SH KEYWORDS class, name, option, retrieve 0707010003fcff000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b600003f0a000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002a00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfBitmap.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetBitmap.3,v 1.14 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_AllocBitmapFromObj, Tk_GetBitmap, Tk_GetBitmapFromObj, Tk_DefineBitmap, Tk_NameOfBitmap, Tk_SizeOfBitmap, Tk_FreeBitmapFromObj, Tk_FreeBitmap \- maintain database of single-plane pixmaps .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Pixmap \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp Pixmap \fBTk_GetBitmap(\fIinterp, tkwin, info\fB)\fR .sp Pixmap \fBTk_GetBitmapFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_DefineBitmap(\fIinterp, name, source, width, height\fB)\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfBitmap(\fIdisplay, bitmap\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_SizeOfBitmap(\fIdisplay, bitmap, widthPtr, heightPtr\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_FreeBitmapFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_FreeBitmap(\fIdisplay, bitmap\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "unsigned long" *pixelPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting; if NULL then no error message is left after errors. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window in which the bitmap will be used. .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out String value describes desired bitmap; internal rep will be modified to cache pointer to corresponding Pixmap. .AP "const char" *info in Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except description of bitmap is passed as a string and resulting Pixmap is not cached. .AP "const char" *name in Name for new bitmap to be defined. .AP "const char" *source in Data for bitmap, in standard bitmap format. Must be stored in static memory whose value will never change. .AP "int" width in Width of bitmap. .AP "int" height in Height of bitmap. .AP "int" *widthPtr out Pointer to word to fill in with \fIbitmap\fR's width. .AP "int" *heightPtr out Pointer to word to fill in with \fIbitmap\fR's height. .AP Display *display in Display for which \fIbitmap\fR was allocated. .AP Pixmap bitmap in Identifier for a bitmap allocated by \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR or \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These procedures manage a collection of bitmaps (one-plane pixmaps) being used by an application. The procedures allow bitmaps to be re-used efficiently, thereby avoiding server overhead, and also allow bitmaps to be named with character strings. .PP \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR returns a Pixmap identifier for a bitmap that matches the description in \fIobjPtr\fR and is suitable for use in \fItkwin\fR. It re-uses an existing bitmap, if possible, and creates a new one otherwise. \fIObjPtr\fR's value must have one of the following forms: .TP 20 \fB@\fIfileName\fR \fIFileName\fR must be the name of a file containing a bitmap description in the standard X11 or X10 format. .TP 20 \fIname\fR \fIName\fR must be the name of a bitmap defined previously with a call to \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR. The following names are pre-defined by Tk: .RS .TP 12 \fBerror\fR The international .QW don't symbol: a circle with a diagonal line across it. .TP 12 \fBgray75\fR 75% gray: a checkerboard pattern where three out of four bits are on. .TP 12 \fBgray50\fR 50% gray: a checkerboard pattern where every other bit is on. .TP 12 \fBgray25\fR 25% gray: a checkerboard pattern where one out of every four bits is on. .TP 12 \fBgray12\fR 12.5% gray: a pattern where one-eighth of the bits are on, consisting of every fourth pixel in every other row. .TP 12 \fBhourglass\fR An hourglass symbol. .TP 12 \fBinfo\fR A large letter .QW i . .TP 12 \fBquesthead\fR The silhouette of a human head, with a question mark in it. .TP 12 \fBquestion\fR A large question-mark. .TP 12 \fBwarning\fR A large exclamation point. .PP In addition, the following pre-defined names are available only on the \fBMacintosh\fR platform: .TP 12 \fBdocument\fR A generic document. .TP 12 \fBstationery\fR Document stationery. .TP 12 \fBedition\fR The \fIedition\fR symbol. .TP 12 \fBapplication\fR Generic application icon. .TP 12 \fBaccessory\fR A desk accessory. .TP 12 \fBfolder\fR Generic folder icon. .TP 12 \fBpfolder\fR A locked folder. .TP 12 \fBtrash\fR A trash can. .TP 12 \fBfloppy\fR A floppy disk. .TP 12 \fBramdisk\fR A floppy disk with chip. .TP 12 \fBcdrom\fR A cd disk icon. .TP 12 \fBpreferences\fR A folder with prefs symbol. .TP 12 \fBquerydoc\fR A database document icon. .TP 12 \fBstop\fR A stop sign. .TP 12 \fBnote\fR A face with balloon words. .TP 12 \fBcaution\fR A triangle with an exclamation point. .RE .LP Under normal conditions, \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR returns an identifier for the requested bitmap. If an error occurs in creating the bitmap, such as when \fIobjPtr\fR refers to a non-existent file, then \fBNone\fR is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL. \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR caches information about the return value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to procedures such as \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetBitmapFromObj\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR is identical to \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR except that the description of the bitmap is specified with a string instead of an object. This prevents \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR from caching the return value, so \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR is less efficient than \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetBitmapFromObj\fR returns the token for an existing bitmap, given the window and description used to create the bitmap. \fBTk_GetBitmapFromObj\fR does not actually create the bitmap; the bitmap must already have been created with a previous call to \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR or \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. The return value is cached in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to \fBTk_GetBitmapFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR and \fItkwin\fR. .PP \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR associates a name with in-memory bitmap data so that the name can be used in later calls to \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR or \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. The \fInameId\fR argument gives a name for the bitmap; it must not previously have been used in a call to \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR. The arguments \fIsource\fR, \fIwidth\fR, and \fIheight\fR describe the bitmap. \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR; if an error occurs (e.g. a bitmap named \fInameId\fR has already been defined) then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp->result\fR. Note: \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR expects the memory pointed to by \fIsource\fR to be static: \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR does not make a private copy of this memory, but uses the bytes pointed to by \fIsource\fR later in calls to \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR or \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. .PP Typically \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR is used by \fB#include\fR-ing a bitmap file directly into a C program and then referencing the variables defined by the file. For example, suppose there exists a file \fBstip.bitmap\fR, which was created by the \fBbitmap\fR program and contains a stipple pattern. The following code uses \fBTk_DefineBitmap\fR to define a new bitmap named \fBfoo\fR: .CS Pixmap bitmap; #include "stip.bitmap" Tk_DefineBitmap(interp, "foo", stip_bits, stip_width, stip_height); \&... bitmap = Tk_GetBitmap(interp, tkwin, "foo"); .CE This code causes the bitmap file to be read at compile-time and incorporates the bitmap information into the program's executable image. The same bitmap file could be read at run-time using \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR: .CS Pixmap bitmap; bitmap = Tk_GetBitmap(interp, tkwin, "@stip.bitmap"); .CE The second form is a bit more flexible (the file could be modified after the program has been compiled, or a different string could be provided to read a different file), but it is a little slower and requires the bitmap file to exist separately from the program. .PP Tk maintains a database of all the bitmaps that are currently in use. Whenever possible, it will return an existing bitmap rather than creating a new one. When a bitmap is no longer used, Tk will release it automatically. This approach can substantially reduce server overhead, so \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR should generally be used in preference to Xlib procedures like \fBXReadBitmapFile\fR. .PP The bitmaps returned by \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR are shared, so callers should never modify them. If a bitmap must be modified dynamically, then it should be created by calling Xlib procedures such as \fBXReadBitmapFile\fR or \fBXCreatePixmap\fR directly. .PP The procedure \fBTk_NameOfBitmap\fR is roughly the inverse of \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. Given an X Pixmap argument, it returns the textual description that was passed to \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR when the bitmap was created. \fIBitmap\fR must have been the return value from a previous call to \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR or \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. .PP \fBTk_SizeOfBitmap\fR returns the dimensions of its \fIbitmap\fR argument in the words pointed to by the \fIwidthPtr\fR and \fIheightPtr\fR arguments. As with \fBTk_NameOfBitmap\fR, \fIbitmap\fR must have been created by \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR or \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. .PP When a bitmap is no longer needed, \fBTk_FreeBitmapFromObj\fR or \fBTk_FreeBitmap\fR should be called to release it. For \fBTk_FreeBitmapFromObj\fR the bitmap to release is specified with the same information used to create it; for \fBTk_FreeBitmap\fR the bitmap to release is specified with its Pixmap token. There should be exactly one call to \fBTk_FreeBitmapFromObj\fR or \fBTk_FreeBitmap\fR for each call to \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR or \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR. .SH BUGS In determining whether an existing bitmap can be used to satisfy a new request, \fBTk_AllocBitmapFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR consider only the immediate value of the string description. For example, when a file name is passed to \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR, \fBTk_GetBitmap\fR will assume it is safe to re-use an existing bitmap created from the same file name: it will not check to see whether the file itself has changed, or whether the current directory has changed, thereby causing the name to refer to a different file. .SH KEYWORDS bitmap, pixmap 0707010003fce9000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b70000247f000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002e00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetPixelsFromObj.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetPixels.3,v 1.8 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_GetPixelsFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetPixelsFromObj, Tk_GetPixels, Tk_GetMMFromObj, Tk_GetScreenMM \- translate between strings and screen units .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp int \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr, intPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetPixels(\fIinterp, tkwin, string, intPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetMMFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr, doublePtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetScreenMM(\fIinterp, tkwin, string, doublePtr\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tcl_Interp" *joinPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window whose screen geometry determines the conversion between absolute units and pixels. .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out String value specifies a distance on the screen; internal rep will be modified to cache converted distance. .AP "const char" *string in Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except specification of distance is passed as a string. .AP int *intPtr out Pointer to location in which to store converted distance in pixels. .AP double *doublePtr out Pointer to location in which to store converted distance in millimeters. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These procedures take as argument a specification of distance on the screen (\fIobjPtr\fR or \fIstring\fR) and compute the corresponding distance either in integer pixels or floating-point millimeters. In either case, \fIobjPtr\fR or \fIstring\fR specifies a screen distance as a floating-point number followed by one of the following characters that indicates units: .TP The number specifies a distance in pixels. .TP \fBc\fR The number specifies a distance in centimeters on the screen. .TP \fBi\fR The number specifies a distance in inches on the screen. .TP \fBm\fR The number specifies a distance in millimeters on the screen. .TP \fBp\fR The number specifies a distance in printer's points (1/72 inch) on the screen. .PP \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR converts the value of \fIobjPtr\fR to the nearest even number of pixels and stores that value at \fI*intPtr\fR. It returns \fBTCL_OK\fR under normal circumstances. If an error occurs (e.g. \fIobjPtr\fR contains a number followed by a character that is not one of the ones above) then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL. \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR caches information about the return value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetPixels\fR is identical to \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR except that the screen distance is specified with a string instead of an object. This prevents \fBTk_GetPixels\fR from caching the return value, so \fBTk_GetAnchor\fR is less efficient than \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetMMFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetScreenMM\fR are similar to \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetPixels\fR (respectively) except that they convert the screen distance to millimeters and store a double-precision floating-point result at \fI*doublePtr\fR. .SH KEYWORDS centimeters, convert, inches, millimeters, pixels, points, screen units 0707010003fcd0000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b600003125000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002b00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DeleteBinding.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: BindTable.3,v 1.5 2007/01/05 00:00:49 nijtmans Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_CreateBindingTable 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_CreateBindingTable, Tk_DeleteBindingTable, Tk_CreateBinding, Tk_DeleteBinding, Tk_GetBinding, Tk_GetAllBindings, Tk_DeleteAllBindings, Tk_BindEvent \- invoke scripts in response to X events .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Tk_BindingTable \fBTk_CreateBindingTable(\fIinterp\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_DeleteBindingTable(\fIbindingTable\fB)\fR .sp unsigned long \fBTk_CreateBinding(\fIinterp, bindingTable, object, eventString, script, append\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_DeleteBinding(\fIinterp, bindingTable, object, eventString\fB)\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_GetBinding(\fIinterp, bindingTable, object, eventString\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_GetAllBindings(\fIinterp, bindingTable, object\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_DeleteAllBindings(\fIbindingTable, object\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_BindEvent(\fIbindingTable, eventPtr, tkwin, numObjects, objectPtr\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_BindingTable bindingTable .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use when invoking bindings in binding table. Also used for returning results and errors from binding procedures. .AP Tk_BindingTable bindingTable in Token for binding table; must have been returned by some previous call to \fBTk_CreateBindingTable\fR. .AP ClientData object in Identifies object with which binding is associated. .AP "const char" *eventString in String describing event sequence. .AP char *script in Tcl script to invoke when binding triggers. .AP int append in Non-zero means append \fIscript\fR to existing script for binding, if any; zero means replace existing script with new one. .AP XEvent *eventPtr in X event to match against bindings in \fIbindingTable\fR. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Identifier for any window on the display where the event occurred. Used to find display-related information such as key maps. .AP int numObjects in Number of object identifiers pointed to by \fIobjectPtr\fR. .AP ClientData *objectPtr in Points to an array of object identifiers: bindings will be considered for each of these objects in order from first to last. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These procedures provide a general-purpose mechanism for creating and invoking bindings. Bindings are organized in terms of \fIbinding tables\fR. A binding table consists of a collection of bindings plus a history of recent events. Within a binding table, bindings are associated with \fIobjects\fR. The meaning of an object is defined by clients of the binding package. For example, Tk keeps uses one binding table to hold all of the bindings created by the \fBbind\fR command. For this table, objects are pointers to strings such as window names, class names, or other binding tags such as \fBall\fR. Tk also keeps a separate binding table for each canvas widget, which manages bindings created by the canvas's \fBbind\fR widget command; within this table, an object is either a pointer to the internal structure for a canvas item or a Tk_Uid identifying a tag. .PP The procedure \fBTk_CreateBindingTable\fR creates a new binding table and associates \fIinterp\fR with it (when bindings in the table are invoked, the scripts will be evaluated in \fIinterp\fR). \fBTk_CreateBindingTable\fR returns a token for the table, which must be used in calls to other procedures such as \fBTk_CreateBinding\fR or \fBTk_BindEvent\fR. .PP \fBTk_DeleteBindingTable\fR frees all of the state associated with a binding table. Once it returns the caller should not use the \fIbindingTable\fR token again. .PP \fBTk_CreateBinding\fR adds a new binding to an existing table. The \fIobject\fR argument identifies the object with which the binding is to be associated, and it may be any one-word value. Typically it is a pointer to a string or data structure. The \fIeventString\fR argument identifies the event or sequence of events for the binding; see the documentation for the \fBbind\fR command for a description of its format. \fIscript\fR is the Tcl script to be evaluated when the binding triggers. \fIappend\fR indicates what to do if there already exists a binding for \fIobject\fR and \fIeventString\fR: if \fIappend\fR is zero then \fIscript\fR replaces the old script; if \fIappend\fR is non-zero then the new script is appended to the old one. \fBTk_CreateBinding\fR returns an X event mask for all the events associated with the bindings. This information may be useful to invoke \fBXSelectInput\fR to select relevant events, or to disallow the use of certain events in bindings. If an error occurred while creating the binding (e.g., \fIeventString\fR refers to a non-existent event), then 0 is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp->result\fR. .PP \fBTk_DeleteBinding\fR removes from \fIbindingTable\fR the binding given by \fIobject\fR and \fIeventString\fR, if such a binding exists. \fBTk_DeleteBinding\fR always returns \fBTCL_OK\fR. In some cases it may reset \fIinterp->result\fR to the default empty value. .PP \fBTk_GetBinding\fR returns a pointer to the script associated with \fIeventString\fR and \fIobject\fR in \fIbindingTable\fR. If no such binding exists then NULL is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp->result\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetAllBindings\fR returns in \fIinterp->result\fR a list of all the event strings for which there are bindings in \fIbindingTable\fR associated with \fIobject\fR. If there are no bindings for \fIobject\fR then an empty string is returned in \fIinterp->result\fR. .PP \fBTk_DeleteAllBindings\fR deletes all of the bindings in \fIbindingTable\fR that are associated with \fIobject\fR. .PP \fBTk_BindEvent\fR is called to process an event. It makes a copy of the event in an internal history list associated with the binding table, then it checks for bindings that match the event. \fBTk_BindEvent\fR processes each of the objects pointed to by \fIobjectPtr\fR in turn. For each object, it finds all the bindings that match the current event history, selects the most specific binding using the priority mechanism described in the documentation for \fBbind\fR, and invokes the script for that binding. If there are no matching bindings for a particular object, then the object is skipped. \fBTk_BindEvent\fR continues through all of the objects, handling exceptions such as errors, \fBbreak\fR, and \fBcontinue\fR as described in the documentation for \fBbind\fR. .SH KEYWORDS binding, event, object, script 0707010003fd0d000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700001b11000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002900000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_SetCaretPos.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 2002 ActiveState Corporation. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: SetCaret.3,v 1.1 2002/06/17 20:09:01 hobbs Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_SetCaretPos 3 8.4 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_SetCaretPos \- set the display caret location .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp int \fBTk_SetCaretPos\fR(\fItkwin, x, y, height\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .AP int x in Window-relative x coordinate. .AP int y in Window-relative y coordinate. .AP int h in Height of the caret in the window. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_SetCaretPos\fR sets the caret location for the display of the specified Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR. The caret is the per-display cursor location used for indicating global focus (e.g. to comply with Microsoft Accessibility guidelines), as well as for location of the over-the-spot XIM (X Input Methods) or Windows IME windows. .SH KEYWORDS caret, cursor 0707010003fcc5000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b60000309a000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002900000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_CanvasTkwin.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: CanvTkwin.3,v 1.7 2007/12/13 15:23:42 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_CanvasTkwin 3 4.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_CanvasTkwin, Tk_CanvasGetCoord, Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords, Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin, Tk_CanvasWindowCoords, Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw, Tk_CanvasTagsOption \- utility procedures for canvas type managers .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Tk_Window \fBTk_CanvasTkwin\fR(\fIcanvas\fR) .sp int \fBTk_CanvasGetCoord\fR(\fIinterp, canvas, string, doublePtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_CanvasDrawableCoords\fR(\fIcanvas, x, y, drawableXPtr, drawableYPtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin\fR(\fIcanvas, gc\fR) .sp \fBTk_CanvasWindowCoords\fR(\fIcanvas, x, y, screenXPtr, screenYPtr\fR) .sp \fBTk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw\fR(\fIcanvas, x1, y1, x2, y2\fR) .sp Tk_OptionParseProc *\fBTk_CanvasTagsParseProc\fR; .sp Tk_OptionPrintProc *\fBTk_CanvasTagsPrintProc\fR; .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ItemType *drawableXPtr .AP Tk_Canvas canvas in A token that identifies a canvas widget. .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in/out Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP "const char" *string in Textual description of a canvas coordinate. .AP double *doublePtr out Points to place to store a converted coordinate. .AP double x in An x coordinate in the space of the canvas. .AP double y in A y coordinate in the space of the canvas. .AP short *drawableXPtr out Pointer to a location in which to store an x coordinate in the space of the drawable currently being used to redisplay the canvas. .AP short *drawableYPtr out Pointer to a location in which to store a y coordinate in the space of the drawable currently being used to redisplay the canvas. .AP GC gc out Graphics context to modify. .AP short *screenXPtr out Points to a location in which to store the screen coordinate in the canvas window that corresponds to \fIx\fR. .AP short *screenYPtr out Points to a location in which to store the screen coordinate in the canvas window that corresponds to \fIy\fR. .AP int x1 in Left edge of the region that needs redisplay. Only pixels at or to the right of this coordinate need to be redisplayed. .AP int y1 in Top edge of the region that needs redisplay. Only pixels at or below this coordinate need to be redisplayed. .AP int x2 in Right edge of the region that needs redisplay. Only pixels to the left of this coordinate need to be redisplayed. .AP int y2 in Bottom edge of the region that needs redisplay. Only pixels above this coordinate need to be redisplayed. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These procedures are called by canvas type managers to perform various utility functions. .PP \fBTk_CanvasTkwin\fR returns the Tk_Window associated with a particular canvas. .PP \fBTk_CanvasGetCoord\fR translates a string specification of a coordinate (such as \fB2p\fR or \fB1.6c\fR) into a double-precision canvas coordinate. If \fIstring\fR is a valid coordinate description then \fBTk_CanvasGetCoord\fR stores the corresponding canvas coordinate at *\fIdoublePtr\fR and returns \fBTCL_OK\fR. Otherwise it stores an error message in \fIinterp->result\fR and returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR. .PP \fBTk_CanvasDrawableCoords\fR is called by type managers during redisplay to compute where to draw things. Given \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR coordinates in the space of the canvas, \fBTk_CanvasDrawableCoords\fR computes the corresponding pixel in the drawable that is currently being used for redisplay; it returns those coordinates in *\fIdrawableXPtr\fR and *\fIdrawableYPtr\fR. This procedure should not be invoked except during redisplay. .PP \fBTk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin\fR is also used during redisplay. It sets the stipple origin in \fIgc\fR so that stipples drawn with \fIgc\fR in the current offscreen pixmap will line up with stipples drawn with origin (0,0) in the canvas's actual window. \fBTk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin\fR is needed in order to guarantee that stipple patterns line up properly when the canvas is redisplayed in small pieces. Redisplays are carried out in double-buffered fashion where a piece of the canvas is redrawn in an offscreen pixmap and then copied back onto the screen. In this approach the stipple origins in graphics contexts need to be adjusted during each redisplay to compensate for the position of the off-screen pixmap relative to the window. If an item is being drawn with stipples, its type manager typically calls \fBTk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin\fR just before using \fIgc\fR to draw something; after it is finished drawing, the type manager calls \fBXSetTSOrigin\fR to restore the origin in \fIgc\fR back to (0,0) (the restore is needed because graphics contexts are shared, so they cannot be modified permanently). .PP \fBTk_CanvasWindowCoords\fR is similar to \fBTk_CanvasDrawableCoords\fR except that it returns coordinates in the canvas's window on the screen, instead of coordinates in an off-screen pixmap. .PP \fBTk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw\fR may be invoked by a type manager to inform Tk that a portion of a canvas needs to be redrawn. The \fIx1\fR, \fIy1\fR, \fIx2\fR, and \fIy2\fR arguments specify the region that needs to be redrawn, in canvas coordinates. Type managers rarely need to invoke \fBTk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw\fR, since Tk can normally figure out when an item has changed and make the redisplay request on its behalf (this happens, for example whenever Tk calls a \fIconfigureProc\fR or \fIscaleProc\fR). The only time that a type manager needs to call \fBTk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw\fR is if an item has changed on its own without being invoked through one of the procedures in its Tk_ItemType; this could happen, for example, in an image item if the image is modified using image commands. .PP \fBTk_CanvasTagsParseProc\fR and \fBTk_CanvasTagsPrintProc\fR are procedures that handle the \fB\-tags\fR option for canvas items. The code of a canvas type manager will not call these procedures directly, but will use their addresses to create a \fBTk_CustomOption\fR structure for the \fB\-tags\fR option. The code typically looks like this: .CS static Tk_CustomOption tagsOption = {Tk_CanvasTagsParseProc, Tk_CanvasTagsPrintProc, (ClientData) NULL }; static Tk_ConfigSpec configSpecs[] = { ... {TK_CONFIG_CUSTOM, "\-tags", (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, (char *) NULL, 0, TK_CONFIG_NULL_OK, &tagsOption}, ... }; .CE .SH KEYWORDS canvas, focus, item type, redisplay, selection, type manager 0707010003fd08000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700001b4f000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000003300000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1998-2000 by Scriptics Corporation. '\" All rights reserved. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: Inactive.3,v 1.3 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_GetUserInactiveTime 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetUserInactiveTime, Tk_ResetUserInactiveTime \- discover user inactivity time .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp long \fBTk_GetUserInactiveTime(\fIdisplay\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_GetUserInactiveTime(\fIdisplay\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Display *display .AP Display *display in The display on which the user inactivity timer is to be queried or reset. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_GetUserInactiveTime\fR returns the number of milliseconds that have passed since the last user interaction (usually via keyboard or mouse) with the respective display. On systems and displays that do not support querying the user inactiviy time, \fB\-1\fR is returned. \fBTk_GetUserInactiveTime\fR resets the user inactivity timer of the given display to zero. On windowing systems that do not support multiple displays \fIdisplay\fR can be passed as \fBNULL\fR. .SH KEYWORDS idle, inactive 0707010003fd07000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700001e5f000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002e00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_QueueWindowEvent.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: QWinEvent.3,v 1.3 2002/06/15 00:21:42 hobbs Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_QueueWindowEvent 3 7.5 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_CollapseMotionEvents, Tk_QueueWindowEvent \- Add a window event to the Tcl event queue .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp int \fBTk_CollapseMotionEvents\fR(\fIdisplay, collapse\fR) .sp \fBTk_QueueWindowEvent\fR(\fIeventPtr, position\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tcl_QueuePosition position .AP Display *display in Display for which to control motion event collapsing. .AP int collapse in Indicates whether motion events should be collapsed or not. .AP XEvent *eventPtr in An event to add to the event queue. .AP Tcl_QueuePosition position in Where to add the new event in the queue: \fBTCL_QUEUE_TAIL\fR, \fBTCL_QUEUE_HEAD\fR, or \fBTCL_QUEUE_MARK\fR. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_QueueWindowEvent\fR places a window event on Tcl's internal event queue for eventual servicing. It creates a Tcl_Event structure, copies the event into that structure, and calls \fBTcl_QueueEvent\fR to add the event to the queue. When the event is eventually removed from the queue it is processed just like all window events. .PP When multiple motion events are received for the same window in rapid succession, they are collapsed by default. This behavior can be controlled with \fBTk_CollapseMotionEvents\fR. \fBTk_CollapseMotionEvents\fR always returns the previous value for collapse behavior on the \fIdisplay\fR. .PP The \fIposition\fR argument to \fBTk_QueueWindowEvent\fR has the same significance as for \fBTcl_QueueEvent\fR; see the documentation for \fBTcl_QueueEvent\fR for details. .SH KEYWORDS callback, clock, handler, modal timeout, events 0707010003fcf7000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b800001f8a000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002200000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_Main.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: Tk_Main.3,v 1.6 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_Main 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_Main \- main program for Tk-based applications .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_Main\fR(\fIargc, argv, appInitProc\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc .AP int argc in Number of elements in \fIargv\fR. .AP char *argv[] in Array of strings containing command-line arguments. .AP Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc in Address of an application-specific initialization procedure. The value for this argument is usually \fBTcl_AppInit\fR. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_Main\fR acts as the main program for most Tk-based applications. Starting with Tk 4.0 it is not called \fBmain\fR anymore because it is part of the Tk library and having a function \fBmain\fR in a library (particularly a shared library) causes problems on many systems. Having \fBmain\fR in the Tk library would also make it hard to use Tk in C++ programs, since C++ programs must have special C++ \fBmain\fR functions. .PP Normally each application contains a small \fBmain\fR function that does nothing but invoke \fBTk_Main\fR. \fBTk_Main\fR then does all the work of creating and running a \fBwish\fR-like application. .PP When it is has finished its own initialization, but before it processes commands, \fBTk_Main\fR calls the procedure given by the \fIappInitProc\fR argument. This procedure provides a .QW hook for the application to perform its own initialization, such as defining application-specific commands. The procedure must have an interface that matches the type \fBTcl_AppInitProc\fR: .CS typedef int Tcl_AppInitProc(Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR); .CE \fIAppInitProc\fR is almost always a pointer to \fBTcl_AppInit\fR; for more details on this procedure, see the documentation for \fBTcl_AppInit\fR. .SH KEYWORDS application-specific initialization, command-line arguments, main program 0707010003fd16000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b800001aef000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002a00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_CreateTheme.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 2003 Joe English '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: ttk_Theme.3,v 1.1 2006/10/31 01:42:25 hobbs Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Ttk_CreateTheme 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget" .BS .SH NAME Ttk_CreateTheme, Ttk_GetTheme, Ttk_GetDefaultTheme, Ttk_GetCurrentTheme \- create and use Tk themes. .SH SYNOPSIS .nf Ttk_Theme Ttk_CreateTheme(\fIinterp\fR, \fIname\fR, \fIparentTheme\fR); Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetTheme(\fIinterp\fR, \fIname\fR); Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetDefaultTheme(\fIinterp\fR); Ttk_Theme Ttk_GetCurrentTheme(\fIinterp\fR); .fi .SH ARGUMENTS .AP "Tcl_Interp *" interp in The Tcl interpreter in which to register/query available themes. .AP "Ttk_Theme" parentTheme in Fallback or parent theme from which the new theme will inherit elements and layouts. .AP "const char *" name in The name of the theme. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .SH "SEE ALSO" Ttk_RegisterLayout, Ttk_BuildLayout .\" .SH KEYWORDS 0707010003fcd7000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b600003420000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002700000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_FreeColor.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1991 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetColor.3,v 1.8 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_AllocColorFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_AllocColorFromObj, Tk_GetColor, Tk_GetColorFromObj, Tk_GetColorByValue, Tk_NameOfColor, Tk_FreeColorFromObj, Tk_FreeColor \- maintain database of colors .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp XColor * \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj(\fIinterp, tkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp XColor * \fBTk_GetColor(\fIinterp, tkwin, name\fB)\fR .sp XColor * \fBTk_GetColorFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp XColor * \fBTk_GetColorByValue(\fItkwin, prefPtr\fB)\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfColor(\fIcolorPtr\fB)\fR .sp GC \fBTk_GCForColor(\fIcolorPtr, drawable\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_FreeColorFromObj(\fItkwin, objPtr\fB)\fR .sp \fBTk_FreeColor(\fIcolorPtr\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tcl_Interp" *colorPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window in which color will be used. .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out String value describes desired color; internal rep will be modified to cache pointer to corresponding (XColor *). .AP char *name in Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except description of color is passed as a string and resulting (XColor *) is not cached. .AP XColor *prefPtr in Indicates red, green, and blue intensities of desired color. .AP XColor *colorPtr in Pointer to X color information. Must have been allocated by previous call to \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR, \fBTk_GetColor\fR or \fBTk_GetColorByValue\fR, except when passed to \fBTk_NameOfColor\fR. .AP Drawable drawable in Drawable in which the result graphics context will be used. Must have same screen and depth as the window for which the color was allocated. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These procedures manage the colors being used by a Tk application. They allow colors to be shared whenever possible, so that colormap space is preserved, and they pick closest available colors when colormap space is exhausted. .PP Given a textual description of a color, \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR locates a pixel value that may be used to render the color in a particular window. The desired color is specified with an object whose string value must have one of the following forms: .TP 20 \fIcolorname\fR Any of the valid textual names for a color defined in the server's color database file, such as \fBred\fR or \fBPeachPuff\fR. .TP 20 \fB#\fIRGB\fR .TP 20 \fB#\fIRRGGBB\fR .TP 20 \fB#\fIRRRGGGBBB\fR .TP 20 \fB#\fIRRRRGGGGBBBB\fR A numeric specification of the red, green, and blue intensities to use to display the color. Each \fIR\fR, \fIG\fR, or \fIB\fR represents a single hexadecimal digit. The four forms permit colors to be specified with 4-bit, 8-bit, 12-bit or 16-bit values. When fewer than 16 bits are provided for each color, they represent the most significant bits of the color. For example, #3a7 is the same as #3000a0007000. .PP \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR returns a pointer to an XColor structure; the structure indicates the exact intensities of the allocated color (which may differ slightly from those requested, depending on the limitations of the screen) and a pixel value that may be used to draw with the color in \fItkwin\fR. If an error occurs in \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR (such as an unknown color name) then NULL is returned and an error message is stored in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL. If the colormap for \fItkwin\fR is full, \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR will use the closest existing color in the colormap. \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR caches information about the return value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to procedures such as \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR and \fBTk_GetColorFromObj\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetColor\fR is identical to \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR except that the description of the color is specified with a string instead of an object. This prevents \fBTk_GetColor\fR from caching the return value, so \fBTk_GetColor\fR is less efficient than \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetColorFromObj\fR returns the token for an existing color, given the window and description used to create the color. \fBTk_GetColorFromObj\fR does not actually create the color; the color must already have been created with a previous call to \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR or \fBTk_GetColor\fR. The return value is cached in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to \fBTk_GetColorFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR and \fItkwin\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetColorByValue\fR is similar to \fBTk_GetColor\fR except that the desired color is indicated with the \fIred\fR, \fIgreen\fR, and \fIblue\fR fields of the structure pointed to by \fIcolorPtr\fR. .PP This package maintains a database of all the colors currently in use. If the same color is requested multiple times from \fBTk_GetColor\fR or \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR (e.g. by different windows), or if the same intensities are requested multiple times from \fBTk_GetColorByValue\fR, then existing pixel values will be re-used. Re-using an existing pixel avoids any interaction with the window server, which makes the allocation much more efficient. These procedures also provide a portable interface that works across all platforms. For this reason, you should generally use \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR, \fBTk_GetColor\fR, or \fBTk_GetColorByValue\fR instead of lower level procedures like \fBXAllocColor\fR. .PP Since different calls to this package may return the same shared pixel value, callers should never change the color of a pixel returned by the procedures. If you need to change a color value dynamically, you should use \fBXAllocColorCells\fR to allocate the pixel value for the color. .PP The procedure \fBTk_NameOfColor\fR is roughly the inverse of \fBTk_GetColor\fR. If its \fIcolorPtr\fR argument was created by \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR or \fBTk_GetColor\fR then the return value is the string that was used to create the color. If \fIcolorPtr\fR was created by a call to \fBTk_GetColorByValue\fR, or by any other mechanism, then the return value is a string that could be passed to \fBTk_GetColor\fR to return the same color. Note: the string returned by \fBTk_NameOfColor\fR is only guaranteed to persist until the next call to \fBTk_NameOfColor\fR. .PP \fBTk_GCForColor\fR returns a graphics context whose \fBforeground\fR field is the pixel allocated for \fIcolorPtr\fR and whose other fields all have default values. This provides an easy way to do basic drawing with a color. The graphics context is cached with the color and will exist only as long as \fIcolorPtr\fR exists; it is freed when the last reference to \fIcolorPtr\fR is freed by calling \fBTk_FreeColor\fR. .PP When a color is no longer needed \fBTk_FreeColorFromObj\fR or \fBTk_FreeColor\fR should be called to release it. For \fBTk_FreeColorFromObj\fR the color to release is specified with the same information used to create it; for \fBTk_FreeColor\fR the color to release is specified with a pointer to its XColor structure. There should be exactly one call to \fBTk_FreeColorFromObj\fR or \fBTk_FreeColor\fR for each call to \fBTk_AllocColorFromObj\fR, \fBTk_GetColor\fR, or \fBTk_GetColorByValue\fR. .SH KEYWORDS color, intensity, object, pixel value 0707010003fcd6000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b600001b7e000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000003000000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_DrawFocusHighlight.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: DrawFocHlt.3,v 1.3 2000/03/31 09:23:48 hobbs Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_DrawFocusHighlight 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_DrawFocusHighlight \- draw the traversal highlight ring for a widget .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_DrawFocusHighlight(\fItkwin, gc, width, drawable\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tcl_Interp" *joinPtr .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window for which the highlight is being drawn. Used to retrieve the window's dimensions, among other things. .AP GC gc in Graphics context to use for drawing the highlight. .AP int width in Width of the highlight ring, in pixels. .AP Drawable drawable in Drawable in which to draw the highlight; usually an offscreen pixmap for double buffering. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_DrawFocusHighlight\fR is a utility procedure that draws the traversal highlight ring for a widget. It is typically invoked by widgets during redisplay. .SH KEYWORDS focus, traversal highlight 0707010003fd0a000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b7000024e6000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002c00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_RestrictEvents.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: RestrictEv.3,v 1.7 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_RestrictEvents 3 "" Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_RestrictEvents \- filter and selectively delay X events .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp Tk_RestrictProc * \fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR(\fIproc, clientData, prevClientDataPtr\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_RestrictProc **prevClientDataPtr .AP Tk_RestrictProc *proc in Predicate procedure to call to filter incoming X events. NULL means do not restrict events at all. .AP ClientData clientData in Arbitrary argument to pass to \fIproc\fR. .AP ClientData *prevClientDataPtr out Pointer to place to save argument to previous restrict procedure. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP This procedure is useful in certain situations where applications are only prepared to receive certain X events. After \fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR is called, \fBTk_DoOneEvent\fR (and hence \fBTk_MainLoop\fR) will filter X input events through \fIproc\fR. \fIProc\fR indicates whether a given event is to be processed immediately, deferred until some later time (e.g. when the event restriction is lifted), or discarded. \fIProc\fR is a procedure with arguments and result that match the type \fBTk_RestrictProc\fR: .CS typedef Tk_RestrictAction Tk_RestrictProc( ClientData \fIclientData\fR, XEvent *\fIeventPtr\fR); .CE The \fIclientData\fR argument is a copy of the \fIclientData\fR passed to \fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR; it may be used to provide \fIproc\fR with information it needs to filter events. The \fIeventPtr\fR points to an event under consideration. \fIProc\fR returns a restrict action (enumerated type \fBTk_RestrictAction\fR) that indicates what \fBTk_DoOneEvent\fR should do with the event. If the return value is \fBTK_PROCESS_EVENT\fR, then the event will be handled immediately. If the return value is \fBTK_DEFER_EVENT\fR, then the event will be left on the event queue for later processing. If the return value is \fBTK_DISCARD_EVENT\fR, then the event will be removed from the event queue and discarded without being processed. .PP \fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR uses its return value and \fIprevClientDataPtr\fR to return information about the current event restriction procedure (a NULL return value means there are currently no restrictions). These values may be used to restore the previous restriction state when there is no longer any need for the current restriction. .PP There are very few places where \fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR is needed. In most cases, the best way to restrict events is by changing the bindings with the \fBbind\fR Tcl command or by calling \fBTk_CreateEventHandler\fR and \fBTk_DeleteEventHandler\fR from C. The main place where \fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR must be used is when performing synchronous actions (for example, if you need to wait for a particular event to occur on a particular window but you do not want to invoke any handlers for any other events). The .QW obvious solution in these situations is to call \fBXNextEvent\fR or \fBXWindowEvent\fR, but these procedures cannot be used because Tk keeps its own event queue that is separate from the X event queue. Instead, call \fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR to set up a filter, then call \fBTk_DoOneEvent\fR to retrieve the desired event(s). .SH KEYWORDS delay, event, filter, restriction 0707010003fd15000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700002045000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002700000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_UnsetGrid.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: SetGrid.3,v 1.2 1998/09/14 18:22:53 stanton Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_SetGrid 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_SetGrid, Tk_UnsetGrid \- control the grid for interactive resizing .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_SetGrid\fR(\fItkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight, widthInc, heightInc\fR) .sp \fBTk_UnsetGrid\fR(\fItkwin\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window heightInc .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window. .AP int reqWidth in Width in grid units that corresponds to the pixel dimension \fItkwin\fR has requested via \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR. .AP int reqHeight in Height in grid units that corresponds to the pixel dimension \fItkwin\fR has requested via \fBTk_GeometryRequest\fR. .AP int widthInc in Width of one grid unit, in pixels. .AP int heightInc in Height of one grid unit, in pixels. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_SetGrid\fR turns on gridded geometry management for \fItkwin\fR's toplevel window and specifies the geometry of the grid. \fBTk_SetGrid\fR is typically invoked by a widget when its \fBsetGrid\fR option is true. It restricts interactive resizing of \fItkwin\fR's toplevel window so that the space allocated to the toplevel is equal to its requested size plus or minus even multiples of \fIwidthInc\fR and \fIheightInc\fR. Furthermore, the \fIreqWidth\fR and \fIreqHeight\fR values are passed to the window manager so that it can report the window's size in grid units during interactive resizes. If \fItkwin\fR's configuration changes (e.g., the size of a grid unit changes) then the widget should invoke \fBTk_SetGrid\fR again with the new information. .PP \fBTk_UnsetGrid\fR cancels gridded geometry management for \fItkwin\fR's toplevel window. .PP For each toplevel window there can be at most one internal window with gridding enabled. If \fBTk_SetGrid\fR or \fBTk_UnsetGrid\fR is invoked when some other window is already controlling gridding for \fItkwin\fR's toplevel, the calls for the new window have no effect. .PP See the \fBwm\fR manual entry for additional information on gridded geometry management. .SH KEYWORDS grid, window, window manager 0707010003fd01000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b70000234c000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002b00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfJustify.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetJustify.3,v 1.10 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_GetJustifyFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetJustifyFromObj, Tk_GetJustify, Tk_NameOfJustify \- translate between strings and justification styles .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp int \fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj(\fIinterp, objPtr, justifyPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetJustify(\fIinterp, string, justifyPtr\fB)\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfJustify(\fIjustify\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tk_Justify" *justifyPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting, or NULL. .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out String value contains name of justification style, one of .QW left , .QW right , or .QW center . The internal rep will be modified to cache corresponding justify value. .AP "const char" *string in Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except description of justification style is passed as a string. .AP int *justifyPtr out Pointer to location in which to store justify value corresponding to \fIobjPtr\fR or \fIstring\fR. .AP Tk_Justify justify in Justification style (one of the values listed below). .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj\fR places in \fI*justifyPtr\fR the justify value corresponding to \fIobjPtr\fR's value. This value will be one of the following: .TP \fBTK_JUSTIFY_LEFT\fR Means that the text on each line should start at the left edge of the line; as a result, the right edges of lines may be ragged. .TP \fBTK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT\fR Means that the text on each line should end at the right edge of the line; as a result, the left edges of lines may be ragged. .TP \fBTK_JUSTIFY_CENTER\fR Means that the text on each line should be centered; as a result, both the left and right edges of lines may be ragged. .PP Under normal circumstances the return value is \fBTCL_OK\fR and \fIinterp\fR is unused. If \fIobjPtr\fR does not contain a valid justification style or an abbreviation of one of these names, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned, \fI*justifyPtr\fR is unmodified, and an error message is stored in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL. \fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj\fR caches information about the return value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to \fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetJustify\fR is identical to \fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj\fR except that the description of the justification is specified with a string instead of an object. This prevents \fBTk_GetJustify\fR from caching the return value, so \fBTk_GetJustify\fR is less efficient than \fBTk_GetJustifyFromObj\fR. .PP \fBTk_NameOfJustify\fR is the logical inverse of \fBTk_GetJustify\fR. Given a justify value it returns a statically-allocated string corresponding to \fIjustify\fR. If \fIjustify\fR is not a legal justify value, then .QW "unknown justification style" is returned. .SH KEYWORDS center, fill, justification, string 0707010003fd17000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b80000361e000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002700000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Ttk_StickBox.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 2004 Joe English '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: ttk_Geometry.3,v 1.4 2007/12/13 15:23:44 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Geometry 3 8.5 Tk "Tk Themed Widget" .BS .SH NAME Ttk_MakeBox, Ttk_PadBox, Ttk_ExpandBox, Ttk_PackBox, Ttk_StickBox, Ttk_PlaceBox, Ttk_BoxContains, Ttk_MakePadding, Ttk_UniformPadding, Ttk_AddPadding, Ttk_RelievePadding, Ttk_GetPaddingFromObj, Ttk_GetBorderFromObj, Ttk_GetStickyFromObj \- Tk themed geometry utilities .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR Ttk_Box \fBTtk_MakeBox\fR(int \fIx\fR, int \fIy\fR, int \fIwidth\fR, int \fIheight\fR); Ttk_Box \fBTtk_PadBox\fR(Ttk_Box \fIparcel\fR, Ttk_Padding \fIpadding\fR); Ttk_Box \fBTtk_ExpandBox\fR(Ttk_Box \fIparcel\fR, Ttk_Padding \fIpadding\fR); Ttk_Box \fBTtk_PackBox\fR(Ttk_Box *\fIcavity\fR, int \fIwidth\fR, int \fIheight\fR, Ttk_Side \fIside\fR); Ttk_Box \fBTtk_StickBox\fR(Ttk_Box \fIparcel\fR, int \fIwidth\fR, int \fIheight\fR, unsigned \fIsticky\fR); Ttk_Box \fBTtk_PlaceBox\fR(Ttk_Box *\fIcavity\fR, int \fIwidth\fR, int \fIheight\fR, Ttk_Side \fIside\fR, unsigned \fIsticky\fR); Ttk_Box \fBTtk_AnchorBox\fR(Ttk_Box \fIparcel\fR, int \fIwidth\fR, int \fIheight\fR, Tk_Anchor \fIanchor\fR); Ttk_Padding \fBTtk_MakePadding\fR(short \fIleft\fR, short \fItop\fR, short \fIright\fR, short \fIbottom\fR); Ttk_Padding \fBTtk_UniformPadding\fR(short \fIborder\fR); Ttk_Padding \fBTtk_AddPadding\fR(Ttk_Padding \fIpadding1\fR, Ttk_Padding \fIpadding2\fR; Ttk_Padding \fBTtk_RelievePadding\fR(Ttk_Padding \fIpadding\fR, int \fIrelief\fR); int \fBTtk_BoxContains\fR(Ttk_Box \fIbox\fR, int \fIx\fR, int \fIy\fR); int \fBTtk_GetPaddingFromObj\fR(Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tk_Window \fItkwin\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIobjPtr\fR, Ttk_Padding *\fIpadding_rtn\fR); int \fBTtk_GetBorderFromObj\fR(Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIobjPtr\fR, Ttk_Padding *\fIpadding_rtn\fR); int \fBTtk_GetStickyFromObj\fR(Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIobjPtr\fR, int *\fIsticky_rtn\fR); .fi .SH ARGUMENTS .AP Tk_Anchor anchor in One of the symbolic constants \fBTK_ANCHOR_N\fR, \fBTK_ANCHOR_NE\fR, etc. See \fITk_GetAnchorFromObj(3)\fR. .AP "Ttk_Box *" cavity in/out A rectangular region from which a parcel is allocated. .AP short border in Extra padding (in pixels) to add uniformly to each side of a region. .AP short bottom in Extra padding (in pixels) to add to the bottom of a region. .AP Ttk_Box box in .AP "Ttk_Box *" box_rtn out Specifies a rectangular region. .AP int height in The height in pixels of a region. .AP "Tcl_Interp *" interp in Used to store error messages. .AP int left in Extra padding (in pixels) to add to the left side of a region. .AP "Tcl_Obj *" objPtr in String value contains a symbolic name to be converted to an enumerated value or bitmask. Internal rep may be be modified to cache corresponding value. .AP Ttk_Padding padding in .AP "Ttk_Padding *" padding_rtn out Extra padding to add on the inside of a region. .AP Ttk_Box parcel in A rectangular region, allocated from a cavity. .AP int relief in One of the standard Tk relief options (TK_RELIEF_RAISED, TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN, etc.). See \fBTk_GetReliefFromObj\fR. .AP short right in Extra padding (in pixles) to add to the right side of a region. .AP Ttk_Side side in One of \fBTTK_SIDE_LEFT\fR, \fBTTK_SIDE_TOP\fR, \fBTTK_SIDE_RIGHT\fR, or \fBTTK_SIDE_BOTTOM\fR. .AP unsigned sticky in A bitmask containing one or more of the bits \fBTTK_STICK_W\fR (west, or left), \fBTTK_STICK_E\fR (east, or right, \fBTTK_STICK_N\fR (north, or top), and \fBTTK_STICK_S\fR (south, or bottom). \fBTTK_FILL_X\fR is defined as a synonym for (TTK_STICK_W|TTK_STICK_E), \fBTTK_FILL_Y\fR is a synonym for (TTK_STICK_N|TTK_STICK_S), and \fBTTK_FILL_BOTH\fR and \fBTTK_STICK_ALL\fR are synonyms for (TTK_FILL_X|TTK_FILL_Y). See also: \fIgrid(n)\fR. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window whose screen geometry determines the conversion between absolute units and pixels. .AP short top in Extra padding at the top of a region. .AP int width in The width in pixels of a region. .AP int x in X coordinate of upper-left corner of region. .AP int y in Y coordinate of upper-left corner of region. .BE .SH "BOXES" The \fBTtk_Box\fR structure represents a rectangular region of a window: .CS typedef struct { int x; int y; int width; int height; } Ttk_Box; .CE All coordinates are relative to the window. .PP \fBTtk_MakeBox\fR is a convenience routine that contsructs a \fBTtk_Box\fR structure representing a region \fIwidth\fR pixels wide, \fIheight\fR pixels tall, at the specified \fIx, y\fR coordinates. .PP \fBTtk_PadBox\fR returns a new box located inside the specified \fIparcel\fR, shrunken according to the left, top, right, and bottom margins specified by \fIpadding\fR. .PP \fBTtk_ExpandBox\fR is the inverse of \fBTtk_PadBox\fR: it returns a new box surrounding the specified \fIparcel\fR, expanded according to the left, top, right, and bottom margins specified by \fIpadding\fR. .PP \fBTtk_PackBox\fR allocates a parcel \fIwidth\fR by \fIheight\fR pixels wide on the specified \fIside\fR of the \fIcavity\fR, and shrinks the \fIcavity\fR accordingly. .PP \fBTtk_StickBox\fR places a box with the requested \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR inside the \fIparcel\fR according to the \fIsticky\fR bits. .PP \fBTtk_PlaceBox\fR combines \fBTtk_PackBox\fR and \fBTtk_StickBox\fR: it allocates a parcel on the specified \fIside\fR of the \fIcavity\fR, places a box of the requested size inside the parcel according to \fIsticky\fR, and shrinks the \fIcavity\fR. .PP \fBTtk_AnchorBox\fR places a box with the requested \fIwidth\fR and \fIheight\fR inside the \fIparcel\fR according to the specified \fIanchor\fR option. .PP \fBTtk_BoxContains\fR tests if the specified \fIx, y\fR coordinate lies within the rectangular region \fIbox\fR. .SH "PADDDING" The \fBTtk_Padding\fR structure is used to represent borders, internal padding, and external margins: .CS typedef struct { short left; short top; short right; short bottom; } Ttk_Padding; .CE .PP \fBTtk_MakePadding\fR is a convenience routine that contsructs a \fBTtk_Padding\fR structure with the specified left, top, right, and bottom components. .PP \fBTtk_UniformPadding\fR constructs a \fBTtk_Padding\fR structure with all components equal to the specified \fIborder\fR. .PP \fBTtk_AddPadding\fR adds two \fBTtk_Padding\fRs together and returns a combined padding containing the sum of the individual padding components. .PP \fBTtk_RelievePadding\fR adds an extra 2 pixels of padding to \fIpadding\fR according to the specified \fIrelief\fR. If \fIrelief\fR is \fBTK_RELIEF_SUNKEN\fR, adds two pixels at the top and left so the inner region is shifted down and to the left. If it is \fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR, adds two pixels at the bottom and right so the inner region is shifted up and to the right. Otherwise, adds 1 pixel on all sides. This is typically used in element geometry procedures to simulate a .QW pressed-in look for pushbuttons. .SH "CONVERSION ROUTINES" \fBTtk_GetPaddingFromObj\fR converts the string in \fIobjPtr\fR to a \fBTtk_Padding\fR structure. The string representation is a list of up to four length specifications .QW "\fIleft top right bottom\fR" . If fewer than four elements are specified, \fIbottom\fR defaults to \fItop\fR, \fIright\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR, and \fItop\fR defaults to \fIleft\fR. See \fBTk_GetPixelsFromObj(3)\fR for the syntax of length specifications. .PP \fBTtk_GetBorderFromObj\fR is the same as \fBTtk_GetPaddingFromObj\fR except that the lengths are specified as integers (i.e., resolution-dependant values like \fI3m\fR are not allowed). .PP \fBTtk_GetStickyFromObj\fR converts the string in \fIobjPtr\fR to a \fIsticky\fR bitmask. The string contains zero or more of the characters \fBn\fR, \fBs\fR, \fBe\fR, or \fBw\fR. .SH "SEE ALSO" Tk_GetReliefFromObj(3), Tk_GetPixelsFromObj(3), Tk_GetAnchorFromObj(3) .SH "KEYWORDS" geometry, padding, margins, box, region, sticky, relief 0707010003fcee000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b700001e20000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002e00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_GetVRootGeometry.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetVRoot.3,v 1.7 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_GetVRootGeometry 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetVRootGeometry \- Get location and size of virtual root for window .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp \fBTk_GetVRootGeometry(\fItkwin, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_Window heightPtr .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Token for window whose virtual root is to be queried. .AP int xPtr out Points to word in which to store x-offset of virtual root. .AP int yPtr out Points to word in which to store y-offset of virtual root. .AP "int" widthPtr out Points to word in which to store width of virtual root. .AP "int" heightPtr out Points to word in which to store height of virtual root. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_GetVRootGeometry\fR returns geometry information about the virtual root window associated with \fItkwin\fR. The .QW associated virtual root is the one in which \fItkwin\fR's nearest top-level ancestor (or \fItkwin\fR itself if it is a top-level window) has been reparented by the window manager. This window is identified by a \fB__SWM_ROOT\fR or \fB__WM_ROOT\fR property placed on the top-level window by the window manager. If \fItkwin\fR is not associated with a virtual root (e.g. because the window manager does not use virtual roots) then *\fIxPtr\fR and *\fIyPtr\fR will be set to 0 and *\fIwidthPtr\fR and *\fIheightPtr\fR will be set to the dimensions of the screen containing \fItkwin\fR. .SH KEYWORDS geometry, height, location, virtual root, width, window manager 0707010003fd02000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b70000226c000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002a00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_NameOfRelief.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1990 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: GetRelief.3,v 1.11 2007/12/13 15:23:43 dgp Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_GetReliefFromObj 3 8.1 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_GetReliefFromObj, Tk_GetRelief, Tk_NameOfRelief \- translate between strings and relief values .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp int \fBTk_GetReliefFromObj(\fIinterp, objPtr, reliefPtr\fB)\fR .sp int \fBTk_GetRelief(\fIinterp, name, reliefPtr\fB)\fR .sp const char * \fBTk_NameOfRelief(\fIrelief\fB)\fR .SH ARGUMENTS .AS "Tcl_Interp" *reliefPtr .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for error reporting. .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out String value contains name of relief, one of .QW flat , .QW groove , .QW raised , .QW ridge , .QW solid , or .QW sunken ; the internal rep will be modified to cache corresponding relief value. .AP char *string in Same as \fIobjPtr\fR except description of relief is passed as a string. .AP int *reliefPtr out Pointer to location in which to store relief value corresponding to \fIobjPtr\fR or \fIname\fR. .AP "const char" *name Name of the relief. .AP int relief in Relief value (one of \fBTK_RELIEF_FLAT\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_SUNKEN\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_GROOVE\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_SOLID\fR, or \fBTK_RELIEF_RIDGE\fR). .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP \fBTk_GetReliefFromObj\fR places in \fI*reliefPtr\fR the relief value corresponding to the value of \fIobjPtr\fR. This value will be one of \fBTK_RELIEF_FLAT\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_RAISED\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_SUNKEN\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_GROOVE\fR, \fBTK_RELIEF_SOLID\fR, or \fBTK_RELIEF_RIDGE\fR. Under normal circumstances the return value is \fBTCL_OK\fR and \fIinterp\fR is unused. If \fIobjPtr\fR does not contain one of the valid relief names or an abbreviation of one of them, then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned, \fI*reliefPtr\fR is unmodified, and an error message is stored in \fIinterp\fR's result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL. \fBTk_GetReliefFromObj\fR caches information about the return value in \fIobjPtr\fR, which speeds up future calls to \fBTk_GetReliefFromObj\fR with the same \fIobjPtr\fR. .PP \fBTk_GetRelief\fR is identical to \fBTk_GetReliefFromObj\fR except that the description of the relief is specified with a string instead of an object. This prevents \fBTk_GetRelief\fR from caching the return value, so \fBTk_GetRelief\fR is less efficient than \fBTk_GetReliefFromObj\fR. .PP \fBTk_NameOfRelief\fR is the logical inverse of \fBTk_GetRelief\fR. Given a relief value it returns the corresponding string (\fBflat\fR, \fBraised\fR, \fBsunken\fR, \fBgroove\fR, \fBsolid\fR, or \fBridge\fR). If \fIrelief\fR is not a legal relief value, then .QW "unknown relief" is returned. .SH KEYWORDS name, relief, string 0707010003fcc7000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b6000022e8000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002d00000000root/usr/local/man/man3/Tk_ClipboardAppend.3'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: Clipboard.3,v 1.3 2004/09/19 16:05:36 dkf Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH Tk_ClipboardClear 3 4.0 Tk "Tk Library Procedures" .BS .SH NAME Tk_ClipboardClear, Tk_ClipboardAppend \- Manage the clipboard .SH SYNOPSIS .nf \fB#include \fR .sp int \fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin\fR) .sp int \fBTk_ClipboardAppend\fR(\fIinterp, tkwin, target, format, buffer\fR) .SH ARGUMENTS .AS Tk_ClipboardClear tkwin .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in Interpreter to use for reporting errors. .AP Tk_Window tkwin in Window that determines which display's clipboard to manipulate. .AP Atom target in Conversion type for this clipboard item; has same meaning as \fItarget\fR argument to \fBTk_CreateSelHandler\fR. .AP Atom format in Representation to use when data is retrieved; has same meaning as \fIformat\fR argument to \fBTk_CreateSelHandler\fR. .AP char *buffer in Null terminated string containing the data to be appended to the clipboard. .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP These two procedures manage the clipboard for Tk. The clipboard is typically managed by calling \fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR once, then calling \fBTk_ClipboardAppend\fR to add data for any number of targets. .PP \fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR claims the CLIPBOARD selection and frees any data items previously stored on the clipboard in this application. It normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR, but if an error occurs it returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR and leaves an error message in \fIinterp->result\fR. \fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR must be called before a sequence of \fBTk_ClipboardAppend\fR calls can be issued. .PP \fBTk_ClipboardAppend\fR appends a buffer of data to the clipboard. The first buffer for a given \fItarget\fR determines the \fIformat\fR for that \fItarget\fR. Any successive appends for that \fItarget\fR must have the same format or an error will be returned. \fBTk_ClipboardAppend\fR returns \fBTCL_OK\fR if the buffer is successfully copied onto the clipboard. If the clipboard is not currently owned by the application, either because \fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR has not been called or because ownership of the clipboard has changed since the last call to \fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR, \fBTk_ClipboardAppend\fR returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR and leaves an error message in \fIinterp->result\fR. .PP In order to guarantee atomicity, no event handling should occur between \fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR and the following \fBTk_ClipboardAppend\fR calls (otherwise someone could retrieve a partially completed clipboard or claim ownership away from this application). .PP \fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR may invoke callbacks, including arbitrary Tcl scripts, as a result of losing the CLIPBOARD selection, so any calling function should take care to be reentrant at the point \fBTk_ClipboardClear\fR is invoked. .SH KEYWORDS append, clipboard, clear, format, type 0707010003fd18000041ed0000000000000000000000024c5c56d400000000000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000001800000000root/usr/local/man/mann0707010003fd1c000081a40000000000000000000000014c5c56b80000276f000000b500010002ffffffffffffffff0000002100000000root/usr/local/man/mann/bitmap.n'\" '\" Copyright (c) 1994 The Regents of the University of California. '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc. '\" '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. '\" '\" RCS: @(#) $Id: bitmap.n,v 1.2 1998/09/14 18:22:54 stanton Exp $ '\" .\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used .\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries. .\" .\" .AP type name in/out ?indent? .\" Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure. .\" type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out", .\" or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg, .\" and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be .\" needed; use .AS below instead) .\" .\" .AS ?type? ?name? .\" Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops. Type and .\" name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed .\" to .AP later. If args are omitted, default tab stops are used. .\" .\" .BS .\" Start box enclosure. From here until next .BE, everything will be .\" enclosed in one large box. .\" .\" .BE .\" End of box enclosure. .\" .\" .CS .\" Begin code excerpt. .\" .\" .CE .\" End code excerpt. .\" .\" .VS ?version? ?br? .\" Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts .\" of man pages. The first argument is ignored and used for recording .\" the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be .\" found and removed when they reach a certain age. If another argument .\" is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar. .\" .\" .VE .\" End of vertical sidebar. .\" .\" .DS .\" Begin an indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .DE .\" End of indented unfilled display. .\" .\" .SO ?manpage? .\" Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage .\" argument defines where to look up the standard options; if .\" omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive .\" lines, in three columns separated by tabs. .\" .\" .SE .\" End of list of standard options for a Tk widget. .\" .\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass .\" Start of description of a specific option. cmdName gives the .\" option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives .\" the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives .\" the option's class in the option database. .\" .\" .UL arg1 arg2 .\" Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally. .\" .\" .QW arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation). .\" .\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2? .\" Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally .\" (for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis. .\" .\" RCS: @(#) $Id: man.macros,v 1.9 2008/01/29 15:32:33 dkf Exp $ .\" .\" # Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages. .if t .wh -1.3i ^B .nr ^l \n(.l .ad b .\" # Start an argument description .de AP .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4 .el \{\ . ie !"\\$2"" .TP \\n()Cu . el .TP 15 .\} .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu .ie !"\\$3"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3) .\".b .\} .el \{\ .br .ie !"\\$2"" \{\ \&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP .\} .el \{\ \&\\fI\\$1\\fP .\} .\} .. .\" # define tabbing values for .AP .de AS .nr )A 10n .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n .nr )B \\n()Au+15n .\" .if !"\\$2"" .nr )B \\w'\\$2'u+\\n()Au+3n .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n .. .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out .\" # BS - start boxed text .\" # ^y = starting y location .\" # ^b = 1 .de BS .br .mk ^y .nr ^b 1u .if n .nf .if n .ti 0 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul' .if n .fi .. .\" # BE - end boxed text (draw box now) .de BE .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t .ie n \l'\\n(^lu\(ul' .el \{\ .\" Draw four-sided box normally, but don't draw top of .\" box if the box started on an earlier page. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \{\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .el \}\ \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\l'|0u-1.5n\(ul' .\} .\} .fi .br .nr ^b 0 .. .\" # VS - start vertical sidebar .\" # ^Y = starting y location .\" # ^v = 1 (for troff; for nroff this doesn't matter) .de VS .if !"\\$2"" .br .mk ^Y .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0 .el .nr ^v 1u .. .\" # VE - end of vertical sidebar .de VE .ie n 'mc .el \{\ .ev 2 .nf .ti 0 .mk ^t \h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\L'|\\n(^Yu-1v\(bv'\v'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu'\h'-|\\n(^lu+3n' .sp -1 .fi .ev .\} .nr ^v 0 .. .\" # Special macro to handle page bottom: finish off current .\" # box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard .\" # page bottom macro. .de ^B .ev 2 'ti 0 'nf .mk ^t .if \\n(^b \{\ .\" Draw three-sided box if this is the box's first page, .\" draw two sides but no top otherwise. .ie !\\n(^b-1 \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\l'\\n(^lu+3n\(ul'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .el \h'-1.5n'\L'|\\n(^yu-1v'\h'\\n(^lu+3n'\L'\\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^yu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .nr ^x \\n(^tu+1v-\\n(^Yu \kx\h'-\\nxu'\h'|\\n(^lu+3n'\ky\L'-\\n(^xu'\v'\\n(^xu'\h'|0u'\c .\} .bp 'fi .ev .if \\n(^b \{\ .mk ^y .nr ^b 2 .\} .if \\n(^v \{\ .mk ^Y .\} .. .\" # DS - begin display .de DS .RS .nf .sp .. .\" # DE - end display .de DE .fi .RE .sp .. .\" # SO - start of list of standard options .de SO 'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR 'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS" .LP .nf .ta 5.5c 11c .ft B .. .\" # SE - end of list of standard options .de SE .fi .ft R .LP See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options. .. .\" # OP - start of full description for a single option .de OP .LP .nf .ta 4c Command-Line Name: \\fB\\$1\\fR Database Name: \\fB\\$2\\fR Database Class: \\fB\\$3\\fR .fi .IP .. .\" # CS - begin code excerpt .de CS .RS .nf .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i .. .\" # CE - end code excerpt .de CE .fi .RE .. .\" # UL - underline word .de UL \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2 .. .\" # QW - apply quotation marks to word .de QW .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2 .. .\" # PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word .de PQ .ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3 .. .\" # QR - quoted range .de QR .ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3 .\"" fix emacs highlighting .el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3 .. .\" # MT - "empty" string .de MT .QW "" .. .TH bitmap n 4.0 Tk "Tk Built-In Commands" .BS '\" Note: do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below! .SH NAME bitmap \- Images that display two colors .SH SYNOPSIS \fBimage create bitmap \fR?\fIname\fR? ?\fIoptions\fR? .BE .SH DESCRIPTION .PP A bitmap is an image whose pixels can display either of two colors or be transparent. A bitmap image is defined by four things: a background color, a foreground color, and two bitmaps, called the \fIsource\fR and the \fImask\fR. Each of the bitmaps specifies 0/1 values for a rectangular array of pixels, an